FW5/C63- 77/56 Biological Services Program FWS/OBS-77/56 APRIL 1978 Barrier Islands Of the Atlantic and Gulf Coasts of the United States: An Annotated Bibliography fH DOCUMENT COLLECTION LITTLE ST. SIMONS I. ST. SIMONS I. JEKYLL I. ATLANTIC OCEAN CUMBERLANO I. AMELIA I. Fish and Wildlife Service 7s£ U.S. Department of the Interior The Biological Services Program was established within the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service to supply scientific information and methodologies on key environmental issues that impact fish and wildlife resources and their supporting ecosystems. The mission of the program is as follows: • To strengthen the Fish and Wildlife Service in its role as a primary source of information on national fish and wild- life resources, particularly in respect to environmental impact assessment. • To gather, analyze, and present Information that will aid decisionmakers in the identification and resolution of problems associated with major changes in land and water use. • To provide better ecological information and evaluation for Department of the Interior development programs, such as those relating to energy development. Information developed by the Biological Services Program is Intended for use in the planning and decisionmaking process to prevent or minimize the impact of development on fish and wildlife. Research activities and technical assistance services are based on an analysis of the issues a determination of the decisionmakers involved and their information needs, and an evaluation of the state of the art to identify information gaps and to determine priorities. This is a strategy that will ensure that the products produced and disseminated are timely and useful. Projects have been initiated in the following areas: coal extraction and conversion; power plants; geothermal , mineral and oil shale develop- ment; water resource analysis, including stream alterations and western water allocation; coastal ecosystems and Outer Continental Shelf develop- ment; and systems Inventory, including National Wetland Inventory, habitat classification and analysis, and information transfer. The Biological Services Program consists of the Office of Biological Services in Washington, D.C., which is responsible for overall planning and management; National Teams, which provide the Program's central scientific and technical expertise and arrange for contracting biological services studies with states, universities, consulting firms, and others; Regional Staff, who provide a link to problems at the operating level; and staff at certain Fish and Wildlife Service research facilities, who conduct inhouse research studies. I FWS/OBS-77/56 April 1978 BARRIER ISLANDS OF THE ATLANTIC AND GULF COASTS OF THE UNITED STATES: AN ANNOTATED BIBLOGRAPHY Prepared by Gulf South Research Institute 8000 GSRI Avenue Baton Rouge, Louisiana 70808 Project Leader--Jacques D. Bagur GSRI Project No. 216-836-11 Contract Mo. 14-16-0008-2113 OBS Project Officer—Paul L. Fore National Coastal Ecosystems Team U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service National Space Technoloqy Laboratories NSTL Station, Mississippi 39529 Performed for the Coastal Ecosystems Project Office of Biological Services Fish and Wildlife Service U.S. DEPARTMENT OF INTERIOR DISCLAIMER The opinions, findings, conclusions, or recommendations expressed in this report are those of the authors and do not necessarily reflect the views of the Office of Biological Services, Fish and Wildlife Service, U.S. Depart- ment of the Interior, nor does mention of trade names or commercial products constitute endorsement or recommendation for use by the Federal Government. The correct citation for this report is: Bagur, J. D. 1978. Barrier Islands of the Atlantic and Gulf Coasts of the United States: An Annotated Bibliography. U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service, Biological Services Program FWS/OBS-77/56. 215 pp. n PREFACE This annotated bibliography assembles published information on the barrier islands along the Atlantic and Gulf of Mexico coasts. The bibliography was prepared at the request of the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service's Barrier Island Representative for technical assistance for the Service and for the Interior Department's Barrier Island Working Group. The purpose of this document is to compile descriptive information on the physical features and the fish and wildlife resources of barrier islands. This compilation provides background material for the development of a Federal /State/local strategy to protect this valuable and fragile com- ponent of the coastal ecosystem. Barrier islands are usually defined as elongate, narrow land formations, composed of unconsolidated materials, and lying parallel to the shoreline. Estuaries and wetlands separate the islands from the mainland and the ocean- side usually has a dynamic dune and beach system. In this work, the defini- tion has been expanded to include spits and mangrove barrier islands. The bibliography is arranged geographically by State and by island from Maine to Texas. Under each island name, the entries appear alphabetically by the senior author's last name. An asterisk indicates that the annotations were prepared from the original article or book. In many cases., annotations were prepared from abstracts. In a few cases, annotations were not available, but the author and title were included because of particular relevance to the study. Duplicate titles were listed when the annotation pertained to more than one island or beach area. Separate author and subject indices are in- cluded. This bibliography is a preliminary effort to serve as a basis for initial investigations on coastal islands. The barrier islands and beach areas mentioned in this bibliography are not all of the island and beach for- mations of the Atlantic and Gulf Coasts, but rather those selected for special consideration by Interior's Barrier Island Working Group. Also, because of time constraints, it was necessary for Gulf South Research Insti- tute to prepare this document during a 4-week period ending in mid-October 1977. Since then, some relevant articles that were unavoidably missed were included in an addendum by the National Coastal Ecosystems Team's Project Officer. Articles and books were obtained from the Louisiana State University Library, the library at LSU's Center for Wetlands Resources, and the libraries of Gulf South Research Institute and the National Coastal Ecosystems Team, Abstracts (from which many of the annotations were prepared) were obtained by computerized and manual searches. The National Coastal Ecosystems Team con- ducted the computerized searches as follows: 1. NTIS: 1964-1977 under the terms "barrier island(s)" and "coast(al) island(s)," iii 2. BIOSIS: 1972-1977 under "barrier island(s) ," 3. ENVIROLIME: 1971-1977 under "barrier island(s)," 4. DISSERTATION ABSTRACTS: 1861-1977 under "barrier island(s)," and 5. OCEANIC ABSTRACTS: 1964-1977 under "barrier island(s)." Manual searches were made by Gulf South Research Institute as follows: 1. WATER RESOURCES ABSTRACTS: 1968-1977 under "barrier island(s)," "beach(es)," "coast(s) (al)," "island(s) ," and "key(s) "; 2. BIOLOGICAL ABSTRACTS: 1970-1977 under "island(s)" and "coast(s) (al ) ," and 1960-1969 under "island(s) "; 3. GEOGRAPHICAL ABSTRACTS (Sedimentology Series): 1972-1977 under the section "Beaches, Barrier Islands, and Other Coasts"; 4. OCEANIC ABSTRACTS: 1966-1976 under "barrier island(s)"; and 5. SEA GRANT PUBLICATION INDEX: 1968-1974 under "barrier island(s)." In addition, an unpublished "Bibliography of Barrier Islands Litera- ture," which was prepared by Terri Goldberg of the Environmental Defense Fund in 1977, was used to secure relevant titles. The bibliography was prepared under contract by Gulf South Research Institute, Baton Rouge, Louisiana for the National Coastal Ecosystems Team, Office of Biological Services, U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service. The Con- tractor's Project Leader was Jacques D. Bagur, who was assisted by Yvonne L. Day, Harriet A. Davis, Gene A. Stephens, Michael M. Liffman, Paul T. Henslee, Jan A. Thompson, and Nancy C. Shaw--all staff members of the Resources Planning and Management Division of Gulf South Research Institute. Project supervision was maintained by Dr. Paul L. Fore and Mr. Harold S. Rienstra-- both of the National Coastal Ecosystems Team. TV CONTENTS Page GENERAL WORKS 1 Flora and Fauna 3 Coastal Overviews 6 Origin, Geomorphology, and Processes 11 MAINE 17 Sheepscot 18 Popham Beach 18 Small Point 18 Pine Point 18 Goose Creek 18 Biddeford Pool 18 Goose Rock 19 Wells Beach 19 Ogunquit 19 NEW HAMPSHIRE 20 Hampton 20 Seabrook 20 MASSACHUSETTS 21 Salisbury 23 Plum Island 24 Castle Neck 25 Nahant 26 Revere Beach 27 Nantasket Beach 27 Humarock 28 Duxbury 28 Long Beach 28 Sandy Neck 28 Nobscusset-Point 29 Great Island 29 Provincelands 29 Eastham 29 Nauset 30 Monomoy 30 Nantucket Island (Coatue and Madaket) 31 Tuckernuck Island 32 Muskeget Island 33 Martha's Vineyard (Cape Poge, Katama Bay, Edgartown Great Ponds, and Tisbury Great Ponds) 33 Naushon Island 35 Nashawena 35 Cuttyhunk Island 35 Horseneck Beach 36 CONTENTS (Cont'd) Page RHODE ISLAND Green Hill Beach Charlestown Weekapaug Atlantic 40 Napatree 40 Stonington 41 Block Island 41 CONNECTICUT 43 Hammonasset Point . ' 44 Black Rock 44 NEW YORK 45 Gardiners Island 47 Fireplace 48 Maidstone Park 48 Northwest Harbor 48 Shelter Island 48 Orient Beach 48 North Haven 48 Morton 48 Southampton 48 Hampton 49 Fire Island 49 Jones Beach Island 50 Long Beach 50 Rockaway 51 NEW JERSEY 52 Sandy Hook 53 Island Beach 54 Barnegat 55 Long Beach Island 56 Little Beach Island 56 Brigantine 56 Atlantic City 57 Ocean City 57 Ludlam 58 Seven Mile Beach 58 Wildwood 58 DELAWARE 59 Rehoboth 60 Fenwick Island North 61 VI CONTENTS (Cont'd) Page MARYLAND 62 Fenwick Island South 62 Assateague Island North 63 VIRGINIA 65 Assateague Island South . : 67 Wallops Island 68 Assawomen Island 68 Metomkin Island 68 Cedar Island 69 Parramore Island 69 Hog Island 70 Cobb Island 70 Smith Island 71 Fishermans Island 72 Bodie Island North 72 NORTH CAROLINA 74 Bodie Island South 81 Hatteras Island 82 Ocracoke Island 87 Portsmouth Island . 87 Core Banks 87 Shackleford Banks 89 Bogue Banks 90 Hammock Island 92 Onslow Beach 92 Ashe Island 93 Lee Island 93 Rich Inlet 93 Figure Eight Island 93 Wrightsville Beach 93 Masonboro Island 93 Carolina Beach Island 93 Smith Island (Cape Fear) 93 Oak Island 94 Holden Beach Island 94 Hales Beach Island 95 Sunset Beach Island 95 Bird Island 95 SOUTH CAROLINA 96 Waites Island 97 Murrells Inlet 98 Pawleys Island 98 Debidue Beach 98 North Island 99 South Island 99 vn CONTENTS (Cont'd) Page SOUTH CAROLINA (Cont'd) Cedar Island 99 Murphy Island 99 Cape Island 99 Raccoon Key 100 Bull Island 100 Capers Island 100 Dewees Island 100 Isle of Palms 101 Sullivans Island . . . 101 Morris Island 101 Folly Island 102 Kiawah Island 102 Seabrook Island 102 Devaux Banks 102 Botany Bay Island 103 Edisto Island 103 Pine Island 103 Otter Island 103 Hunting Island 103 Fripps Island 104 Pritchard Island 105 Capers Island 105 St. Phillips Island 105 Bay Point Island 105 Hilton Head Island 105 Daufuskie Island 105 Turtle Island 105 Jones Island 106 GEORGIA 107 Tybee Island Ill Little Tybee Island 113 Williamson Island 113 Wassaw Island 113 Ossabaw Island 114 St. Catherines Island 115 Blackbeard Island 117 Sapelo Island 118 Wolf Island 129 Little St. Simons 129 Sea Island 129 St. Simons Island 129 Jekyll Island 131 Little Cumberland Island 132 Cumberland Island 133 vm CONTENTS (Cont'd) Page FLORIDA 135 Amelia Island 140 Bird Island 140 Talbot Island 140 Guana 140 Anastasia 140 Matanzas 140 Flagler 140 Mosquito 14J. Cape Canaveral 141 Cocoa Beach Island , 142 Vero Beach Island 142 Hutchison Island 142 Jupiter Island 142 Lake Worth 142 Palm Beach 142 Boca Raton 142 Hillsboro Beach 142 Fort Lauderdale 142 Miami Beach 142 Fisher Island 142 Virginia Key 143 Key Biscayne 143 Cape Sable 143 Mud Bay 144 Shark Point 144 McLaughlin 145 Alligator Cove 145 Duck Rock 145 Ten Thousand Islands 145 Cape Romano 145 Rice Island. . 146 Marco Island 146 Little Marco Group 146 Naples Park 146 Bonita Beach 146 Big Hickory Island 146 Black Island 146 Estero Island 146 Sanibel Island 146 Captiva Island 147 North Captiva Island 147 Cayo Costa 147 Gasparilla 147 Little Gasparilla 147 Manasota Key 147 Casey Key 147 IX CONTENTS (Cont'd) Page FLORIDA (Cont'd) Sarasota "' Lido Key 148 Longboat Key 148 Anna Maria Key 148 Passage Key 148 Egmont Key 148 Mullet Key Group 148 Cabbage Key Group 148 Long Key 148 Treasure Island I48 Sand Key 149 Clearwater Beach Island I49 Caladesi Island 149 Honeymoon Island I49 Anclote Keys 149 Bay Port 149 Pine Island 149 Chassahowitzka 150 Seashore Keys "0 Cedar Keys 15° Piney Island 151 Mashes Island 151 Alligator Point 151 Dog Island 152 St. George Island 153 St. Vincent Island 154 Indian Peninsula 155 Cape San Bias 155 Crooked Island 156 Shell Island 157 St. Andrew 157 Miramar 157 Santa Rosa Island 157 Perdido Key East 158 ALABAMA 159 Perdido Key West 160 Romar Beach 160 Mobile Point 160 Sand Island 160 Dauphin Island 160 MISSISSIPPI 161 Petit Bois Island 162 Horn Island 162 CONTENTS (Cont'd) Page MISSISSIPPI (Cont'd) Deer Island 164 Ship Island 164 Cat Island 165 LOUISIANA 167 Chandeleur Island Group 168 Grand Gosier Island 169 Breton Islands 170 Sable Island 170 Raccoon Point 170 Coquille Point. ' 170 Bird Island 170 Pelican Island 171 Bastian Island 171 Bay Joe Wise 171 Bay LaMer 171 Ronquille Island 171 Grande Terre Island Group 171 Grand Isle 171 Caminada 172 East Timbalier Island 172 Timbalier Island 172 Isles Dernieres 172 TEXAS 173 Bolivar Peninsula 176 Galveston Island 177 Rattlesnake Point 180 Foliets Island 180 Brazos 180 Cedar Lakes 180 Brown Cedar 180 Matagorda Peninsula East 180 Matagorda Peninsula West 180 Matagorda Island 180 St. Joseph Island 181 Mustang Island 181 Padre Island 183 Brazos Island 188 ADDENDUM 189 GENERAL WORKS 189 Flora and Fauna 189 Coastal Overviews 190 Origin, Geomorphology, and Processes 191 XI COflTENTS (Cont'd) Page MASSACHUSETTS 192 RHODE ISLAND 192 NEW YORK 192 NEW JERSEY 193 MARYLAND 193 VIRGINIA 194 NORTH CAROLINA 194 SOUTH CAROLINA 197 GEORGIA 198 FLORIDA 199 ALABAMA 200 MISSISSIPPI 200 TEXAS 201 AUTHOR INDEX 203 SUBJECT INDEX 213 xn GENERAL WORKS 1 ♦Chapman, V. J. 1974. Salt marshes and salt deserts of the world. J. Cramer, Lehre, Germany. 392 pp. Although most of this work centers on the salt marshes of Great Britain, the author spent some time in America studying the New England marshes in detail and other American salt marshes on the Atlantic coast. 2 Clark, J., ed. 1976. Barrier islands and beaches. Technical Proceedings of the 1976 Barrier Islands Workshop, Annapolis, Maryland, May 17-18, 1976. The Conservation Foundation, Washington, D.C. 149 pp. Titles of papers presented include: Barrier islands as significant ecosystems Comparative ecology of East Coast barrier islands The wildlife resources of barrier islands The national interest in barrier islands and beaches Barrier islands as natural storm-dependent systems Barrier beachfronts Environmental considerations and the management of barrier islands-- St. George Island and the Apalachicola Bay system Barrier island preservation—the Virginia Coast Reserve System, 3 *Clark, J. R. 1974. Coastal ecosystems: ecological considerations for man- agement of the coastal zone, The Conservation Foundation, Washington, D.C. 178 pp, This publication presents ecological principles, management principles and rules, controls, and program elements that can be used to improve management of coastal lands and waters, 4 *Copeland, B. J,, and H, T, Odum, 1974. Ecological systems by state, Pages 104-123 i_n H. T. Odum, B. J. Copeland, and E. A: McMahan, eds. Coastal ecological systems of the United States. Vol. 1. The Conservation Founda- tion, Washington, D.C, Sketch maps delineating types of coastal ecological systems are presented for Alabama, Connecticut, Delaware, Florida, Georgia, Louisiana, Maine, Maryland, Massachusetts, Mississippi, Mew Hampshire, New Jersey, New York, North Carolina, South Carolina, Rhode Island, Texas, and Virginia. 5 Ducsik, D, W, 1974, Shoreline for the public: a handbook of social and leqal considerations reqardina public recreational use of the nation's coastal shoreline. Massachusetts Institute of Technoloqy Press, Boston. 257 pp, This book describes the existinq situation in the United States, with an analysis of the economic context in which coastal recreation resources are allocated. The institutional situation (both economic and political), and then five chapters on legal aspects, including the requlation of land use, are presented, 6 Hayden, B,, and R. Dolan, 1975, Classification of coastal environments of the world. Final report, University of Virginia, Department of Environ- mental Sciences, 166 pp, The report summarizes more than 4 years of research in the classifica- tion of coastal environments. The studies included "Coastal wave climates of the Americas," "Coastal marine fauna and marine climates of the Amer- icas," and "An assessment of remote sensing as a tool in classifying coastal landscape elements." 7 *King, C, A. M. 1972. Beaches and coasts. 2nd edition. Edward Arnold, London, 570 pp, Main sections cover coastal forms, processes operating at the coast, beach movement and forms, and coastal classification. 8 Lynch, M, P., B, L, Laird, and T. F, Smollen. 1974, Marine and estuarine sanctuaries. Proceedings of the National Workshop on Sanctuaries, 28-30 November, 1973, Washington, D.C. Virginia Institute of Marine Science, Special Scientific Report Mo. 70. 213 pp. 9 *0dum, H. T., B, J. Copeland, and E. A, McMahan, eds. 1974, Coastal ecologi- cal systems of the United States. The Conservation Foundation, Washington, D,C, 4 vols, This publication was originally prepared by scientific and staff members of the University of North Carolina, Institute of Marine Sciences, as part of the National Estuarine Pollution Survey conducted in 1968 and 1969, The four volumes include a comprehensive survey of scientific information through 1969, as well as a new system for the classification of coastal ecosystems, 10 *0dum, H. T,, and B, J, Copeland. 1974, A functional classification of the coastal systems of the United States. ' >ges 5-84 in H. T. Odum, B. J. 10 (cont'd) Copeland, and E, A. McNIahan, eds, Coastal ecological systems of the United States, Vol, 1, The Conservation Foundation, Washington, D.C, 533 pp. Classifies coastal ecological systems into six major categories and 46 individual types, Three types, rocky sea fronts, high energy beaches, and mangrove swamps, are directly or indirectly related to barrier islands. 11 *Putnam, W, C., E, I, Axelrod, H, P. Bailey, and J. T. McGill, 1960. Natural coastal environments of the world, University of California, Los Angeles. 140 pp. General work on formation and structure of major types of coastal envi- ronments worldwide. Barrier islands are briefly discussed. 12 Schwartz, M. L,, ed. 1973. Barrier islands. Johy Wiley and Sons, Inc., New York, N,Y. 461 pp, This book is a compilation of 40 studies which trace more than 125 years of geomorphological investigations into the nature of barrier islands, inlets, washover fans, and cheniers. Flora and Fauna 13 *Bent, A, C, 1962, Life histories of North American shore birds. Dover Publications, New York, N,Y, 2 Vols. Basic information is provided on seven families of the order Limicolae. The birds are described in terms of nesting, food, distribution, eggs, plumage, breeding range, and enemies. 14 *Bent, A. C, 1963. Life histories of North American gulls and terns, Dover Publications, New York. 337 pp. North American gulls and terns are described in terms of nesting, food, young, and distribution. Information on eggs, plumage, behavior, and enemies, is included, 15 *Bent, A. C. 1963. Life histories of North American marsh birds. Dover Publications, New York, N.Y, 392 pp, This general work provides basic information on marsh birds, 16 *Bent, A, C, 1964. Life histories of North American petrels and pelicans, Dover Publications, New York, N.Y, 355 pp. Basic information on petrels and pelicans of North America is provided in this general v/ork. Data on nesting, food, behavior, distribution, and breeding range are included. 17 *Berrill, N. J., and M. Berrill. 1969. The life of sea islands. McGraw-Hill Book Company, New York, PLY. 231 pp. Deals with flora and fauna of sea islands generally, but also contains specific features pertaining to barrier islands of the U.S. Atlantic and Gulf coasts. Appendix describes sea islands in the National Park system. 18 Chapman, V. J. 1976. Coastal vegetation. Pergamon Press, New York, N.Y. 447 pp. 19 Chapman, V. J. 1976. Mangrove vegetation. J. Cramer, Lubrecht and Cramer, Monticello, N.Y. 292 pp. 20 *Duncan, W. H. 1974. Vascular halophytes of the Atlantic and Gulf coasts of North America north of Mexico. Pages 23-50 j_n R. J. Reimold.and W. H. Queen, eds. Ecology of halophytes. Academic Press, New York, N.Y. 605 pp. Difficulties in delimiting halophytes and halophytic habitats are dis- cussed and an annotated list of halophytes is presented. 21 *Heald, E. J. 1970. Fishery resources atlas I: New York to Florida. Uni- versity of Miami, Sea Grant Technical Bulletin No. 3. 225 pp. This report shows the location and importance of the principal fishery resources on the continental shelf of the United States from New York to Florida. 22 *Heald, E. J. 1970. Fishery resources atlas II: West Florida to Texas. University of Miami, Sea Grant Technical Bulletin No. 4. 174 pp. This report shows the location and magnitude of the principal fishery resources on the continental shelf of the United Stated from the west coast of Florida to Texas. 23 Harper, R. M. 1911. The relation of climax veaetation to islands and penin- sulas. Bulletin of the Torrey Botanical Club 38(11) :515-525. Discusses climax vegetation on peninsulas and islands of the Atlantic and Gulf coasts. 24 *Hay, J., and P. Farb. 1966. The Atlantic shore: human and natural history from Long Island to Labrador. Harper and Row, New York. 246 pp. Deals in a general fashion with flora and fauna of the northwest Atlantic shore, Long Island to Labrador. 25 *Kraeuter, J. M., and P. L. Wolf. 1974. The relationship of marine macro- invertebrates to salt marsh plants. Pages 449-462 j_n R. J. Reimold and W. H. Queen, eds. Ecology of halophytes. Academic Press, New York. 605 pp. Describes the relationship between macroinvertebrates and salt marsh plants, including those found on barrier islands. 26 *0osting, H. H. 1954. Ecological processes and vegetation of the maritime strand in the southeastern United States. Botanical Review 20:226-262. This paper brings together from the available literature what is known of community dynamics, the related ecological processes, and conditions on the sand strand. Barrier islands are included. 27 *Reimold, R. J., and W. H. Queen, eds. 1974. Ecology of halophytes. Academic Press, flew York. 605 pp. The publication considers the fundamentals of distribution, anatomy, and physiology of halophytes. It also provides an overview of the role of the halophyte in ecosystems in various parts of the world. 28 *Shanholtzer, G. F. 1974. Relationship of vertebrates to salt marsh plants. Pages 463-474 in R. J. Reimold and W. H. Queen, eds. Ecology of halophytes. Academic Press, New York. 605 pp. Describes relationship of vertebrates to all salt marsh plants, including those found on barrier islands. 29 *L)rsin, M. J. 1972. Life in and around the salt marshes. Thomas Y. Crowell Co. , New York, 110 pp. The book presents descriptions of plants, animals, and habitats that are commonly observed in salt marshes. It also includes many species of plants and animals that are frequently encountered in the marshes but are not regular inhabitants. 30 *Waisel , Y. 1972. Biology of halophytes. Academic Press, Mew York. 395 pp. 5 This book covers all of the halophytes and has a chapter on growth, including productivity. Mangroves are discussed in Chapter 14. 31 *Walsh, G. E. 1974. Mangroves: a review. Pages 51-174 jn_ R, J. Reimold and W. H. Queen, eds. Ecology of halophytes. Academic Press, New York, 605 pp. The references at the end of this review include over 1,200 published accounts of mangroves. The author has attempted to review the major con- clusions of these published accounts and to give a picture of the contem- porary state of knowledge with respect to geographical distribution, ecology, adaptations, silviculture, and herbicides. 32 Yonge, C. M. 1950. Life on sandy beaches. Science Progress 38(151) :430-443. General article on beach composition and forms of beach life. Coastal Overviews 33 *Ducsik, D. W. 1973.- Coastal zone utilization, Pages 12-1 to 12-141 in_S. B. Saila, ed. Coastal and offshore environmental inventory: Cape Hatteras to Nantucket Shoals, complement volume. University of Rhode Island, Marine Publication Series Mo, 3. Develops a comprehensive picture of the scope and extent of coastal zone utilization in the region from Cape Hatteras to Nantucket Shoals. Dis- cussion is in two parts: general economic, demographic, and land-use patterns for the region as a whole; and specific statistical information by category of use for five appropriate subregions. 34 ♦Havens, J. M., D. M. Shaw, and E. R. Levine. 1973. Offshore weather and climate. Pages 11-1 to 11-43 in S, B. Saila, ed. Coastal and offshore environmental inventory: Cape Hatteras to Nantucket Shoals, complement volume. University of Rhode Island, Marine Publication Series No. 3. Presents an overview of the weather and climate of the region from Cape Hatteras to Cape Cod. Spatial and temporal distributions of weather ele- ments are discussed and placed in the context of the general atmospheric setting of the Mid-Atlantic offshore region. 35 *Heppner, F. H., and L. L. Gould. 1973. Birds of the Atlantic seaboard from Cape Hatteras to Cape Cod. Pages 8-1 to 8-128 In. S. B. Saila, ed. Coastal and offshore environmental inventory: Cape Hatteras to Nantucket Shoals. University of Rhode Island, Marine Publication Series No, 2. Presents an overview of bird Dopulations, identifies birds of the area (Cape Hatteras to Cape Cod), and discusses man-bird relations. Of partic- ular relevance to barrier islands is a section entitled "geographic fea- tures influencing birds" in which numerous offshore islands are mentioned, many in the context of National Wildlife Refuges and breeding areas. 36 McAleer, J. B., and M. E. Parker. 1971. The state of the shorelines. Shore and Beach 39(1) :13-17. Four stages of the National Shoreline Study are described. Regional inventories list shoreline ownership, land use, beach extent, and exposure. 37 ♦Milliman, J. D. 1973. Marine geology. Pages 10-1 to 10-91 _in S. B. Saila, ed. Coastal and offshore environmental inventory: Cape Hatteras to Nantucket Shoals, complement volume, University of Rhode Island, Marine Publication Series 3. Although this chapter deals extensively with continental margin (shelf and slope), regional physiography and geology are discussed together with the shoreline. The latter contains a subsection on barrier islands; phys- ical features, origin and structure, and migration. 38 ♦National Ocean Survey, NOAA. 1977, United States coast pilot 1, Atlantic coast: Eastport to Cape Cod. 255 pp. The coast pilot series covers a wide variety of information important to navigators of United States coastal and intracoastal waters. Subjects include navigation regulations, outstanding landmarks, channel and anchor- age peculiarities, dangers, weather, routes, and port facilities. Pilot 1 covers the area from Eastport, Maine, to Cape Cod, Massachusetts. Invid- ual islands within this area are described in detail. 39 ♦National Ocean Survey, NOAA. 1977. United States coast pilot 2, Atlantic coast: Cape Cod to Sandy Hook. 255 pp. Pilot 2 covers the area from Cape Cod, Massachusetts, to Sandy Hook, New Jersey. Individual islands within this area are described in detail. 40 ♦National Ocean Survey, NOAA. 1977. United States coast pilot 3, Atlantic coast: Sandy Hook to Cape Henry. 233 pp. Pilot 3 covers the area from Sandy Hook, New Jersey, to Cape Henry, Virginia. Individual islands within this area are described in detail. 41 ^National Ocean Survey, NOAA. 1977. United States coastal pilot 4, Atlantic coast: Cape Henry to Key West. 225 pp. Pilot 4 covers the area from Cape Henry, Virginia, to Key West, Florida. Individual islands within this area are described in detail. 42 *National Ocean Survey, NOAA. 1977. United States coast pilot 5, Atlantic coast: Gulf of Mexico, Puerto Rico, and Virgin Islands. 337 pp. Pilot 5 covers the area from Key West, Florida, to Brownsville, Texas, plus Puerto Rico and the Virgin Islands. Individual islands within these areas are described in detail. 43 *Pilson, M. E., and E. Goldstein. 1973. Marine mammals. Pages 7-1 through 7-48 in S. B. Saila, ed. Coastal and offshore environmental inventory: Cape Hatteras to Nantucket Shoals. University of Rhode Island, Marine Publication Series No. 2. Marine mammals are not notably abundant in the region from Cape Cod to Cape Hatteras. Some 36 species — including seals, walrus, manatee, large and small whales, and porpoises--are identified as occurring regularly in this region at the present time, having occurred in earlier times, or as being sporadic or possible visitors. 44 *Planners, Inc. 1974. A socio-economic environmental baseline summary for the south Atlantic region between Cape Hatteras, North Carolina and Cape Canaveral, Florida. Vol. V. Socio-economic inventory. Prepared for the Bureau of Land Management, U.S. Department of the Interior. Virginia Institute of Marine Science, Gloucester Point. 199 pp. + 2 Appendices and 7 maps. 45 *Saila, S. B., ed. 1973. Coastal and offshore environmental inventory: Cape Hatteras to Nantucket Shoals, complement volume. University of Rhode Island, Marine Publication Series No. 3. 367 pp. Complements original volume with chapters on coastal vegetation, marine geology, offshore weather and climate, and coastal zone utilization. 46 *Saila, S. B., ed. 1973. Coastal and offshore environmental inventory: Cape Hatteras to Nantucket Shoals. University of Rhode Island, Marine Publica- tion Series No. 2. 681 pp. Consists of a series of papers on physical oceanography, chemical oceanog- raphy, phytoplankton, zooplankton, benthic fauna, fisheries, marine mam- mals, and birds for the entire area between Cape Hatteras and Nantucket Shoals. 8 47 *Shepard, F. P., and H. R. Wanless. 1971. Our changinq coastlines. McGraw- Hill, New York. 579 pp. This book provides a comprehensive and detailed perspective on the physi- cal characteristics of the coastlines of the United States. Nine of its 16 chapters are relevant to the Atlantic and Gulf coasts. 48 *U.S. Army Corps of Engineers. 1973. The national shoreline study. U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C. 5 vols. Pursuant to the River and Harbor Act of 1968 (PL90-483), Congress gave the Chief of Engineers special responsibilities for appraising, investi- gating, and studying the condition of the Nation's shorelines and for developing suitable means for protecting, restoring, and managing them. This is the major report, drawn from 11 preceding reports, which provides guidelines and broad conceptual plans rather than project authorizations. 49 *U.S. Army Corps of Engineers. 1973. The national shoreline study. Vol. 1. U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C. 180 pp. Volume I of the National Shoreline Study consists of three parts: Report of the Chief of Engineers, shore protection guidelines, and shore manage- ment guidelines. The first, addressed to Congress, summarizes the findings of the study, and recommends priorities among serious problem areas for action to stop erosion. The second describes typical erosion control measures, presents examples of shore protection facilities, and criteria for planning shore protection programs. Shore management guidelines are given in the third part to assist decision-makers in developing and imple- menting shore management programs. 50 *U.S. Army Corps of Engineers. 1973. The national shoreline study. Vol. 2. U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C. 198 pp. Volume II of the National Shoreline Study consists of regional inventory reports for the north Atlantic region (Marine-Virginia). It assesses the nature and extent of erosion; develops conceptual plans for needed shore protection; develops general order-of -magnitude estimates of cost for the selected shore protection; and identifies shore owners. The volume con- sists of two parts: discussion and photographic survey covering each of the 10 states. 51 *U.S. Army Corps of Engineers. 1973. The national shoreline study. Vol. 3. U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C. 450 pp. Volume III of the National Shoreline Study consists of three parts: (1) regional reports for the south Atlantic-Gulf region (North Carolina-Missis- sippi plus Puerto Rico and the Virgin Islands); (2) an inventory report of the Lower Mississippi region (Louisiana); and (3) a regional inventory report on Texas coast shores. Each part (state-by-state and often by coastal counties) includes description of coastal areas, presentation of shore history, listing of both authorized Federal projects and Federal survey studies, identification of additional Federal survey studies (if needed) and discussion of improvement methods. 52 *U.S. Department of the Interior, Fish and Wildlife Service. 1970. National estuary study. U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C. 7 vols. A report of the Department of the Interior submitted in response to the Estuary Protection Act (P.L. 90-454) in which Congress directed the Secre- tary of the Interior to carry out a study of the Nation's estuaries as well as similar areas in the Great Lakes. The main report and 11 appendixes are contained in seven separate volumes. 53 *U.S. Department of the Interior, Fish and Wildlife Service. 1970. National estuary study. Vol. 1. U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C. 90 pp. Volume I is the main report. Of greatest importance to barrier islands is section III: physical and biological characteristics of estuaries. Atlantic and Gulf coasts are discussed systematically in six separate estuarine zones: North Atlantic, middle Atlantic, Chesapeake Bay, south Atlantic, Biscayne and Florida Bay, and Gulf of Mexico. 54 *U.S. Department of the Interior, Fish and Wildlife Service. 1970. National estuary study. Vol. 2. U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C. 303 pp. This staff report discusses the estuarine environment. Salient biophysi- cal characteristics are described for six Atlantic and Gulf coast estuarine zones. Estuarine use and conflicts are also discussed. 55 *U.S. Department of the Interior, Fish and Wildlife Service. 1970. National estuary study. Vol. 3. U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C. 326 pp. Volume III consists of Appendix B-Planagement studies in specific estu- aries. Of relevance to Atlantic and Gulf coasts are case studies of Great South Bay, New York; Chesapeake Bay, Maryland and Virginia; Pamlico, Currituck, and Albemarle, North Carolina; Apalachicola Bay, Florida; and Aransas Bay, Texas. 56 *U.S. Department of the Interior, Fish and Wildlife Service. 1970. National estuary study. Vol. 4. U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C. 261 pp. 10 Volume IV consists of Appendixes C and D, additional support data for biophysical profiles and estuarine landscape survey and analysis. The latter contains brief descriptions and characterizations of dominant land forms in each of six Atlantic and Gulf coast estuarine regions as well as map sections depicting coastal land-forms, developed land, biotic re- sources, public lands, and industrial and power sites. 57 *U.S. Department of the Interior, Fish and Wildlife Service. 1970. National estuary study. Vol. 5. U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C. 266 pp. Volume V consists of three separate appendixes: some economic factors affecting the estuarine zone, technology impacts on estuary resource use, and conflicts and problems in specific estuaries. Of particular interests to barrier islands of the Atlantic and Gulf coasts are case studies (Ap- pendix G) of Penobscot Bay, Maine; Delaware Bay, Delaware and Mew Jersey; Charleston Harbor, South Carolina; Tampa Bay, Florida; and Galveston Bay, Texas. Origin, Geomorphology, and Processes 58 Berg, D. W. 1973. Estuary and barrier island study. U.S. National Aeronau- tics and Space Administration, ERTS Report, E73-11041/WR. 2 pp. Observation and interpretation of broad shoreline features such as shoaling areas and sediment plumes, based on ERTS-1 imagery. 59 *Bird, E.C.F. 1969. Coasts: an introduction to systematic geomorphology. Vol. 4. The HIT Press, Cambridge, Massachusetts. 246 pp. Deals with geomorphology of coasts in general. Chapter on beaches, spits, and barriers discusses origin of sediments, beach composition, lateral movements, and barrier beaches. 60 *Coates, D. R., ed. 1973. Coastal geomorphology. State University of New York, Binghamton. 396 pp. Beach processes are discussed with emphasis on processes operating on barrier islands. Dynamics of the littoral zone, erosional and accretional phases of shoreline development, and the origin of barrier islands are analyzed. 61 Curray, J. R. 1969. Shore zone sand bodies—barriers, cheniers, and beach ridges, Lecture 2. Pages JCII-1 to JCII-8 i_n_ The new concepts of conti- nental margin sedimentation, application to the geological record—A GI 11 short course lecture notes, Philadelphia, 1969. American Geological Institute, Washington, D.C. Special attention is paid to beach and nearshore processes, and to the formation and origin of barriers, cheniers, and beach ridges. 62 *Davies, J. L. 1972. Geographical variation in coastal development. Oliver and Boyd, Edinburgh. 204 pp. Deals with the general morphology of coastal areas. 63 Davis, R. A., and R. L. Ethington, ed. 1976. Beach and nearshore sedimenta- tion. Society of Economic Paleontologists and Mineralogists, Special Pub- lication 24. 187 pp. Covers beach and nearshore sedimentation (physical and biological aspects) from the generation of processes through the mechanics of the processes, interaction of processes with sediment, and culminating in distribution of sediment and structures across the environment. 64 Dickinson, K. A., H. L. Berryhill, Jr., and C. W. Holmes. 1972. Criteria for recognizing ancient barrier coastlines. Pages 192-214 j_n J . K. Rigby and VJ. K. Mamblin, eds. Recognition of ancient sedimentary environments. Society of Economic Paleontologists and Mineralogists, Special Publication 16. Discusses the various criteria for recognizing ancient barrier coast- lines. Most of these criteria were derived from the study of modern barrier coastlines, especially where interpretations are based on limited data. 65 Dolan, R., B. Hayden, and M. Vincent. 1975. Classification of coastal land- forms of the Americas. Zeitschrift fur Geomorphologie, Supplementband 22:72-88. Presents a new descriptive classification of coastal landforms based on coastal lithology, topography, and shoreline type with application to the coastal areas of the Americas on a scale of 1:20,000,000. 66 El-Ashry, M. T. 1971. Causes of recent erosion along United States shore- lines. Geological Society of America Bulletin 82(7) :2033-2038. This article discusses progradation of U.S. shorelines after the last glacial stage of the Pleistocene epoch and lists the major causes of in- creased erosion of beaches. 12 67 *Field, M. E., and D. B. Duane. 1976. Post-Pleistocene history of the United States inner continental shelf: significance to origin of barrier islands. Geological Society of America Bulletin 87(5) :691-702. This article explains differences in shoreline and shelf configuration along segments of the U.S. Atlantic coast. Regional trends in shelf struc- ture, sediment sources, and history are discussed. 68 *Fisher, J. J. 1968. Barrier island formation: discussion. Geological Society of America Bulletin 79:1421-1425. The author presents his hypotheses on the evolution of various types of barrier islands. Barrier islands chains from the eastern United States to the western Gulf of Mexico are discussed. 69 Giles, R. T. 1966. River, beach and dune sands of the southeastern Atlantic coast of the United States. Pages 71-76 vn_ J . H. Hoyt, ed . Pleistocene and Holocene sediments, Sapelo Island, Georgia, and vicinity. Geological Society of America, Southwestern Section, Guidebook for field trip No. 1, April 11-13, 1966. Discusses analyses of 53 beaches, 50 dune and 40 river samples collected from Cape Hatteras to Miami Beach. 70 *Giles, R. T., and 0. H. Pilkey. 1965. Atlantic beach and dune sediments of the southern United States. Journal of Sedimentary Petrology 35:900-910. Describes the nature and sources of beach and dune sediments, as well as regional sorting effects, from Cape Hatteras, North Carolina, to Miami Beach, Florida. 71 *Godfrey, P. J. 1976. Barrier beaches of the East Coast. Oceanus 19(5) :27- 40. An overview of the basic physiographic and ecological features of the barrier beaches and islands along the Atlantic Coast and Gulf of Mexico, including structure and function, dunes, salt marshes, and the threat of man's activities. 72 *Hoyt, J. H. 1967. Barrier island formation. Geological Society of America Bulletin 78(9) :1125-1135. This article states that empirical data fail to substantiate classical theories of barrier island formation from offshore bars. A hypothesis proposes that a barrier island -' initiated by the building of a ridge immediately landv/ard of the shoreline from wind- or water- deposited sedi- ments . 73 Hoyt, J. H., and V. J. Henry, Jr. 1967. Influence of island migration on barrier island sedimentation. Geological Society of America Bulletin 78 (l):77-86. This article discussess the migration of barrier islands along some coastal areas in the direction of dominant sediment transport. 74 *Hoyt, J. H. 1968. Barrier island formation: reply. Geological Society of America Bulletin 79:947. This a response to C. II. Cooke's article on barrier island formation which is found in the same issue. 75 Hoyt, J. H. 1971. Field guide to beaches. American Geological Institute, Earth Science Curriculum Project Pamphlet Series PS-7. 46 pp. Describes beach processes such as tsunamis, tides, swash, longshore current, and undertow. Most beaches on the Atlantic and Gulf coasts are on barrier islands, which were dunes at a lower sea level. 76 Hoyt, J. H. 1972. Shoreline processes. Journal of Geoloaical Education 20(1) :16-22. Reviews shoreline development in relation to sea level, deltaic deposi- tion, inlet migration, storms, and surf base. 77 Hoyt, J. H. 1973. Erosional and depositional estuarine "terraces," south- eastern United States. Pages 465-474 i_n_ B. W. Nelson, ed. Environmental framework of coastal plain estuaries. Geological Society of America Memoir No. 132. Discusses sediment accumulation in the lagoon after the formation of barrier islands, which produces two major surfaces concurrently at the base and top of estuarine deposits. 78 Klein, G. D. 1974. Estimating water depths from analysis of barrier island and deltaic sedimentary sequences. Geology 2(8) :409-412. Describes proposed model for estimating water depths from thickness of prograding coarsening-upward barrier island and deltaic sequences. 79 *Kraft, J. C. 1971. Sedimentary facies patterns and geologic history of a Holocene marine transgression. Geological Society of America Bulletin 82:2131-2158. H This study presents a model to be used in developing intensive analysis of the late Holocene era, v/hich is evidenced by shoreline sequences along the Atlantic coast. Barrier-lagoonal coasts along the Atlantic coast are discussed in detail . 80 Kumar, N. 1973. Modern and ancient barrier sediments: new interpretation based on stratal sequence in inlet-filling sands and on recognition of nearshore storm deposits.' Annals of the Mew York Academy of Sciences 220(5) :247-340. This report presents a new interpretation of the migration of modern and ancient barrier sediments. I Kwon, H. J. 1969. Source of barrier island sediments: northern Gulf coast. Ph.D. Thesis. Louisiana State University, Baton Rouge. 89 pp. (Disserta- tion Abstracts 30:5103-8.) This paper studies transport patterns of barrier-forming sand in the northern Gulf coast. 82 Leontev, 0. K., and L. G. Nikiforov, 1965. Reasons for the worldwide occur- rence of barrier beaches. Oceanology 5(4) :61-67 . Explains why barrier beaches, which are typical of the recent geological epoch, are a worldwide occurrence. 83 *0tvos, E. G., Jr. 1970. Development and migration of barrier islands, northern Gulf of Mexico. Geological Society of America Bulletin 81(1): 241-246. This article explains the formation of barrier islands by upward aggrada- tion. All aspects of migration are also covered. 84 *Resio, D., L. Vincent, J. Fisher, B. Hayden, and R. Dolan. 1973. Classifica- tion of coastal environments: analysis across the coast barrier island interfaces. University of Virginia, Department of Environmental Sciences, Technical Report. 39 pp. The report presents results of a preliminary analysis of a classification technique designed to stratify coastal areas, based on similarities across the width of the coastal zone. 85 *Riggs, S. R, 1975. Evolutionary succession of drov/ned coastal plain estuaries. Geological Society of America, Abstracts with Programs 7:1247- 1248. 15 This article describes the succession of estuarine types. Processes which produce this succession are discussed, including barrier island migration by overwash. 86 Schwartz, M. L. 1971. The multiple causality of barrier islands. Journal of Geology 79(1) :91-94. Urges that multiple causality of barrier islands be more widely accepted and presents a suggested classification on this basis. 87 *Swift, D. J. P. 1975. Barrier island genesis: evidence from the central Atlantic shelf, eastern U.S. Sedimentary Geology 14(1 ) : 1-43. Discusses barrier island formation in relation to the Middle Atlantic Bight. Concludes that since most major barrier systems form on flat coastal plains, it would appear that mainland-beach detachment is the more important mode of barrier formation. 88 *Swift, D. J. P., D. B. Duane, and 0. H. Pilkey, eds. 1972. Shelf sediment transport: process and pattern. Dowden, Hutchinson, and Ross, Strouds- burg, Pennsylvania. 656 pp. This volume contains papers presented in a symposium on shelf sediment transport conducted at the annual meeting of the Geological' Society of America in Washington, D.C., November 1971. The volume, organized in three sections, is concerned with shelf hydraulic regime and mechanics of sediment transport, suspended sediment dispersal, and bottom sediment dispersal . 89 Vincent, L., R. Dolan, B. Hayden , and D. Resio, 1976. Systematic variations in barrier island topography. Journal of Geology 84(5) :583-594. Eigenvectors of a matrix of 530 profiles were calculated to quantify systematic topographic variations in Atlantic and Gulf coast barrier islands. 90 Warnke, D. A. 1966. Drastic beach changes in a low-energy-environment caused by Hurricane Betsy. Journal of Geophysical Research 71(6) :2013- 2016. Beach profiles of Atlantic coast beaches before and after Hurricane Betsy. 16 MAINE 91 Hayes, M. 0. 1972. Coastal processes and sedii station on the New England coast. University of Massachusetts, Amherst Coastal Research Center. 149 pp. An abstracted account of data collected on the New England coast from central Maine to southern Cape Cod. Includes data on beach profiles, sedimentation studies, sediment dispersal patterns, and wave refraction studies. 92 *Johnson, D. 1925. The New England-Acadian shoreline. John Wiley and Sons, New York. 608 pp. This book deals with the initial form and sequential form of the New England-Acadian shoreline. It discusses several different types of shore- lines and contains chapters relevant to barrier islands. 93 Meade, R. H. 1971. The coastal environment of New England. Woods Hole Oceanographic Institution, Contribution 2496. 47 pp. This paper emphasizes three aspects of the New England coastal environ- ment: (1) shape of the coastline, (2) interaction of fresh and salt coastal waters, and (3) coastal sediments. There is a brief section on mineral resources and a comprehensive list of references. 94 *Shepard, F. P., and H. R. Wanless. 1971. Glaciated coasts: Mew England and Long Island. Pages 28-69 vn_ F. P. Shepard and H. R. Wanless, Our changing coastlines. McGraw-Hill, New York. Provides a detailed physical description of the following islands and beach areas in Maine: Great Wass Island, Harrington Bay area, Mt. Desert Island, Kennebunk-Cape Porpoise area. 95 University of North Carolina, Institute of Marine Sciences. 1974. Rocky sea fronts and inter-tidal rocks. Pages 152-179 in_H. T. Odum, B. J. Copeland, and E. A. McMahon, eds. Coastal ecological systems of the United States. Vol. 1. The Conservation Foundation, Washington, D.C. Describes ecological system characterized by rock sea fronts such as those found along the north Atlantic U.S. coast. Examples presented include jetty rocks of the Gulf coast and the intertidal algae and mussel beds of Maine. 17 Sheepscot 96 *Rich, L. D. 1956. The coast of Maine. Thomas Y. Crowell, New York. 308 pp. This book contains an informal history of the Maine coastline, with specific data on the following barrier islands: Sheepscot, Pop ham Beach, Biddeford Pool, Wells Peach, and Ogunquit. Popham Beach 97 Knowles, K. , and T. Wheelwright. 1967. Along the Maine coast, Barre Publishers, Barre, Massachusetts. This book contains photographs of the Maine coastal area, with brief accompanying narrative. Included are photographs and text on Biddeford Pool, Popham Beach, and the beach at Ogunquit. 98 *Rich, L. D. 1956. The coast of Maine. Thomas Y. Crowell, New York. 308 pp, This book contains an informal history of the Maine coastline, with specific data on the following barrier islands: Sheepscot, Popham Beach, Biddeford Pool, Wells Beach, and Ogunquit. Small Point Pine Point Goose Creek Biddeford Pool 99 Knowles, K., and T. Wheelwright. 1967. Along the Maine coast. Barre Publishers, Barre, Massachusetts. This book contains photographs of the Maine coastal area, with brief accompanying narrative. Included are photographs and text on Biddeford Pool, Popham Beach, and the beach at Ogunquit. 100 *Rich, L. D. 1956. The coast of Maine. Thomas Y. Crowell, New York. 309 pp. This book contains an informal history of the Maine coastline, with specific data on the following barrier islands: Sheepscot, Popham Beach, Biddeford Pool, Wells Beach, and Ogunquit. 18 Goose Rock Hells Reach 101 *Rich, L. D. 1956. The coast of Maine. Thomas Y. Crowell , New York. 308 pp. This book contains an informal history of the Maine coastline, with specific data on the following barrier islands: Sheepscot, Popham Beach, Biddeford Pool, Wells Beach, and Ogunquit. Ogunquit 102 Knowles, K. , and T. Wheelwright. 1967. Along the Maine coast. Barre Publishers, Barre, Massachusetts. This book contains photographs of the Maine coastal area, with brief accompanying narrative. Included are photographs and text on Biddeford Pool, Popham Beach, and the beach at Ogunquit. 103 *Rich, L. D. 1956. The coast of. Maine. Thomas Y. Crowell, New York. 308 pp, This book contains an informal history of the Maine coastline, with specific data on the following barrier islands: Sheepscot, Popham Beach, Biddeford Pool, Wells Beach, and Ogunquit. 19 NEW HAMPSHIRE Hampton Seabrook 20 MASSACHUSETTS 104 *Boyce, S. G. 1954. The salt spray community. Ecological Monographs 24:29- 68. This paper analyzes some of the specific effects of salt spray as an ecological factor in the coastal dune environment. Areas of study include the Cape Cod area and Cape Fear, North Carolina, 105 Chamberlain, B. B. 1964. These fragile outposts: a geological look at Cape Cod, Martha's Vineyard, and Nantucket. Natural History Press, Garden City, New York. 327 pp. 106 Carlozzi, C, K. King, and W. F. Newbold, Jr. 1975. Ecosystems and resources of the Massachusetts coast. Massachusetts Office of Coastal Zone Manage- ment, Boston. 78 pp. This publication discusses all the natural and many manmade systems making up the Massachusetts coastline. Includes data on islands (land- forms) in the area. 107 Halvorson, W. L., and C. G. Dawson. 1973. Coastal vegetation, Pages 9-1 to 9-92 in_S. B. Saila, ed. Coastal and offshore environmental inventory: Cape Hatteras to Nantucket Shoals, complement volume. University of Rhode Island, Marine Publication Series No. 3. Describes general geograDhic features of the area (Cape Hatteras to Nantucket Shoals) including barrier beaches; presents three general forest regions; discusses marine benthic algae, and describes coastal zone land- plant geography by state: North Carolina, Virginia-Delaware, New Jersey, New York-Connecticut, and Rhode Island-Massachusetts. 108 Hartshorn, J. H., R. N. Odale, and C. Koteff. 1967. Preliminary report on the geology of the Cape Cod National Seashore, Pages 49-58 jn_ Economic geology in Massachusetts—Conference Proceedings, Amherst 1966. University of Massachusetts, Graduate School, Amherst. This report considers the litholoqy of the basement rocks beneath Cape Cod. 109 *Hay, J. 1968. The s?ndy shore. The Chatham Press, Chatham, Massachusetts. 64 pp. Illustrated description of flora and fauna of Cape Cod area. 21 110 Hayes, M. 0. 1972. Coastal processes and sedimentation on the New England coast. University of Massachusetts, Coastal Research Center. 149 pp. An abstracted account of work completed on data collected on the Mew England coast from central Maine to southern Cape Cod. Includes data on beach profiles, sedimentation studies, sediment dispersal patterns, and wave refraction studies. Ill Kornicker, L. S., and M. Bowen. 1976. Sarsiella ozotothrix, a new species of marine Ostracoda (Myodocopina) from the Atlantic and Gulf coasts of North America. Proceedincis of the Biological Society of Washington 88(46): 497-502. A description and drawings are included characterizing S_. ozotothrix from Massachusetts. Additional data are provided on this species in Long Island Sound, near Connecticut, and at Alligator Harbor, Florida, on the Gulf coast. 112 New England River Basins Commission. 1975. Report of the southeastern New England study: a strategy for balanced development and protection of water and related land resources in eastern Massachusetts and Rhode Island, Cape Cod and Islands Planning Report No. 4. 49 pp. This report covers 590 square miles (including Martha's Vineyard, Nan- tucket, and the Elizabeth Islands) and presents data on land use, water supply, water quality, outdoor recreation, marine management, flooding and erosion, and key facilities. 113 Mew England River Basins Commission. 1975. Report of the southeastern New England study: a strategy for balanced development and protection of water and related land resources in eastern Massachusetts and Rhode Island, Regional Report, No. NERBC-40. 325 pp. This report covers a 4,400-square-mile area, including the coastline of Massachusetts (Martha's Vineyard, Nantucket, the Elizabeth Islands) and Rhode Island (Narragansett Bay Islands and Block Island). 114 *Shepard, F. P., and H. R. Wanless. 1971. Glaciated coasts: New England and Long Island. Pages 28-69 jn_ F. P. Shepard and H. R. Wanless, Our changing coastlines. McGraw-Hill, New York. Provides a detailed physical description of the following islands and beach areas: Maine: Great Wass Island, Harrington Bay Area, Mt. Desert Island, Ken- nebunk-Cape Porpoise area. 22 Massachusetts: Cape Anne, Marblehead and Marblehead Neck, Boston Harbor, Plymouth Harbor, Provincetown and eastern shore of outer Cape Cod, western shore of outer Cape Cod, southeast coast of Cape Cod, south side of Cape Cod, Nantucket Island, Tisburg Great Pond area on Martha's Vineyard. Gay Head Cliffs and vicinity, Martha's Vineyard. Rhode Island: Southeastern coast (east from Marraaansett Bay), Watch Hill Point. Connecticut: Eastern shoreline. New York: Moriches Inlet, Fire Island Inlet, Jones Inlet, and Oak Neck area, all on Long Island. 115 Sterling, D. 1967. The outer lands: a natural history guide to Cape Cod, Martha's Vineyard, Nantucket, Block Island, and Long Island. The Natural History Press, Garden City, New York. 192 pp. This volume, which includes a subject index, is a natural history guide to the area, and can also serve as an ecology and field reference, since it includes a discussion of landscape, distinctive animal and plant life, and geological formation. 116 *Teller, W. 1970. Cape Cod and the offshore islands. Prentice-Hall, Engle- v/ood Cliffs, New Jersey. 256 pp. A personal response to Cape Cod and the offshore islands (the Elizabeth Islands, Martha's Vineyard, and Nantucket), but contains good descriptive and historical materials. 117 *Wood, D. 1973. Cape Cod: a guide. Little, Brown and Company, Boston, Massachusetts. 368 pp. Presents a county-by-county guide to the historic and geographic attractions of the Cape, including all of the beach areas. Sal isbury 118 *Duane, D. B. 1969. Sand inventory program: a study of New Jersey and northern New England coastal waters. Shore and Beach 37(2): 12-16. This article describes a program by the Corps of Engineers to find and delineate offshore deposits of sand suitable for beach restoration and stabilization. Included are data on the following areas: Sandy Hook and Barnegat (New Jersey); and Plum Island, Nantasket Beach, Revere Beach, Salisbury Beach, and Castle Neck (Massachusetts). 23 119 *Jerome, W. C, Jr., A. P. Chesmore, C. 0. Anderson, Jr., and F. Grice. 1965. A study of the marine resources of the Merrimack River estuary. The Com- monwealth of Massachusetts, Division of Marine Fisheries, Monograph Series Mo. 1. 90 pp. This report presents a comprehensive overview of data on marine resources of the Merrimack River estuary, with specific information on Plum Island and Salisbury, Massachusetts. Besides the data on physical and chemical characteristics, flora, and the fisheries industries, there is a discussion of the economic values of marine resources in the area. Management recom- mendations are presented for these resources. Plum Island 120 Abele, R. W., Jr. 1972. Detailed analysis of short-term variations in beach morphology (and concurrent dynamic processes) for summer and winter peri- ods, 1971-1972, Plum Island, Massachusetts. University of Massachusetts, Coastal Research Center, Final Report. 177 pp. Analyzes the relationship between wave and meteorological variables and beach morphology during summer and winter 1971 and 1972, on Plum Island, Massachusetts. 121 DaBoll, J. M. 1969. Holocene sediments of the Parker River Estuary, Mas- sachusetts. University of Massachusetts, Coastal Research Group, Report No. 3-CRG. 149 pp. This study presents a detailed description of the sediments of the Parker River estuary and the dynamics of intertidal environments. Data are presented on Plum Island, as well. 122 *Duane, D. B. 1969. Sand inventory program: a study of New Jersey and northern New England coastal waters. Shore and Beach 37 (2) : 12-16 . The Corps of Engineers has a program to find and delineate offshore deposits of sand suitable for beach restoration and stabilization. In- cluded are data on the following areas: Sandy Hook and Barnegat (New Jersey); Plum Island, Nantasket Beach, Revere Beach, Salisbury Beach, and Castle Neck (Massachusetts). 123 Hayes, M. 0., E. H. Owens, D. K. Hubbard, and R. W. Abele. 1973. Investiga- tion of form and processes in the coastal zone. Pages 11-41 in_ D. R. Coates, ed. Coastal geomorphology. State University of New York, Binghamton. 24 Three scales of coastal study are described: (1) a reconnaissance type, which includes sediment sampling, field sketching and field survey; (2) an intermediate scale of study, applied to Merrimack Inlet, Massachusetts; and (3) a detailed study, carried out on Plum Island, Massachusetts. 124 *Jerome, W. C, Jr., A. P. Chesmore, C. 0. Anderson, Jr., and F. Grice. 1965. A study of the marine resources of the Merrimack River estuary. The Com- monwealth of Massachusetts, Division of Marine Fisheries, Monograph Series No. 1. 90 pp. This report presents a comprehensive overview of data on marine resources of the Merrimack River estuary, with specific information on Plum Island and Salisbury, Massachusetts. Besides the data on physical and chemical characteristics, flora, and the fisheries industries, there is a discus- sion of the economic values of marine resources in the area. Management recommendations are presented for these resources. 125 *Jones, J. R. 1977. An alternative hypothesis for barrier island migration. Ph.D. Thesis. Boston University. (Dissertation Abstracts 37:6038-B.) 205 pp. This study examines geomorphic and sedimentological parameters of barrier island migration, based on an analysis and comparison of quartz sand samples from the Plum Island-Castle Meek, Massachusetts, barrier island system. 126 Mclntire, W. G., and J. P. Morgan. 1963. Recent geomorphic history of Plum Island, Massachusetts and adjacent coasts. Louisiana State University, Coastal Studies Series Report No. 8. 44 pp. Discusses formation, structure, physical features, changes in shoreline position, and C-14 dating relative to changing sea level positions of Plum Island, Massachusetts. 127 *Wentworth, C. E. 1969. Beach erosion control in New England. Shore and Beach 37(2):24-30. Coastal erosion problems in New England are discussed specifically as they relate to Martha's Vineyard and Plum Island, Massachusetts. Castle Neck 128 *Chesmore, A. P., D. J. Brown, and R. D. Anderson. 1973. A study of the marine resources of Essex Bay. The Commonwealth of Massachusetts, Division of Marine Fisheries, Monograph Series No. 13. 38 pp. 25 Based on analyses at nine stations in Essex Bay, a coastal enclosure formed by the large sand spit of Castle Neck, the following data are pre- sented: the history of fisheries in the area; morphometry, water quality, type and degree of pollution affecting the marine environment; relative abundance and economic value of fisheries; the economic value of shellfish populations; and information on the current status of salt marsh acreage. 129 *Duane, D. B. 1969. Sand inventory program: a study of New Jersey and northern New England coastal waters. Shore and Beach 37(2) :12-16 . This article describes a program by the Corps of Engineers to find and delineate offshore deposits of and suitable for beach restoration and stabilization. Included are data on the following areas: Sandy Hook and Barnegat (New Jersey); Plum Island, Nantasket Beach, Revere Beach, Salisbury Beach, and Castle Neck (Massachusetts). 130 Jones, J. R. 1977. An alternative hypothesis for barrier island migration. Ph.D. Thesis, Boston University. 205 pp. (Diss. Abstr. 37:6038-B.) This study examines geomorphic and sedimentological parameters which are interpreted to support an alternative hypothesis for barrier island migration: that high energy storm transport of sediment and spit develop- ment is the mechanism for barrier island migration rather than a rise in sea level. Some sampling was done at the Plum Island-Castle Neck, Mas- sachusetts barrier system. 131 *Rhodes, E. G. 1973. Pleistocene-Holocene sediments interpreted by seismic refraction and wash-bore sampling, Plum Island-Castle Neck, Massachusetts. U.S. Coastal Engineering Research Center, Technical Memorandum 40. 81 pp. Seismic refraction successfully located Pleistocene and bedrock topog- raphy in the Plum Island-Castle Neck area. The wash-bore method of soil sampling was also employed. Nahant 132 *Chesmore, A. P., D. J. Brown, and R. D. Anderson. 1972. A study of the marine resources of Lynn-Saugus Harbor. The Commonwealth of Massachusetts, Division of Marine Fisheries, Monograph Series No. 11. 40 pp. Data are presented on the following elements for the area, which includes Nahant and Revere: survey methodology, historical overview of fisheries, physical and chemical characteristics, marine vegetation, coastal marsh regulations, and the economic value of marine resources. 26 Revere Beach 133 *Chesmore, A. P., D. J. Brown, and R. D. Anderson. 1972. A study of the marine resources of Lynn-Saugus Harbor. The Commonwealth of Massachusetts, Division of Marine Fisheries, Monograph Series No. 11. 40 pp. Data are presented on the following elements for the area, which in- cludes Nahant and Revere: survey methodology, historical overview of fisheries, physical and chemical characteristics, marine vegetation, coastal marsh regulations, and the economic value of marine resources. 134 *Duane, D. B. 1969. Sand inventory program: a study of New Jersey and northern New England coastal waters. Shore and Beach 37(2) : 12-16 . The Corps of Engineers has a program to find and delineate offshore deposits of sand suitable for beach restoration and stabilization. In- cluded are data on the following areas: Sandy Hook and Barnegat (New Jersey); Plum Island, Nantasket Beach, Revere Beach, Salisbury Beach, and Castle Neck (Massachusetts). Nantasket Beach 135 *Devanney, J. W., E. Derbis, W. Seifert, and W. Wood. 1970. Economic factors in the development of a coastal zone. Massachusetts Institute of Technol- ogy, Sea Grant Report No. MITSG 71-1. Appendix A is a study of recent decisions made by the coastal town of Hull, Massachusetts, with respect to the development of Nantasket Beach as a recreational resource. 136 *Duane, D. B. 1969. Sand inventory program: a study of New Jersey and northern Mew England coastal waters. Shore and Beach 37(2) : 12-16 . This article describes a program by the Corps of Engineers to find and delineate offshore deposits of sand suitable for beach restoration and stabilization. Included are data on the following areas: Sandy Hook and Barnegat (New Jersey); Plum Island, Nantasket Beach, Revere Beach, Salisbury Beach, and Castle Neck (Massachusetts). 137 Johnson, D. W., and W. G. Reed, Jr. 1971. The form of Nantasket beach. Pages 162-187 in J. A. Steers, ed. Introduction to coastline development. The MIT Press, Cambridge, Massachusetts. Presents results of a study of the form of Nantasket Beach. Includes discussion of stages of development through which the beach has passed to reach its present form. 27 Humarock Duxbury 138 *Iwanowicz, H. R., R. D. Anderson, and B. A. Ketschke. 1974. A study of the marine resources of Plymouth, Kingston, and Duxbury Bay. The Commonwealth of Massachusetts, Division of Marine Fisheries, Monograph Series No. 17. 37 pp. This study, one of 17 similar studies conducted along the Massachusetts coast, presents a historical overview of the finfish, lobster, commercial, and shellfish industries; a description of physical and chemical character- istics; and a discussion of marine vegetation (Irish moss). It also in- cludes data on the economic value of marine resources in the area and recommendations to aid in the future management and use of the resources of Plymouth, Kingston, and Duxbury Bay. Long Beach Sandy Meek 139 *Blum, J. L. 1968. Salt marsh Spartinas and associated algae. Ecological Monographs 38:199-221. An investigation was conducted in Barnstable marsh on Sandy Neck, Cape Cod, between 1959 and 1965. Algae of the high salt marsh, particularly their microdistribution, ecology, and relationships with the graminoid vegetation were studied. 140 *Hill, M. P. 1965. The birds of Cape Cod, Massachusetts. William Morrow, New York. 364 pp. Covers brief area description and bird life of Sandy Neck, Nobcusset Point, Great Island, Provincelands , Eastham, Nauset, and Monomoy Island, among others. 141 *Gordon, D. C, Jr. 1966. The effects of the deposit feeding polychaete Pectinaria gouldii on the intertidal sediments of Barnstable Harbor. Limnology and Oceanography 11:327-332. This study, carried out in the summers of 1962 and 1963, deals with the sediment-working activity of the polychaete Pectinaria gouldii in Barnstable Harbor on the north shore of Cape Cod, Massachusetts. 28 142 *Redfield, A. C. 1965. Ontogeny of a salt marsh estuary. Scinece 147:50-55. Discusses the marsh at Barnstable, behind Sandy Neck, Massachusetts. 143 *Redfield, A. C. 1970. Development of a New England salt marsh. Ecological Monographs 42:201-327. Discusses the marsh at Barnstable, behind Sandy Neck, Massachusetts. Nobscusset-Point 144 *Hill, N. P. 1965. The birds of Cape Cod, Massachusetts. William Morrow, New York. 364 pp. Covers brief area description and bird life of Sandy Neck, Nobcusset Point, Great Island, Provincelands, Eastham, Nauset, and Monomoy Island, among others. Great Island 145 *Hill, N. P. 1965. The birds of Cape Cod, Massachusetts. William Morrow, New York. 364 pp. Covers brief area description and bird life of Sandy Neck, Nobcusset Point, Great Island, Provincelands, Eastham, Nauset, and Monomoy Island, among others. Provincelands 146 *Hill, N. P. 1965. The birds of Cape Cod, Massachusetts. William Morrow, New York. 364 pp. Covers brief area description and bird life of Sandy Neck, Nobusset Point, Great Island, Provincelands, Eastham, Nauset, and Monomoy Island, among others. Eastham 147 *Hill, N. P. 1965. The birds of Cape Cod, Massachusetts. William Morrow, New York. 364 pp. 29 Covers brief area description and bird life of Sandy Neck, Nobcusset Point, Great Island, Provincelands, Eastham, Nauset, and Monomoy Island, among others. Nauset 148 *Fiske, J. D., C. E. Watson, and P. G. Coates. 1967. A study of the marine resources of Pleasant Bay. The Commonwealth of Massachusetts, Division of Marine Fisheries, Monograph Series No. 5. Data are presented for the Pleasant Bay area (including Nauset Beach), on the following elements: physical and chemical characteristics, tide- marshes, shellfisheries, and the economic value of Pleasant Bay marine resources. 149 *Hill, N. P. 1965. The birds of Cape Cod, Massachusetts. William Morrow, New York. 364 pp. Covers brief area description and bird life of Sandy Neck, Nobcusset Point, Great Island, Provincelands, Eastham, Nauset, and Monomoy Island, among others. Monomoy 150 Goldsmith, V. 1972. Coastal processes of a barrier island complex and adjacent ocean floor: Monomoy Island—Nauset Spit, Cape Cod, Massachusetts Ph.D. Thesis. University of Massachusetts, Amherst. 486 pp. (Disserta- tion Abstracts 33:2652-B.) Examines physical changes which occurred on Monomoy Island and Nauset Spit from 1968 to 1971. 151 Goldsmith, V., and J. M. Colonel!. 1971. Effects of nonuniform wave energy in the littoral zone. Pages 767-785 in_ Coastal engineering. Vol. 2. Pro- ceedings of 12th Coastal Engineering Conference ASCE, New York. Discusses results of monitoring of beach profile stations on the north- east end of Monomoy Island (Cape Cod) over a 27-month period. Major varia- tions in amount of erosion and accretion were revealed. 152 *Hill, M. P. 1965. The birds of Cape Cod, Massachusetts. William Morrow, New York. 364 pp. Covers brief area description and bird life of Sandy Neck, Nobcusset Point, Great Island, Provincelands, Eastham, Nauset, and Monomoy Island, amonq others. 30 153 Moul , E. 18-28 T. 1969. Flora of Monomoy Island, Massachusetts. Rhodora 71(785) The present flora of Monomoy Island is listed, including lichens and bryophytes as well as vascular plants. A short description is given of the major plant communities of the island. 154, 155 Odale, R. N., J. D. Friedman, and R. S. Williams, Jr. 1971. Changes in coastal morphology of Monomoy Island, Cape Cod, Massachusetts. Pages B101-B107 ijx U.S. Geological Survey Professional Paper 750-B. Examines short- and long-term changes in the coastline of Monomoy Island, an active spit projecting southward from the elbow of Cape Cod. Nantucket Island (Coatue and Madaket) 156 Dennis, J. V. 1969. The yellow-shafted flicker (Colaptes auratus) on Man- tucket Island, Massachusetts. Bird-Banding 40(4) :290-308. The article discusses historical nesting patterns of the yellow-shafted flicker on Nantucket Island, Massachusetts. 157 *Folger, E. V., and L. Griscom. 1948. Birds of Nantucket. Press, Cambridge, Massachusetts. 156 pp. Howard University The area covered by this book includes Nantucket, the adjacent islands of Tuckernuck and Muskeget, Coatue Beach, and Great Point, and numerous adjacent shoals extending thirty miles southeast of Nantucket. 158 Gustavson, T. C. 1976. Paleotemperature analysis of the marine Pleistocene of Long Island, New York, and Nantucket Island, Massachusetts. Geological Society of America Bulletin 87(1) :l-8. This article discusses analyses of Pleistocene sediments from eastern Long Island, New York; Nantucket Island, Massachusetts; and Gardiners Island, New York. 159 New England River Basins Commission. 1975. Report of the southeastern New England study: a strategy for balanced development and protection of water and related land resources in eastern Massachusetts and Rhode Island, Cape Cod and Islands Planning Area Report. 49 pp. This report covers 590 square miles (including Martha's Vineyard, Nan- tucket, and the Elizabeth Islands) and presents data on land use, water 31 supply, water quality, outdoor recreation, marine management, flooding and erosion, and key facilities. 160 New England River Basins Commission. 1975. Report of the southeastern Mew England study: a strategy for balanced development and protection of water and related land resources in eastern Massachusetts and Rhode Island. Regional Report No. NERBC-40. 325 pp. This report covers a 4,400-square-mile area, including the coastline of Massachusetts (Martha's Vineyard, Nantucket, the Elizabeth Islands) and Rhode Island (Narragansett Bay Islands and Block Island). 161 Sterling, D. 1967. The outer lands: a natural history guide to Cape Cod, Martha's Vineyard, Nantucket, Block Island, and Long Island. The Natural History Press, Garden City, New York. 192 pp. This volume, which includes a subject index, is a natural history guide to the area, and can also serve as an ecology and field reference, since it includes a discussion of landscape, distinctive animal and plant life, and geological formation. 162 *University of North Carolina Institute of Marine Sciences. 1974. Shallow salt ponds. Pages 300-314 in_ H. T. Odum, B. J. Copeland, and E. A. McMahan, eds. Coastal ecological systems of the United States. Vol. 2. The Conservation Foundation, Washington, D.C. Typical examples are ponds on Martha's Vineyard and on Nantucket in back of Coatue Beach, all in Massachusetts. Tuckernuck Island 163 ♦Andrews, J. C, and P. R. Mott. 1967. Gray seals at Nantucket, Massachusetts, Journal of Mammalogy 48:657-658. This article reports on the occurrence of gray seals confirmed as late as 1958, in the Nantucket, Massachusetts area, including Muskeget and Tuckernuck islands. 164 *Folger, E. V., and L. Griscom. 1948. Birds of Nantucket. Howard University Press, Cambridge, Massachusetts. 156 pp. The area covered by this book includes Nantucket, the adjacent islands of Tuckernuck and Muskeget, Coatue Beach and Great Point, and numerous adjacent shoals extending 30 miles southeast of Nantucket. 32 165 Stark, L. 1959. The story of Tuckernuck. Privately printed. 24 pp. Muskeget Island 166 ♦Andrews, J. C, and P. R. Mott. 1967 Journal of Mammalogy 48:657-658. Gray seals at Nantucket, Massachusetts. This article reports on the occurrence of gray seals confirmed as late as 1958 in the Nantucket, Massachusetts area, including Muskeget and Tuckernuck islands. 167 Fivush, B., R. Parker, and R. H, Microtus brewer i , an endemic 272-273. Tamarin. 1975, island species. Karyotype of the beach vole, Journal of Mammalogy 56(1): This article discusses the karyotype of j^L breweri , which is found only on Muskeget Island, 1 mile off Massachusetts, and indicates that recent separation of Muskeget Island from the mainland (about 3,000 years) has been too short for true species differentiation to have occurred. 168 *Folger, E. V., and L. Griscom. 1948. Birds of Nantucket. Press, Cambridge, Massachusetts. 156 pp. Howard University The area covered by this book includes Nantucket, the adjacent islands of Tuckernuck and Muskeget. Coatue Beach and Great Point, and numerous adjacent shoals extending 30 miles southeast of Nantucket. 169, 170 *Wetherbee, D. K. , R. P. Coppinger, and R. E. Walsh. 1972. Time lapse ecology, Muskeget Island, Nantucket, Massachusetts. MSS Educational Publishing Company, New York. 172 pp. This book is a comprehensive report on all aspects of Muskeget Island, Massachusetts, including geography, geology, history, flora, and fauna. Martha's Vineyard (Cape Ponge, Katama Bay, Edgartown Great Ponds, and Tisbury Great Ponds) 171 Miller, C. N., Jr., and C. R. Robinson. 1975. Two new species of structur- ally preserved pinaceous cones the Late Cretaceous of Martha's Vineyard Island, Massachusetts. Journal of Paleontology 49(1 ) : 138-150 . This article concerns tow new species of pinaceous cones- -Pi tyostrobus kayei and Pseudoaraucaria arnoldi --exposed at Gay Head, Martha's Vineyard Island, Massachusetts. 33 172 *Ogden, J. G. 1961. Forest history of Martha's Vineyard, Massachusetts, I: Modern and pre-colonial forests. The American Midland Naturalist 66(2): 417-430. This study of forest history on the island of Martha's Vineyard, Mas- sachusetts, includes a survey of present vegetation and modern woodlands, a discussion of precolonial forests and succession, and a pollen-analytic investigation of postglacial lakes and bogs. 173 *Ritchie, W. A. 1969. The archaeology of Martha's Vineyard--a framework for the prehistory of southern New England; a study in coastal ecology and adaptation. The Natural History Press, Garden City, New York. 253 pp. This book contains an excellent overview of the archeological and historical background of Martha's Vineyard, with specific data on six sites. 174 *Simon, A. W. 1973. No island is an island: the ordeal of Martha's Vineyard Doubleday, Garden City, New York. 250 pp. Discusses developments throughout Martha's Vineyard and what should be done to preserve the remaining natural features. 175 Sterling, D. 1967. The outer lands: a natural history guide to Cape Cod, Martha's Vineyard, Nantucket, Block Island, and Long Island. The Natural History Press, Garden City, New York. 192 pp. This volume, which includes a subject index, is a natural history guide to the area, and can also serve as an ecology and field reference, since it includes a discussion of landscape, distinctive animal and plant life, and geological formation. 176 *Teller, W. 1970. Cape Cod and the offshore islands. Prentice-Hall, Engle- wood Cliffs, New Jersey. 256 pp. A personal response to Cape Cod and the offshore islands (the Elizabeth Islands, Martha's Vineyard, and Nantucket), but contains good descriptive and historical material. 177 *University of North Carolina Institute of Marine Sciences. 1974. Shallow salt ponds. Pages 300-314 in H. T. Odum, B. J. Copeland, and E. A. McMahan, eds. Coastal ecological systems of the United States. Vol. 2. The Conservation Foundation, Washington, D.C. Typical examples are ponds on Martha's Vineyard and on Nantucket in back of Coatue Beach, all in Massachusetts. 34 178 *Wentworth, C. E. 1969. Beach erosion control in New England. Shore and Beach 37(2):24-30. Coastal erosion problems in New England are discussed specifically as they relate to Martha's Vineyard and Plum Island, Massachusetts. Naushon Island 179 Emerson, A. F. 1935. Early history of Naushon Island. Privately printed. 502 pp. 180 Foqg, J. M., Jr. 1930. The flora of the Elizabeth Islands, Massachusetts. Rhodora 32(379) :119-138. General information is presented on the location, historical interest, and previous botanical work on the Elizabeth Islands and discusses charac- teristic features of seven of the principal islands: Nonamesset, Uncatena, Naushon, Pasque, Nashawena, Cuttyhunk, and Penikese. Nashawena 181 Fogg, J. M., Jr. 1930. The flora of the Elizabeth Islands, Massachusetts. Rhodora 32(379) :119-138. General information is presented on the location, historical interest, and previous botanical work on the Elizabeth Islands and discusses charac- teristic features of seven of the principal islands: Nonamesset, Uncatena, Naushon, Pasque, Nashawena, Cuttyhunk, and Penikese. 182 Howland, A. F. 1964. Three islands--Pasque, Nashawena and Penikese. Privately published. Cuttyhunk Island 183 Fogg, J. M., Jr. 1930. The flora of the Elizabeth Islands, Massachusetts. Rhodora 32(379) :119-138. General information is presented on the location, historical interest, and previous botanical work on the Elizabeth Islands and discusses charac- teristic features of seven of the principal islands: Nonamesset, Uncatena, Naushon, Pasque, Nashawena, Cuttyhunk, and Penikese. 35 184 *Tel 1 er , W. 1970. Cape Cod and the offshore islands. Prentice-Hall, Engle- wood Cliffs, New Jersey. 256 pp. Chapter 10 of this book provides a personal view of Cuttyhunk Island. Horseneck Beach 185 *Fiske, J. D., J. R. Curley, and R. P. Lawton. 1968. A study of the marine resources of the Westport River. The Commonwealth of Massachusetts, Division of Marine Fisheries, Monograph Series Mo. 7. 52 pp. Data are presented for the Westport River area (including Horseneck Beach) on the following elements: physical and chemical characteristics, finfishes, shellfisheries, tidemarshes, and the economic value of marine resources. 36 RHODE ISLAND 186 Halvorson, W. L., and C. G. Dav;son. 1973. Coastal vegetation. Pages 9-1 to 9-92 j_n S. B. Saila, ed. Coastal and offshore environmental inventory: Cape Hatteras to Nantucket Shoals, complement volume. University of Rhode Island, Marine Publication Series No. 3. Describes general geographic features of the area (Cape Hatteras to Nantucket Shoals) including barrier beaches; presents three general forest regions; discusses marine benthic algae, and describes coastal zone land- plant geography by state: North Carolina, Virginia-Delaware, New Jersey, New York-Connecticut, and Rhode Island-Massachusetts. 187 New England River Basins Commission. 1975. Report of the Southeastern New England study: a strategy for balanced development and protection of water and related land resources in eastern Massachusetts and Rhode Island. Regional Report No. NERBC-40. 325 pp. This report covers a 4,400-square-mile area, including the coastline of Massachusetts (Martha's Vineyard, Nantucket, the Elizabeth Islands) and Rhode Island (Narragansett Bay Islands and Block Island). 188 *01sen, S. B., and M. J. Grant. 1973. Rhode Island's barrier beaches: Volume I, a report on a management problem and an evaluation of options. Univer- sity of Rhode Island, Marine Technical Report No. 4. 118 pp. Discusses geological and ecological processes. Summarizes and evaluates management problems of all of the barrier beaches along the Rhode Island coast, including Block Island. 189 *01sen, S. B., and M. J. Grant. 1974. Rhode Island's barrier beaches: Volume II, reports and recommendations at the community level. University of Rhode Island, Marine Technical Report No. 4. 114 pp. Discusses study results of community-by-community examination of Rhode Island barrier beaches. Information on natural features, land use, develop- ment, and storm history are provided for Charleston, Weekapaug, Atlantic, and Napatree, among others. Maps are included. 190 *01sen, S. B., and J. A. Jagschitz. n.d. Rhode Island barrier beach brochure. University of Rhode Ilsnad, Marine Bulletin 19. 8 pp. The formation of the delicately balanced barrier beaches in Rhode Island is discussed and the beaches described. Man's threat to the barriers, hurricane forces, and barrier migration are discussed. 37 191 Rhode Island University. 1973. Rhode Island coastal field day. The barrier beaches. Rhode Island University, Kingston. 10 pp. This report contains information on the origin, natural characteristics, values, and management of Rhode Island barrier beaches, associated ponds and marshes. 192 *Shepard, F. P., and H. R. Wanless. 1971. Glaciated coasts: New England and Long Island. Pages 28-69 j_n_ F. P. Shepard and H. R. Wanless, Our changing coastlines. McGraw-Hill, New York. Provides a detailed physical description of the following islands and beach areas: Maine: Great Wass Island, Harrington Bay Area, Mt. Desert Island, Ken- nebunk-Cape Porpoise area. Massachusetts: Cape Anne, Marblehead and Marblehead Meek, Boston Harbor, Plymouth Harbor, Provincetown and eastern shore of outer Cape Cod, western shore of outer Cape Cod, southeast coast of Cape Cod, south side of Cape Cod, Nantucket Island, Tisburg Great Pond area on Martha's Vineyard, Gay Head Cliffs and vicinity, Martha's Vineyard. Rhode Island: southeastern coast (east from Narragansett Bay), Watch Hill Point. Connecticut: eastern shoreline. New York: Moriches Inlet, Fire Island Inlet, Jones Inlet, and Oak Neck area, all on Long Island. Green Hill Beach 193 Department of Community Planning and Area Development, Kingston, Rhode Island. 1972. Green Hill Beach study: private acquisition—recommendations. Unpublished draft. 194 Nayak, R. K. 1964. Some aspects of the environmental biology of Myar arenaria (Linnaeus) in Green Hill Pond, Rhode Island. M.S. Thesis, University of Rhode Island, Kingston. 195 Rhode Island University. 1973. Greenhill: development and a barrier beach. University of Rhode Island, Coastal Resources Center. 51 pp. Contains information on historical forces of development, physical condi- tions, the impact of storms, legal conditions, state and local regulations, 38 and goals and objectives of development for Greenhill, located on Rhode Island's southern shore facing Black Island Sound and the Atlantic Ocean. Charlestown 196 *Conover, R. J. 1961. A study of Charlestown and Green Hill Ponds, Rhode Island. Ecology 42(1) :119-140. This study, conducted in selected brackish embayments ("salt ponds") on the south shore of Rhode Island, provides a contrast of ponds that are highly productive of marine crops and others that are relatively barren. Charlestown and Green Hill Ponds in Rhode Island were used as examples. 197 *01sen, S. B., and M. J. Grant. 1974. Rhode Island's barrier beaches: Volume II, reports and recommendations at the community level. University of Rhode Island, Marine Technical Report Mo. 4. 114 pp. Discusses study results of community-by-community examination of Rhode Island barrier beaches. Information on natural features, land use, develop- ment, and storm history are provided for Charlestown, Weekapaug, Atlantic, and Napatree, among others. Maps are included. 198 *Saila, S. B. 1961. The contribution of estuaries to the offshore winter flounder fishery in Rhode Island. Proceedings of the Gulf and Caribbean Fisheries Institute 14:95-109. Stresses the importance of Green Hill Pond and Charlestown Pond as breed- ing areas for the winter flounder of Rhode Island. Weekapaug 199 *McMaster, R. L. 1960. Mineralogy as an indicator of beach sand movement along the Rhode Island shore. Journal of Sedimentary Petrology 30(3): 404-413. Data are presented on patterns of beach drift along the southwestern coast of Rhode Island, including the areas of Weekapaug, Napatree Point, and Block Island. 200 *01sen, S. B., and M. J. Grant. 1974. Rhode Island's barrier beaches: Volume II, reports and recommendations at the community level. University of Rhode Island, Marine Technical Report No. 4. 114 pp. Discusses study results of community-by-community examination of Rhode Island barrier beaches. Information on natural features, land use, 39 development, and storm history are provided for Charlestown, Weekapaug, Atlantic, and Mapatree, among others. Maps are included. Atlantic 201 *01sen, S. C, and M. J. Grant. 1974. Rhode Island's barrier beaches: Volume II, reports and recommendations at the community level. University of Rhode Island, Marine Technical Report No. 4. 114 pp. Discusses study results of community-by-community examination of Rhode Island barrier beaches. Information on natural features, land use, develop- ment, and storm history are provided for Charlestown, Weekapaug, Atlantic, and Napatree, among others. Maps are included. Napatree 202 *McMaster, R. L. 1960. Mineralogy as an indicator of beach sand movement along the Rhode Island shore. Journal of Sedimentary Petrology 30(3): 404-413. Data are presented on patterns of beach drift along the southwestern coast of Rhode Island, including the areas of Weekapaug, Napatree Point, and Block Island. 203 *01sen, S. B., and M. J. Grant. 1974. Rhode Island's barrier beaches: Volume II, reports and recommendations at the community level. University of Rhode Island, Marine Technical Report No. 4. 114 pp. Discusses study results of community-by -community examination of Rhode Island barrier beaches. Information on natural features, land use, develop- ment, and storm history are provided for Charlestown, Weekapaug, Atlantic, and Mapatree, among others. Maps are included. 204 Sakalowsky, P. P., Jr. 1975. Beach morphology and nearshore processes on a sheltered beach--the case of Napatree Beach, Rhode Island. Marine Geology 18(4):M35-M43. Discusses short-term changes of beachface within intertidal zone on north side of Napatree Beach and processes most influential in causing change where nearshore processes are low in magnitude and beach changes are subtle. 205 Sakalowsky, P. P., Jr. 1975. Shore processes and changes in Napatree Beach, Rhode Island. Zeitschrift fur Geomorphologie 19(4) :460-478. 40 Investigates short-term changes of the beach face within the intertidal zone, for a complete spring-tide and neap-tide cycle during a period of low wave energy. Stonington Block Island 206 Eaton, R. J. 1972. Chrysopsis mariana in New England. Rhodora 74(797) : 152- 153. The recent discovery of C_. mariana on Block Island, Rhode Island, is discussed in reference to whether it has recently colonized from the Long Island, Mew York, area, where it has been for many years, or whether it has merely been overlooked by collectors. 207 *McMaster, R. L. 1960. Mineralogy as an indicator of beach sand movement along the Rhode Island shore. Journal of Sedimentary Petrology 30(3): 404-413. Data are presented on patterns of beach drift along the southwestern coast of Rhode Island, including the areas of Weekapaug, Mapatree Point, and Block Island. 208 *Nixon, S. W., and C. A. Oviatt. 1973. Analysis of local variation in the standing crop of Spartina alterniflora. Botanica Marina 16:102-109. Measurements are given of standing crop biomass and height of the tall form of Spartina alterniflora on twelve Rhode Island salt marshes, in- cluding Block Island and Hog Island. 209 Sirkin, L. 1976. Block Island, Rhode Island: evidence of fluctuation of the late Pleistocene ice margin. Geological Society of America Bulletin 87(4):574-580. This article discusses two advances of the late, Pleistocene glacial margin on Block Island, Rhode Island, based on glacial, radiocarbon, and palynological data. 210 Sterling, D. 1967. The outer lands: a natural history guide to Cape Cod, Martha's Vineyard, Nantucket, Block Island, and Long Island. The Natural History Press, Garden City, New York. 192 pp. This volume, which includes a subject index, is a natural history guide to the area, and can also serve as an ecology and field reference, since 41 it includes a discussion of landscape, distinctive animal and plant life, and geological formation. 42 CONNECTICUT 211 Halvorson, W. L., and C. G. Dawson. 1973. Coastal vegetation. Pages 9-1 to 9-92 j_n_ S. B. Saila, ed. Coastal and offshore environmental inventory: Cape Hatteras to Nantucket Shoals, complement volume. University of Rhode Island, Marine Publication Series No. 3. Describes general geographic features of the area (Cape Hatteras to Nantucket Shoals) including barrier beaches; presents three general forest regions; discusses marine benthic algae, and describes coastal zone land- plant geography by state: North Carolina, Virginia-Delaware, New Jersey, New York-Connecticut, and Rhode Island-Massachusetts. 212 Kornicker, L. S., and M. Bowen. 1976. Sarsiella ozotothrix, a new species of marine Ostracoda (Myodocopina) from the Atlantic and Gulf coasts of North America. Proceedings of the Biological Society of Washington 88(46): 497-502. A description and drawings are included characterizing S_. ozotothrix from Massachusetts. Additional data are provided on this species in Long Island Sound, near Connecticut, and at Alligator Harbor, Florida, on the Gulf coast. 213 *Shepard, F. P., and H. R. Wanless. 1971. Glaciated coasts: New England and Long Island. Pages 28-69 jn_ F. P. Shepard and H. R. Wanless, Our changing coastlines. McGraw-Hill, New York. Provides a detailed physical description of the following islands and beach areas: Maine: Great Via s s Island, Harrington Bay area, Mt. Desert Island, Kenne- bunk-Cape Porpoise area. Massachusetts: Cape Anne, Marblehead and Marblehead Neck, Boston Harbor, Plymouth Harbor, Provincetown and eastern shore of outer Cape Cod, western shore of outer Cape Cod, southeast coast of Cape Cod, south side of Cape Cod, Nantucket Island, Tisburg Great Pond area on Martha's Vineyard. Gay Head Cliffs and vicinity, Martha's Vineyard. Rhode Island: southeastern coast (east from Narragansett Bay), Watch Hill Point. Connecticut: eastern shoreline. New York: Moriches Inlet, Fire Island Inlet, Jones Inlet, Oak Neck area, all on Long Island. 43 214 U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, Boston District. 1975. People and the Sound erosion and sedimentation. Prepared for the New England River Basins Commission, Boston, Massachusetts. 82 pp. Presents two separate planning schemes, focusing on Long Island Sound to analyze damages and alternative measures to control erosion and sedi- mentation in coastal and upland regions. Hammonasset Point Black Rock 44 NEW YORK 215 Bureau of Outdoor Recreation. 1975. People and the Sound: outdoor recre- ation. Prepared for the New England River Basins Commission, Boston, Massachusetts. 112 pp. This article presents information on projected demand and supply of water-related and open space recreation activities in the Long Island Sound area. 216 Connor, P. F., A. H. Benton, and D. L. Kelly. 1971. The mammals of Long Island, New York. New York State Museum and Science Service, Bulletin 416. 78 pp. A checklist of known present-day native and naturalized mammals of Long Island, with certain qualifications in the case of the marine species, is presented. 217 Davies, D. S., E. W. Axelrod, and J. S. O'Connor. 1973. Erosion of the north shore of Long Island. State University of New York, Marine Sciences Re- search Center, Technical Report 18. 101 pp. This article describes erosion of beaches and bluffs of the north shores of Nassau and Suffolk counties, Long Island. Beach features and historical rates of erosion or accretion at 158 locations are summarized in a Beach Utility Index designed to guide the most rational use of specific shore- line reaches. 218 Everts, C. H. 1973. Beach profile changes on western Long Island. Pages 279-301 i_n_ D. R. Coasts, ed. Coastal geomorphology. State University of New York, Binghamton. Discusses beach profile changes across a nine mile section of straight coast on western Long Island in relation to the reversing transport direc- tion during major storms. 219 Gustavson, T. C. 1976. Paleotemperature analysis of the marine Pleistocene of Long Island, New York, and Nantucket Island, Massachusetts. Geological Society of America Bulletin 87(1) : 1-8 . This article discusses analyses of Pleistocene sediments from eastern Long Island, New York; Nantucket Island, Massachusetts; and Gardiners Island, New York. 45 220 Halvorson, W. L., and C. G. Dawson. 1973. Coastal vegetation. Pages 9-1 to 9-92 in_ S. B. Saila, ed. Coastal and offshore environmental inventory: Cape Hatteras to Nantucket Shoals, complement volume. University of Rhode Island, Marine Publication Series Mo. 3. Describes general geographic features of the area (Cape Hatteras to Nantucket Shoals) including barrier beaches; presents three general forest regions; discusses marine benthic algae, and describes coastal zone land- plant geography by state: North Carolina, Virginia-Delaware, New Jersey, New York-Connecticut, and Rhode Island-Massachusetts. 221 *Harper, R. M. 1918. Some dynamic studies of Long Island veqetation. Plant World 21:38-46. This study, one of the first to be made of the productivity of herbaceous vegetation, covers seven areas on the western part of Long Island, New York. 222 McCormick, C. L. 1973. Probable causes of shoreline recession and advance on the south shore of eastern Long Island. Pages 61-71 in_ D. R. Coates , ed. Coastal geomorphology. State University of New York, Binghamton. A study of the probable causes of shoreline recession and advance on the south shore of Long Island, which consists of a prograding section near the Montauk cliffs. 223 Otvos, E. G., Jr. 1965. Sedimentation-erosion cycles of single tidal periods on Long Island Sound beaches. Journal of Sedimentary Petrology 35(3) :604- 609. Presents data on depth of erosion, amount, and quality of newly accumu- lated foreshore sediments on two Long Island Sound beaches. 224 Panuzio, F. L. 1969. The Atlantic coast of Long Island. Pages 1222-1241 j_n Proceedings of the 11th Conference on Coastal Engineering, London, 1968. Vol. 2. American Society of Coastal Engineers, New York. Describes $188 million of improvements along 110 miles of the south shore of Long Island, including sandfill, feeder beaches, groins, jetties, sand bypassing, and inlet barriers. 225 *Shepard, F. P., and H. R. Wanless. 1971. Glaciated coasts: New England and Long Island. Pages 28-60 in F. P. Shepard and H. R. Wanless, Our changing coastlines. McGraw-Hill, New York. 46 Provides a detailed physical description of the following islands and beach areas: Maine: Great Wass Island, Harrington Bay Area, Mt. Desert Island, Kenne- bunk-Cape Porpoise area. Massachusetts: Cape Anne, Marblehead and Marblehead Neck, Boston Harbor, Phymouth Harbor, Provincetown and eastern shore of outer Cape Cod, western shore of outer Cape Cod, southeast coast of Cape Cod, south side of Cape Cod, Nantucket Island, Tisburg Great Pond area on Martha's Vineyard. Gay Head Cliffs and vicinity, Martha's Vineyard. Rhode Island: southeastern coast (east from Narragansett Bay), Watch Hill Point. Connecticut: eastern shoreline. New York: Moriches Inlet, Fire Island Inlet, Jones Inlet, Oak Neck Area, all on Long Island. 226 Sterling, D. 1967. The outer lands: a natural history guide to Cape Cod, Martha's Vineyard, Nantucket, Block Island, and Long Island. The Natural History Press, Garden City, New York. 192 pp. This volume, which includes a subject index, is a natural history guide to the area, and can also serve as an ecology and field reference, since it includes a discussion of landscape, distinctive animal and plant life, and geological formation. 227 Wasserman, S. E., and D. B. Gilhousen. 1976. Prediction of meteorological factors related to beach erosion at New Jersey and Long Island, New York. Journal of Applied Meteorology 15(4) :313-318 . Discusses prediction of meteorological factors related to storm-caused beach erosion on the New Jersey and Long Island, Mew York, coasts. 228 Yasso, W. E., and E. M. Hartman, Jr. 1975. Beach forms and coastal processes, MESA New York Bright Atlas. New York Sea Grant Institute, Monograph 11. 51 pp. Discusses erosion and littoral drift of barrier structures on Long Island, effectiveness of protection measures employed, and problems stem ming from man's encroachment. Gardiners Island 229 Gustavson, T. C. 1976. Paleotemperature analysis of the marine Pleistocene 47 of Long Island, New York, and Nantucket Island, Massachusetts . Geological Society of America Bulletin 87(1) :l-8. This article discusses analyses of Pleistocene sediments from eastern Long Island, New York; Nantucket Island, Massachusetts; and Gardiners Island, New York. 230 Nicol , W. L., and H. M. Reisman. 1976. Ecology of the boring sponge (Cliona celata) at Gardiner's Island, New York. Chesapeake Science 17(1) :l-7. This article discusses an isolated population of the boring sponge, associating its distribution with the occurrence of bottom sediments favor- able for settling and growth. Fireplace Maidstone Park Northwest Harbor Shelter Island Orient Beach North Haven Morton Southampton 231 Matera, N. J., and J. J. Lee. 1972. Environmental factors affecting the standing crop of foraminifera in sublittoral and psammol ittoral communities of a Long Island salt marsh. Marine Biology (Berlin) 14(2) :89-103. Data are presented on representative samples taken from the epiphytic and psammol ittoral communities during summer 1968 in North Sea Harbor, Southampton, Long Island. 232 *Renshaw, C. 1969. The beaches of Long Island. Shore and Beach 37(2) :50- 59. 48 This paper presents an account of the Long Island (New York) shore front, with data included on Jones Beach, Hampton, Fire Island, Rockaway Beach, and Southampton. 233 *Renshaw, C. 59. Hampton 1969. The beaches of Long Island. Shore and Beach 37(2) :50- This paper presents an account of the Long Island (New York) shore front, with data included on Jones Beach, Hampton, Fire Island, Rockaway Beach, and Southampton.. Fire Island 234 *Art, H. W. 1971. Atmospheric salts in the functioning ecosystem. Ph.D. Thesis, Yale University. 135 pp. stracts 32:2651-B.) of a maritime forest (Dissertation Ab- The vegetation, biomass, primary production, and nutrient relationships of the Sunken Forest at Fire Island, Mew York, are analyzed. 235 Art, H. W., F. H. Bormann, G. K. Voigt, and G. M. Woodwell. 1974. island forest ecosystem: role of meteorologic nutrient inputs. 184(4132) :60-62. Barrier Science This article concerns salt spray as nutrient input in the Sunken Forest on Fire Island, New York, which allows primary production rates similar to those of inland temperate forests. 236 Kumar, N., and J. E. Sanders. 1974. Inlet sequence: a verticle succession of sedimentary structures and textures created by the lateral migration of tidal inlets. Sedimentology 21(4) :491-532. Deals with the tidal inlet off Fire Island, Mew York, in which studies of sediment buildup were correlated to lateral migration from 1825 to 1940. 237 *Manley, S., and R. Manley. 1968. Beaches: th Chilton Book Company, Philadelphia, 383 pp. their lives, legends, and lore. Deals with human aspects of beaches generally, but also contains specific chapters relevant to barrier islands such as birth of a beach, portrait of Fire Island, life on the beach, beach resorts, science on the beach, national seashore beaches, and saving our beaches. 49 238 *Renshaw, C. 1969. The beaches of Long Island. Shore and Beach 37(2):50-59. This paper presents an account of the Long Island (New York) shore front, with data included on Jones Beach, Hampton, Fire Island, Rockaway Beach, and Southampton. 239 Ruzyla, K. 1973. Effects of erosion on barrier-island morphology, Fire Island, New York. Pages 219-237 i_n D. R. Coates, ed. Coastal geomorphol- ogy: Part I, Barrier Islands. State University of New York, Binghamton. Deals with effects of erosion on Fire Island from 1959 to 1969 due to wave action. 240 Sanders, J. E., and N. Kumar. 1975. Evidence of shoreface retreat and in- place "drowning" during Holocene submergence of barriers, shelf off Fire Island, New York. Geological Society of America Bulletin 86(l):65-76. This article discusses how barriers on the shelf off Fire Island have responded, at different times within the Holocene period, to submergence through the contrasting processes of in-place drowning and landward re- treat. 241 U.S. Department of the Interior, National Park Service. 1975. Fire Island National Seashore Master Plan Draft. U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C. 242 Warren, H. A. 1976. Ecological studies of the Sunken Forest, Fire Island National Seashore, New York. National Park Service, Science Monograph Series, No. 7. 237 pp. This volume presents the methodology and results of a study in which the vegetation, biomass, primary production and nutrient relationships of the Sunken Forest at the Fire Island National Seashore were analyzed. 243 *Renshaw, C. 1969. The beaches of Long Island. Shore and Beach 37(2) :50-59. This paper presents an account of the Long Island (New York) shore front, with data included on Jones Beach, Hampton, Fire Island, Rockaway Beach, and Southampton. Jones Beach Island Long Peach 50 Rockaway 244 *Renshaw, C. 1969. The beaches of Long Island. Shore and Beach 37(2) :50-59. This paper presents an account of the Long Island (New York) shore front, with data included on Jones Beach, Hampton, Fire Island, Rockaway Beach, and Southampton. 51 NEW JERSEY 245 *Cal dwell, J. M. 1966. Coastal processes and beach erosion. Journal of the Boston Society of Civil Engineers 53:142-157. This paper explains the fundamentals of coastal processes relating to beach erosion and their application of selected engineering problems. The coast of New Jersey, including barrier islands, is covered in detail. 246 Frank, W. M., and G. M. Friedman. 1971. Barrier island formation and migra- tion: new evidence from New Jersey. Page 77 _in_ D . S. Gorsline, ed. Sec- ond Coastal and Shallow Water Research Conference Abstracts. University of Southern California Press, Los Angeles. Abstract deals with structure, formation, and migration of barrier islands along the New Jersey coast. 247 Halvorson, W. L., and C. G. Dawson. 1973. Coastal vegetation. Pages 9-1 to 9-92 j_n_ S. B. Saila, ed. Coastal and offshore environmental inventory: Cape Hatteras to Nantucket Shoals, complement volume. University of Rhode Island, Marine Publication Series No. 3. Describes general geographic features of the area (Cape Hatteras to Nantucket Shoals) including barrier beaches; presents three general forest regions; discusses marine benthic algae, and describes coastal zone land- plant geography by state: North Carolina, Virginia-Delaware, New Jersey, New York-Connecticut, and Rhode Island-Massachusetts. 248 *Mil stein, C. B., and D. L. Thomas. 1976. Fishes new or uncommon to the New Jersey coast. Chesapeake Science 17:198-204. This article describes the results of a fish sampling project which took place from 1972 to 1974 between Long Beach Island and Atlantic City, New Jersey. Thirteen species were found to be new to New Jersey, while 33 were found to be uncommon. 249 Shepard, F. P., and H. R. Wanless. 1971. Straight barriers and long estu- aries: New York City to Chesapeake Bay. Pages 70-103 i_n_ F. P. Shepard and H. R. Wanless, Ojr changing coastlines. McGraw-HilTT New York. Provides a detailed physical description for the following islands and beach areas: 52 New Jersey: New York Harbor entrance and Sandy Hook, Barnegat Inlet, Little Egg and Beach Haven Inlets, Atlantic City, and Cape May. Delaware: Cape Henlopen, Rehoboth Bay and Indian River Inlet. Maryland: Ocean City Inlet and Barrier, Tingles Island and Whittington Point areas, Assateague Island. Virginia: Chincoteague Island-Fishing Point area, Cape Charles and Delmarva Peninsula, eastern side of Chesapeake Bay, Chesapeake Bay, in- cluding islands, and Cape Henry. 250 Wasserman, S. E., and D. B. Gilhousen. 1976. Prediction of meteorological factors related to beach erosion at New Jersey and Long Island, New York. Journal of Applied Meteorology 15(4) :313-318. Discusses prediction of meteorological factors related to storm-caused beach erosion on the New Jersey and Long Island, New York, coasts. Sandy Hook 251 *Cunningham, J. T. 1968. This is Mew Jersey. Rutgers University Press, New Brunswick, New Jersey. 289 pp. A long chapter, "The Jersey Shore," discusses Sandy Hook, Barnegat, Atlantic City, and Ocean City. 252 *Duane, D. B. 1969. Sand inventory program: a study of New Jersey and northern New England coastal waters. Shore and Beach 37(2 ): 12-16 . This article describes a program by the Corps of Engineers to find and delineate offshore deposits of sand suitable for beach restoration and stabilization. Included are data on the following areas: Sandy Hook and Barnegat (New Jersey); and Plum Island, Nantasket Beach, Revere Beach, Salisbury Beach, and Castle Neck (Massachusetts). 253 Strahler, A. N. 1966. Tidal cycle of changes in an equilibrium beach, Sandy Hook, New Jersey. Journal of Geology 74(3) :247-268. Presents results of repeated traverse profile surveys on the Atlantic beach of Sandy Hook, New Jersey, in the summers of 1959, 1960, and 1961. 254 *Wilson, H. F. 1964. The story of the Jersey shore. D. Van Nostrand, Prince- ton, New Jersey. 139 pp. 53 This book is a condensation and revision of the author's The Jersey Shore, which was published in two volumes in 1953 with full footnotes. It covers the area of New Jersey touched by the sea, including the sea islands, inlets, bays, and salt marshes. Special emphasis is placed on historical and recreation aspects of Sandy Hook, Barnegat, Long Beach Island, Brigantine, Atlantic City, Ocean City, Ludlam, and Wildwood. 255 Yasso, VJ. E. 1964. Use of fluorescent tracers to determine foreshore sedi- ment transport, Sandy Hook, New Jersey. U.S. Navy Office of Naval Re- search, Geography Branch, Project NR 388-057, Technical Report 6 and De- partment of Geology, Columbia University, New York. 18 pp. Describes procedures and results relating to the color-coding (with daylight and ultraviolet fluorescent coating material) of four size classes of foreshore sand from Sandy Hook. 256 Yasso, W. E. 1971. Forms and cycles in beach erosion and deposition. Pages 109-137 jjT_ D. R. Coates ed. Environmental geomorphology. State University of New York, Binghamton. This article discusses the seasonal cycle of winter cut and summer fill, as well as shorter term cycles, on equilibrium beaches at Sandy Hook, New Jersey, and two spit-bar types at Horseshoe Cove, Sandy Hook, New Jersey. Island Beach 257 *Martin, W. E. 1959. The vegetation of Island Beach State Park, New Jersey. Ecological Monographs 29(1) :l-42 . Article covers plant communities and vegetation patterns, topography and environmental patterns, and tolerance of plants to salt spray at Island Beach, New Jersey. 258 *Shure, D. J. 1970. Ecological relationships of small mammals in a New Jersey barrier beach habitat. Journal of Mammalogy 51:267-278. Studies were conducted at Island Beach State Park, New Jersey, to deter- mine the distributional patterns and movements of small animals in a bar- rier beach habitat. 259 *Shure, D. J. 1971. Tidal flooding dynamics: its influence on small mammals in barrier beach marshes. American Midland Naturalist 85:36-44. This study describes tidal effects within bayshore marshes of a New Jersey barrier beach habitat (Island Beach State Park). Tides have defi- nite influences on the composition, abundance, and distribution of small mamma 1 s . 54 260 Snetsinger, R., D. Bordner, and J. E. Luke. 1970. Ixodid tick populations on fall migrating birds at Island Beach State Park, New Jersey. Melsheimer Entomological Series 6:1-4. This study describes how 1002 to 1634 birds of 60 to 69 species were netted in August-September during 1965-1968 and examined for ticks. Only two species of ticks were found, but these occurred on 12.9 to 15% of the birds collected. Barnegat 261 *Cunningham, J. T. 1968. This is New Jersey. Rutgers University Press, New Brunswick, New Jersey. 289 pp. A long chapter, "The Jersey Shore," discusses Sandy Hook, Barnegat, Atlantic City, and Ocean City. 262 *Duane, D. B. 1969. Sand inventory program: a study of New Jersey and northern New England coast?! waters. Shore and Beach 37(2) :12-16 . The Corps of Engineers has a program to find and delineate offshore deposits of sand suitable for beach restoration and stabilization. In- cluded are data on the following areas: Sandy Hook and Barnegat (New Jersey); and Plum Island, Nantasket Beach, Revere Beach, Salisbury Beach, and Castle Neck (Massachusetts). 263 *Fernandez, J. H. 1969. Changing concepts in coast protection. Shore and Beach 37(2):21-23. This article emphasizes the importance of protecting shores and uplands from erosion, with particular reference to New Jersey (including Long Beach Island and Barnegat). 264 *Johnson, J. A. 1969. Barnegat Inlet: a problem and a solution. Shore and Beach 37(2):17-20. This article discusses a Federal project at Barnegat to construct a dike in Barnegat Bay, to construct three groins on the beach, and to lower the south jetty near its inshore end. 265 *Wilson, H. F. 1964. The story of the Jersey shore. D. Van Nostrand, Prince- ton, New Jersey. 139 pp. This book is a condensation and revision of the author's The Jersey Shore, which was published in two volumes in 1953 with full footnotes. 55 It covers the area of New Jersey touched by the sea, including the sea islands, inlets, bays, and salt marshes. Special emphasis is placed on historical and recreation aspects of Sandy Hook, Barnegat, Long Beach Island, Brigantine, Atlantic City, Ocean City, Ludlam, and Wildwood. Long Beach Island 266 *Fernandez, J. H. 1969. Changina concepts in coast protection. Shore and Beach 37(2) :21-23. This article emphasizes the importance of protecting shores and uplands from erosion, with particular reference to New Jersey (including Long Beach Island and Barnegat). 267 U.S. Army Corps of Engineers. 1974. Late stage public meeting study of the New Jersey coastal inlets and beaches from Barnegat Inlet to Longport. Transcript of Proceedings held March 19, 1974 at Pomona, New Jersey by Philadelphia Engineer District. Philadelphia, Penn. 55 pp. Relates public hearing which assessed proposals to remedy problems in navigation, beach erosion control, and storm protection from Barnegat Inlet to Longport. The article mentions Long Beach Island, Brigantine Island, and Absecon Island, New Jersey. 268 *Wilson, H. F. 1964. The story of the Jersey shore. D. Van Nostrand, Prince- ton, New Jersey. 139 pp. This book is a condensation and revision of the author's The Jersey Shore, which was published in two volumes in 1953 with full footnotes. It covers the area of New Jersey touched by the sea, including the sea islands, inlets, bays, and salt marshes. Special emphasis is placed on historical and recreation aspects of Sandy Hook, Barnegat, Long Beach Island, Brigantine, Atlantic City, Ocean City, Ludlam, and Wildwood. Little Beach Island Brigantine 269 U.S. Army Corps of Engineers. 1974, Late stage public meeting study of the New Jersey coastal inlets and beaches from Barnegat Inlet to Longport. Transcript of Proceedings held March 19, 1974 at Pomona, New Jersey by Philadelphia Engineer District. Philadelphia, Penn. 55 pp. Relates public hearing which assessed proposals to remedy problems in navigation, beach erosion control, and storm protection problems from 56 Barnegat Inlet to Longport. Mentions Long Beach Island, Brigantine Island, and Absecon Island, New Jersey. 270 ♦Wilson, H. F. 1964. The story of the Jersey shore. D. Van Mostrand, Prince- ton, New Jersey. 139 pp. This book is a condensation and revision of the author's The Jersey Shore, which was published in two volumes in 1953 with full footnotes. It covers the area of New Jersey touched by the sea, including the sea islands, inlets, bays, and salt marshes. Special emphasis is placed on historical and recreation aspects of Sandy Hook, Barnegat, Long Beach Island, Brigantine, Atlantic City, Ocean City, Ludlam/and Wildwood. Atlantic City 271 ♦Cunningham, J. T. 1968. This is New Jersey. Rutgers University Press, New Brunswick, New Jersey. 289 pp. A long chapter, "The Jersey Shore," discusses Sandy Hook, Barnegat, Atlantic City, and Ocean City. 272 Everts, C. H., A. E. DeWall, and M. T. Czerniak. 1974. Behavior of beach fill at Atlantic City, New Jersey. Pages 1370-1388 j_n Proceedings of 14th Coastal Engineering Conference, Copenhagen, June 1974. American Society of Civil Engineers, Mew York, N.Y. This study describes the behavior of beach sand following two beach replenishment projects at Atlantic City, Mew Jersey, in 1963 and 1970. 273 *Wilson, H. F. 1964. The story of the Jersey shore. D. Van Nostrand, Prince- ton, New Jersey. 139 pp. This book is a condensation and revision of the author's The Jersey Shore, which was published in two volumes in 1953 with full footnotes. It covers the area of New Jersey touched by the sea, including the sea islands, inlets, bays, and salt marshes. Special emphasis is placed on historical and recreation aspects of Sandy Hook, Barnegat, Long Beach Island, Brigantine, Atlantic City, Ocean City, Ludlam, and Wildwood. Ocean City New Jersey. Rutgers University Press, New 57 274 *Cunningham, J. T. 1968. This is Brunswick, New Jersey. 289 pp A long chapter, "The Jersey Shore," discusses Sandy Hook, Barnegat, Atlantic City, and Ocean City. 275 *Wilson, H. F. 1964. The story of the Jersey shore. D. Van Nostrand, Prince- ton, Mew Jersey. 139 pp. This book is a condensation and revision of the author's The Jersey Shore, which was published in two volumes in 1953 with full footnotes. It covers the area of New Jersey touched by the sea, including the sea islands, inlets, bays, and salt marshes. Special emphasis is placed on historical and recreation aspects of Sandy Hook, Barnegat, Long Beach Island, Brigantine, Atlantic City, Ocean City, Ludlam, and Wildwood. Ludlam 276 *Wilson, H. F. 1964. The story of the Jersey shore. D. Van Nostrand, Prince- ton, New Jersey. 139 pp. This book is a condensation and revision of the author's The Jersey Shore, which was published in two volumes in 1953 with full footnotes. It covers the area of New Jersey touched by the sea, including the sea islands, inlets, bays, and salt marshes. Special emphasis is placed on historical and recreation aspects of Sandy Hook, Barnegat, Long Beach Island, Brigantine, Atlantic City, Ocean City, Ludlam, and Wildwood. Seven Mile Beach 277 Paola, C. R., and M. P. Meza. 1977. Evidence for onshore deposition of Pleistocene Continental Shelf clays. Marine Geology 23(3) :M27-M35. The origin of the fine-grained sediments deposited as a washover fan at Stone Harbor, New Jersey, is discussed. Wildwood 278 *Wilson, H. F. 1964. The story of the Jersey shore. D. Van Nostrand, Prince- ton, New Jersey. 139 pp. This book is a condensation and revision of the author's The Jersey Shore, which was published in two volumes in 1953 with full footnotes. It covers the area of New Jersey touched by the sea, including the sea islands, inlets, bays, and salt marshes. Special emphasis is placed on historical and recreation aspects of Sandy Hook, Barnegat, Long Beach Island, Brigantine, Atlantic City, Ocean City, Ludlam, and Wildwood. 58 DELAWARE 279 Gaither, W. S., and V. Klemas. 1973. Research in the coastal and oceanic environment. Delaware University, Technical Report 25. 35 pp. Summarizes progress during fourth year of multidiscipl inary study of a section of the Atlantic seacoast involving Delaware and adjacent areas of New Jersey and Maryland. Emphasis on coastal processes. 280 Halvorson, W. L.., and C. G. Dawson. 1973. Coastal vegetation. Pages 9-1 to 9-92 i_n S. G. Saila, ed. Coastal and offshore environmental inventory: Cape Hatteras to Nantucket Shoals, complement volume. University of Rhode Island, Marine Publication Series No. 3. Describes general geographic features of the area (Cape Hatteras to Nantucket Shoals) including barrier beaches; presents three general forest regions; discusses marine benthic algae, and describes coastal zone land- plant geography by state: North Carolina, Virginia-Delaware, New Jersey, New York-Connecticut, and Rhode Island-Massachusetts. 281 Kraft, J. C. 1971. A guide to the geology of Delaware's coastal environments, Delaware University, College of Marine Studies, Technical Report No. CMS- 2GL039, TR-1. 223 pp. The report interprets vertical sediment sequences and geomorphic patterns along the low-lying Delaware coast, including elements of a major estuary: highlands undergoing erosion; spits; dunes, marshes; and lagoon-barrier shoreline. Photographs, diagrams, and cross-sections are included. 282 Kraft, J. C, R. B. Biggs, and S. D. Halsey. 1973. Morphology and vertical sedimentary sequence models in Holocene transgressive barrier systems. Pages 321-354 in D. R. Coates, ed. Coastal geomorphology. State Univer- sity of New York, Binghamton. The article describes the transgressive barrier systems of the Mid- Atlantic Delmarva Peninsula, which shows four types of morphologic and vertical sedimentary sequence models: (1) barrier systems, with barrier island, baymouth barrier, barrier island chains; (2) beach against high- land; (3) estuarine overwash barriers; and (4) spit complex. 283 Kraft, J. C, E. A. Allen, D. F. Belknap, C. P. John, and E. M. Maurmeyer. 1976. Delaware's changing shoreline. Delaware Coastal Zone Management Program Technical Report No. 1. 330 pp. 59 Report details some of the geological processes, summarizes present knowledge of the geology of Delaware's lagoon-barrier-marsh shoreline, and presents some predictions of expected change. 284 Shepard, F. P., and H. R. Wanless. 1971. Straight barriers and long estu- aries: New York City to Chesapeake Bay. Pages 70-103 in_ F. P. Shepard and H. R. Uanless, Our changing coastlines. McGraw-Hill, New York. Provides a detailed physical description for the following islands and beach areas: New Jersey: New York Harbor entrance and Sandy Hook, Barnegat Inlet, Little Egg and Beach Haven Inlets, Atlantic City, and Cape May. Delaware: Cape Henlopen, Rehoboth Bay and Indian River Inlet. Maryland: Ocean City Inlet and Barrier^ Tingles Island and Whittington Point areas, Assateague Island. Virginia: Chincoteague Island-Fishing Point area, Cape Charles and Delmarva Peninsula,, eastern side of Chesapeake Bay; Chesapeake Bay, in- cluding islands, and Cape Henry. 285 Wakelin, J. H., Jr., and R. W. Cairns. 1972. The coastal zone of Delaware: a plan of action in Delaware. University of Delaware, College of Marine Studies. 464 pp. This is the report of the governor's task force, which was set up to prepare policy guidelines for the management of marine and coastal affairs in Delaware. Rehoboth 286 *de Gast, R. 1975. Western wind/eastern shore. The Johns Hopkins University Press, Baltimore, Maryland. 176 pp. This book is a first-person account of travels along the eastern shore. Included are photographs and text for Rehoboth Beach and Fenwick Island, Delaware; Assateague Island, Maryland; and the following islands off Virginia--Assawoman, Metomkin, Cedar, Parramore, Hog, Cobb, Smith, and Fisherman's. 287 *Gallagher, J. L. 1971. Algal productivity and some aspects of the ecological physiology of the edaphic communities of Canary Creek tidal marsh. Ph.D. Thesis. University of Delaware. 125 pp. (Dissertation Abstracts 32:6353- B.) 60 Gross algal primary productivity and edaphic community respiration estimates were made for five areas of Canary Creek tidal marsh near Lewes, Delaware, immediately behind Cape Henlopen. 288 ♦Gallagher, J. L., and F. C. Daiber. 1974. Primary production of edaphic algal communities in a Delaware salt marsh. Limnology and Oceanography 19:390-393. Gross primary production of edaphic algae was estimated for five areas in a high salinity tidal marsh near Lewes, Delaware, immediately behind Cape Henlopen. 289, 290 Kraft, J. C. 1968. Coastal sedimentary environments, Lewes-Rehoboth Beach, Delaware. Guidebook, the annual field trip of the Northeastern Section of the Society of Economic Paleontologists and Mineralogists, September 1968. University of Delaware, Department of Geology. 32 pp. This is a study of the tectonic and stratigraphic framework of the sediments that make up the Atlantic coastal geosyncline. Environments include restricted bays; inlets from the open marine with tidal deltas, baymouth bars and dunes; nearshore inner neritic; marshes and tidal creeks; spit-dune-marsh complex of Cape Helopen; and beaches and marsh fringes of Delaware Bay. Fenwich Island North 291 *de Gast, R. 1975. Western wind/eastern shore. The Johns Hopkins University Press, Baltimore, Maryland. 176 pp. This book is a first-person account of travels along the Eastern Shore. Included are photographs and text for Rehoboth Beach and Fenwick Island, Delaware; Assateague Island, Maryland; and the following islands off Virginia--Assawoman, Metompkin, Cedar, Parramore, Hog, Cobb, Smith, and Fisherman 's. 61 MARYLAND 292 MacLeod, H. H., J. Schubert, and A. Anderson. 1973. Multi spectral analysis of surface features in the study of the evolution of barrier islands. National Aeronautics and Space Administration, Goddard Space Flight Center, Greenbelt, Maryland. 1 p. This analysis pertains to the vegetation and topography of islands off the coasts of Maryland and Virginia. 293 Shepard, F. P., and H. R. Wanless. 1971. Straight barriers and long estu- aries: New York City to Chesapeake Bay. Pages 70-103 in_ F. P. Shepard and H. R. Wanless, Our changing coastlines. McGraw-Hill, New York. Provides a detailed physical description for the following islands and beach areas: New Jersey: New York Harbor entrance and Sandy Hook, Barnegat Inlet, Little Egg and Beach Haven Inlets, Atlantic City, and Cape May. Delaware: Cape Henlopen, Rehoboth Bay and Indian River Inlet, Maryland: Ocean City Inlet and Barrier, Tingles Island and Whittington Point areas, Assateague Island. Virginia: Chincoteague Island-Fishing Point area, Cape Charles and Delmarva Peninsula, eastern side of Chesapeake Bay, Chesapeake Bay, in- cluding islands, and Cape Henry. Fenwick Island South 294 *de Gast, R. 1975. Western wind/eastern shore. The Johns Hopkins University Press, Baltimore, Maryland. 176 pp. This book is a first-person account of travels along the Eastern Shore. Included are photographs and text for Rehoboth Beach and Fenwick Island, Delaware; Assateague Island, Maryland; and the following islands off Virginia--Assawoman, Metomkin, Cedar, Parramore, Hog, Cobb, Smith, and Fisherman 's. 295 ♦Slaughter, T. H. 1973. Regulatory aspects relative to coastal management problems, Ocean City, Maryland's Atlantic coast beach. Shore and Beach 41(2) :5-ll. 62 Discusses effects of rapid property development on the barrier island and the present beach, in terms of economics and environment. Included are data on Fenwick Island. 296 Slaughter, T. H. 1974. The relationship of the nearshore longshore bar and sand waves at Ocean City, Maryland. Pages 4-1 to 4-16 in_ Research and investigation of geology, minerals, and water resources of Maryland. Final Report. Maryland Geological Survey, Annapolis. Compares the historical shorelines of Ocean City from the inlet to the Maryland-Delaware line showing that reversal zones of erosion and accretion occur at different locations for different periods. 297 Stansfield, C. A. 1969. Recreational land use patterns within an American seaside resort. The Tourist Review 25(4) :128-136. Ocean City is used as a typical example of northeast resorts on barrier sandbars. Assateague Island North 298 *Bartberger, C. E. 1976. Sediment sources and sedimentation rates, Chincotea- gue Bay, Maryland and Virginia. Journal of Sedimentary Petrology 46(2): 326-336. Assateague Island is said to be the principal supplier of sediment to Chincoteague Bay. 299 Gaskin, P., and J. R. Stottlemyer. 1974. Ecological and economic principles in park planning: the Assateague National Seashore model. Coastal Zone Management Journal 1(4) :395. Concerns preservation and use of a dynamic barrier island by the National Park Service and the required identification of a minimally acceptable basic data package for decision making. 300 Higgins, E. A., R. D. Rappleye, and R. G. Brown. 1971. The flora and ecology of Assateague Island. University of Maryland Agricultural Experiment Station Bulletin A-172. 70 pp. Presents detailed information on floristics, transects, and soil/water samples for Assateague Island off the Virginia-Maryland coast. 301 *Keefe, C. U., and W. R. Boynton. 1973. Standing crop of salt marshes sur- rounding Chincoteague Bay, Maryland-Virginia. Chesapeake Science 14:117- 123. 63 This study analyzes the standing crop and chemical composition of the high and low salt-marsh vegetation of Chincoteague Bay, the largest of a series of shallow embayments along the Delmarva peninsula of the Atlantic Coast. 302 *Paradiso, J. L., and C. 0. Handley, Jr. 1965. Checklist of mammals of Assateague Island. Chesapeake Science 6:167-171. Twenty-five mammal species are listed from Assateague Island, off the Atlantic coast of Maryland and Virginia. 303 Ward, F. P., and R. B. Berry. 1972. Autumn migration of peregrine falcons on Assateague Island, 1970-1971. Journal of Wildlife Management 36(2): 484-492. Data are presented on a study of the autumn migrations of peregrine falcons (Falco peregrinus tundrius) on Assateague Island in Maryland and Virginia during 1970 and 1971. 64 VIRGINIA 304 Byrne, R. J. 1971. Studies of the barrier-island system, eastern shore of Virginia. Page 34 in_D. S. Gorsline, ed. Second Coastal and Shallow Water Research Conference Abstracts. University of Southern California Press, Los Angeles. Abstract describes barrier island system of Virginia's eastern shore. It deals with shoreline changes, changes in areal distribution of salt marshes, and circulation changes. 305 Clark, J., ed. 1976. Barrier islands and beaches. Technical Proceedings of the 1976 Barrier Islands Workshop, Annapolis, Maryland, May 17-18, 1976. The Conservation Foundation, Washington, D.C. 149 pp. Titles of papers presented include: Barrier islands as significant ecosystems Comparative ecology of East Coast barrier islands The wildlife resources of barrier islands The national interest in barrier islands and beaches Barrier islands as natural storm-dependent systems Barrier beachfronts Environmental considerations and the management of barrier islands — St. George Island and the Apalachicola Bay System • Barrier island preservation—the Virginia Coast Reserve System. 306 Fisher, J. J. 1967. Origin of barrier island chain shore lines: middle Atlantic states. Geological Society of America, Special Papers 115:66-67. This article explains the development of barrier island chains along the middle Atlantic states. The Outer Banks of North Carolina and Virginia are discussed. 307 Fisher, J. J. 1973. Bathymetric projected profiles and the origin of barrier islands—Johnson 's shoreline of emergence revisited. Pages 161-179 i_n_ D. R. Coates, ed. Coastal geomorphology. State University of New York, Binghamton. Bathymetric profiles were constructed along barrier island shorelines in North Carolina and Virginia. Continental Shelf gradient was also examined, particularly off Cape Hatteras and Cape Lookout. 308 Halvorson, W. L., and C. G. Dawson. 1973. Coastal vegetation. Pages 9-1 to 9-92 in S. B. Saila, ed. Coastal and offshore environmental inventory: 65 Cape Hatteras to Nentucket Shoals, complement volume. University of Rhode Island, Marine Publication Series Mo. 3. Describes general geographic features of the area (Cape Hatteras to Nantucket Shoals) including barrier beaches; presents three general forest regions; discusses marine benthic algae, and describes coastal zone land- plant geography by state: North Carolina, Virginia-Delaware, New Jersey, New York-Connecticut, and Rhode Island-Massachusetts. 309 MacLeod, M. H., J. Schubert, and A. Anderson. 1973. Multispectral analysis of surface features in the study of the evolution of barrier islands. National Aeronautics and Space Administration, Goddard Space Flight Center, Greenbelt, Maryland. 1 p. This analysis pertains to the vegetation and topography of islands off the coasts of Maryland and Virginia. 310 Shepard, F. P., and H. R. Wanless. 1971. Straight barriers and long estu- aries: New York City to Chesapeake Bay. Pages 70-103 In. F. P. Shepard and H. R. Wanless, Our changing coastlines. McGraw-Hill, New York.' Provides a detailed physical description for the following islands and beach areas: New Jersey: New York Harbor entrance and Sandy Hook, Barnegat Inlet, Little Egg and Beach Haven Inlets, Atlantic City, and Cape May. Delaware: Cape Hen! open, Rehoboth Bay and Indian River Inlet. Maryland: Ocean City Inlet and Barrier, Tingles Island and Whittington Point areas, Assateague Island. Virginia: Chincoteague Island-Fishing Point area, Cape Charles and Delmarva Peninsula, eastern side of Chesapeake Bay, Chesapeake Bay, in- cluding islands, and Cape Henry. 311 *Wass, M. L., and T. D. Wright. 1969. Coastal wetlands of Virginia, interim report. Special Report in Applied Marine Science and Ocean Engineering No. 10. Virginia Institute of Marine Science, Gloucester Point. 154 pp. Coastal wetlands occupy only 1 percent of the total area of Virginia and marshes occupy h percent. Yet 95 percent of Virginia's annual harvest of fishes, both commercial and sport, from tidal waters is dependent to some degree on wetlands. 66 Assateague Island South 312 Dolan, R., B. Hayden, J. Heywood , C. Hewitt, and J. Michel. 1976. LANDSAT: Application of Remote-Sensing to Shoreline-Form Analysis'. University of Virginia, Department of Environmental Sciences, Quarterly Report 2. 33 pp. This report presents LANDSAT imagery for the southern end of Assateague Island, Virginia, and the shoreline of North Carolina. 313 *Harrison, S. C. 1972. The sediments and sedimentary processes of the Holo- cene tidal flat complex, Delmarva Peninsula, Virginia. Louisiana State University, Coastal Studies Institute, Technical Report 112. 107 pp. This report describes the textures, biota, and depositional structures of the Delmarva (Delaware-Maryland-Virginia) tidal flat deposits. Par- ramore, Metomkin, Wallops, Cedar, Smith, Assateague, Hog, Cobb, and Wreck islands are all discussed. 314 Harvill, A. M., Jr. 1967. The vegetation of Assateague Island, Virginia. Castanea 32(2) :105-108. A description is given of the present vegetation on the Virginia end of the island, where a game refuge is located. 315 Marshall, H. G., and D. E. Bowker. 1976. The use of Skylab in the study of productivity along the Eastern shelf waters of the United States. Old Dominion University Research Foundation, Norfolk, Virginia. Final Reports NASA-CR-152848. 28 pp. Data sampling from the Rappahannock River and Assateague Islands areas are discussed, correlating Skylab and ground-based measurements. 316 *Paradiso, J. L., and C. 0. Handley, Jr. 1965. Checklist of mammals of As- sateague Island. Chesapeake Science 6:167-171. Twenty-five mammal species are listed from Assateague Island, off the Atlantic coast of Maryland and Virginia. 317 Ward, F. P., and R. B. Berry. 1972. Autumn migration of peregrine falcons on Assateague Island, 1970-1971. Journal of Wildlife Management 36(2): 484-492. Data are presented on a study of the autumn migrations of peregrine falcons (Fa! co peregrinus tundrius) on Assateague Island in Maryland and Virginia during 1970 and 1971. 67 Wallops Island 318 *Harrison, S. C. 1972. The sediments and sedimentary processes of the Holo- cene tidal flat complex, Delmarva Peninsula, Virginia. Louisiana State University, Coastal Studies Institute Technical Report 112, 107 pp. This report describes the textures, biota, and depositional structures of the Delmarva (Delaware-Maryland-Virginia) tidal flat deposits. Par- ramore, Metomkin, Wallops, Cedar, Smith, Assateague, Hog, Cobb, and Wreck islands are all discussed. Assawoman Island 319 cde Gast, R. 1975. Western wind/eastern shore. The Johns Hopkins University Press, Baltimore, Maryland. 176 pp. This book is a first-person account of travels along the eastern shore. Included are photographs and text for Rehoboth Beach and Fenwick Island, Delaware; Assateague Island, Maryland; and the following islands off Virginia--Assawoman, Metomkin, Cedar, Parramore, Hog, Cobb, Smith, and Fisherman 's. Metomkin Island 320 *de Gast, R. 1975. Western wind/eastern shore. The Johns Hopkins University Press, Baltimore, Maryland. 176 pp. This book is a first-person account of travels along the eastern shore. Included are photographs and text for Rehoboth Beach and Fenwick Island, Delaware; Assateague Island, Maryland; and the following islands off Virginia--Assawoman, Metomkin, Cedar, Parramore, Hog, Cobb, Smith, and Fisherman 's. 321 *Harrison, S. C. 1972. The sediments and sedimentary processes of the Holo- cene tidal flat complex, Delmarva Peninsula, Virginia. Louisiana State University, Coastal Studies Institute Technical Report 112. 107 pp. This report describes the textures, biota, and depositional structures of the Delmarva (Delaware-Maryland-Virginia) tidal flat deposits. Par- ramore, Metomkin, Wallops, Cedar, Smith, Assateague, Hog, Cobb, and Wreck islands are all discussed. 68 Cedar Island 322 *de Gast, R. 1975. Western wind/eastern shore. The Johns Hopkins University Press, Baltimore, Maryland. 176 pp. This book is a first-person account of travels along the eastern shore. Included are photographs and text for Rehoboth Beach and Fenwick Island, Delaware; Assateague Island, Maryland; and the following islands off Virginia--Assawoman, Metomkin, Cedar, Parramore, Hog, Cobb, Smith, and Fisherman's. 323 *Harrison, S. C. 1972. The sediments and sedimentary processes of the Holo- cene tidal flat complex, Delmarva Peninsula, Virginia. Louisiana State University, Coastal Studies Institute, Technical Report 112. 107 pp. This report describes the textures, biota, and depositional structures of the Delmarva (Delaware-Maryland-Virginia) tidal flat deposits. Par- ramore, Metomkin, Wallops, Cedar, Smith, Assateague, Hog, Cobb, and Wreck islands are all discussed. Parramore Island 324 *de Gast, R. 1975. Western wind/eastern shore. The Johns Hopkins University Press, Baltimore, Maryland. 176 pp. This book is a first-person account of travels along the eastern shore. Included are photographs and text for Rehoboth Beach and Fenwick Island, Delaware; Assateague Island, Maryland; and the following islands off Virginia—Assawoman, Metomkin, Cedar, Parramore, Hog, Cobb, Smith, and Fisherman 's. 325 *Harrison, S. C. 1972. The sediments and sedimentary processes of the Holo- cene tidal flat complex, Delmarva Peninsula, Virginia. Louisiana State University, Coastal Studies Institute, Technical Report 112. 107 pp. This report describes the textures, biota, and depositional structures of the Delmarva (Delaware-Maryland-Virginia) tidal flat deposits. Par- ramore, Metomkin, Wallops, Cedar, Smith, Assateague, Hog, Cobb, and Wreck islands are all discussed. 326 Harvill, A. M. , Jr. 1965. The vegetation of Parramore Island, Virginia. Castanea 30(4) :226-228. This article discusses the principal types of vegetation and landforms on this offshore island: Spartina alterniflora mud flats, Salicornia Distich! is tidal flats, Spartina al terniflora-S. patens-Distich! is-Ju ncus 69 roemerianus marshes, Pinus-Juniperus communities, Sal icornia-Bassia salt flats, and Ammophila-Panicum amarum dunes. 327 ♦Mendelssohn, I. A., and K. L. Marcellus. 1976. Anqiosperm production of three Virginia marshes in various salinity and soil nutrient regimes. Chesapeake Science 17:15-23.. The net aerial angiosperm productivity, salinity, and soil nutrient composition was determined for Wachapreague Marsh, located on the eastern shore of Virginia, in back of Parramore Island. 328 Newman, W. S., and C. A. Munsart. 1968. Holocene geology of the Wachapreague Lagoon, eastern shore Peninsula, Virginia. Marine Geology 6:81-105. This article summarizes the geologic history of the Wachapreague Lagoon and compares data for this area with sea-level curves from other parts of the Atlantic coast. Hog Island 329 *de Gast, R. 1975. Western wind/eastern shore. The Johns Hopkins University Press, Baltimore, Maryland. 176 pp. This book is a first-person account of travels along the eastern shore. Included are photographs and text for Rehoboth Beach and Fenwick Island, Delaware; Assateague Island, Maryland; and the following islands off Virginia--Assawoman, Metomkin, Cedar, Parramore, Hog, Cobb, Smith, and Fisherman 's . 330 *Harrison, S. C. 1972. The sediments and sedimentary processes of the Holo- cene tidal flat complex, Delmarva Peninsula, Virginia. Louisiana State University, Coastal Studies Institute, Technical Report 112. 107 pp. This report describes the textures, biota, and depositional structures of the Delmarva (Delaware-Maryland-Virginia) tidal flat deposits. Par- ramore, Metomkin, Wallops, Cedar, Smith, Assateague, Hog, Cobb, and Wreck islands are all discussed. Cobb Island 331 *de Gast, R. 1975. Western wind/eastern shore. The Johns Hopkins University Press, Baltimore, Maryland. 176 pp. This book is a first-person account of travels along the eastern shore. Included are photographs and text for Rehoboth Beach and Fenwick Island, 70 Delaware; Assateague Island, Maryland; and the following islands off Virginia—Assawoman, Metomkin, Cedar, Parramore, Hog, Cobb, Smith, and Fisherman 's. 332 *Harrison, S. C. 1972. The sediments and sedimentary processes of the Holo- cene tidal flat complex, Delmarva Peninsula, Virginia. Louisiana State University, Coastal Studies Institute, Technical Report 112. 107 pp. This report describes the textures, biota, and depositional structures of the Delmarva (Delaware-Maryland-Virginia) tidal flat deposits. Par- ramore, Metomkin, Wallops, Cedar, Smith, Assateague, Hog, Cobb, and Wreck islands are all discussed. Smith Island 333 *Clovis, J. F. 1968. The vegetation of Smith Island, Virginia. Castanea 33(2):115-121. This article divides Smith Island, Virginia, into six physiographic areas and relates the vegetation types found in each area. 334 *de Gast, R. 1975. Western wind/eastern shore. The Jonn Hopkins University Press, Baltimore, Maryland, 176 pp. This book is a first-person account of travels along the eastern shore. Included are photographs and text for Rehoboth Beach and Fenwick Island, Delaware; Assateague Island, Maryland; and the following islands off Virginia—Assawoman, Metomkin, Cedar, Parramore, Hog, Cobb, Smith, and Fisherman 's. 335 *Harrison, S. C. 1972. The sediments and sedimentary processes of the Holo- cene tidal flat complex, Delmarva Peninsula, Virginia. Louisiana State University Coastal Studies Institute, Technical Report 112. 107 pp. This report describes the textures, biota, and depositional structures of the Delmarva (Delaware-Maryland-Virginia) tidal flat deposits. Par- ramore, Metomkin, Wallops, Cedar, Smith, Assateague, Hog, Cobb, and Wreck islands are all discussed. 336 ♦Willis, W. M., and J. S. Zaneveld. 1971. Vegetation composition and distri- bution on a barrier island of Virginia's eastern shore. Virginia Journal of Science 22(3) :103. Four vegetation units are described for Smith Island, and the distribu- tion of the types is discussed. 71 Fishermans Island 337 *Harrison, S. C. 1972. The sediments and sedimentary processes of the Holo- cene tidal flat complex, Delmarva Peninsula, Virginia. Louisiana State University, Coastal Studies Institute, Technical Report 112. 107 pp. This report describes the textures, biota, and depositional sturctures of the Delmarva (Delaware-Maryland-Virginia) tidal flat deposits. Par- ramore, Metomkin, Wallops, Cedar, Smith, Assateague, Hog, Cobb, and Wreck islands are all discussed. Bodie Island North 338 *Fisher, J. J. 1967. Development pattern of relict beach ridges, Outer Banks barrier chain, North Carolina. Ph.D. Thesis, University of North Carolina. 225 pp. (Dissertation Abstracts 28:4622-B.) This is a study of relict beach ridges along part of the Virginia-North Carolina coast, including the Outer Banks barrier chain (Cape Hatteras, Cape Henry, and Cape Lookout). 339 *Florschutz, 0., Jr. 1972. The importance of Eurasian milfoil (Myriophyllum spicatum) as a waterfowl food. Proceedings of the Southeastern Associa- tion of Game and Fish Commissioners 26:189-193. The primary objectives of the study were to determine and document water- fowl use of Eurasian milfoil in the vicinity of Back Bay and Mackay Island National Wildlife Refuges in Virginia and North Carolina. 340 Harrison, W., and L. E. Fausak. 1970. A time series from the beach environ- ment--II. Virginia Institute of Marine Science, Gloucester Point, Data Report No. 7. 98 pp. Presents results of intensive 30-day sampling of beach variables at Virginia Beach, Virginia, during August and September 1969. 341 Harrison, W. , E. W. Rayfield, J. D. Boor III, G. Reynolds, and J. B. Grant. 1968. A time series from the beach environment. NOAA, Atlantic Ocean- ographic and Meteorological Labs, Miami, Florida, Technical Memorandum ERLTM-A0L-1. 28 pp. Discusses results of a continuous, 26-day series of measurements made at Virginia Beach, Virginia during 1966. Included are: depth of water table in the foreshore, altitude and elevation of beach components, wave data, rainfall, radiant energy balance over water, atmospheric conditions, and other detailed data. 72 342 *Shideler, G. L. 1973. Evaluation of a conceptual model for the transverse sediment transport system of a coastal barrier chain, Middle Atlantic Bight. Journal of Sedimentary Petrology 43(3) :748-764. Comparative size analyses of adjacent foreshore, berm, and dune sediments were conducted along a coastal barrier chain of the Middle Atlantic Bight between Cape Henry, Virginia, and Cape Hatteras, North Carolina. 73 NORTH CAROLINA 343 Baker, S., ed. 1975. Coastal development and areas of environmental concern. University of North Carolina, Sea Grant Report No. UNC-SG-75-18. The proceedings of the Symposium on Coastal Development and Areas of Environmental Concern, was held at East Carolina University, Greenville, North Carolina, on March 5, 1975. The meeting was carried as an educa- tional effort .to acquaint elected officials, planners, and the public with the reasons why certain locations require special consideration as areas of environmental concern. Coastal salt marshes and sand dunes of barrier- islands are included. 344 *Bellis, V. 1974. Medium salinity plankton systems. Pages 358-396 jm H, T. Odum, B. J. Copeland, and E. A. McMahan, eds. Coastal ecological systems of the United States. Vol. 2. The Conservation Foundation, Washington, D.C. North Carolina's sounds constitute the largest estuarine system along the Atlantic coast. Most of this vast system is of the medium salinity, plankton-based type and as such functions as a nursery or temporary home for migrating species of commercial importance. 345 *Bellis, V., and E. Proffitt. 1976. Maritime forest. Pages 22-27 in_ R. Alden, D. Brower, B. J. Copeland, D. Frankenberg, and F. Parker, eds. Ecological determinants of coastal area management, Vol. 2--appendices. University of North Carolina, Sea Grant Publication No. UNC-SG-76-05. 392 pp. Describes and evaluates the maritime forests associated with North Carolina's barrier islands. 346 *Bolster, K. 1976. Salt marshes. Pages 88-110 in_ R. Alden, D. Brower, B. J. Copeland, D. Frankenberg, and F. Parker, eds. Ecological determinants of coastal area management, Vol. 2 — appendixes. University of North Carolina, Sea Grant Publication No. UNC-SG-76-05. 392 pp. Reviews the flora and fauna of salt marshes found behind barrier islands in North Carolina . 347 Burke, C. J. 1962. The North Carolina Outer Banks: a floristic interpreta- tion. Journal of the Elisha Mitchell Scientific Society 78:21-28. This paper is a treatment of the Outer Banks as a floristic unity. Floras of some of the islands had been published earlier. 74 348 *Carraway, C, E. Chester, G. Dunn, R. Pratt, and M. J. Pugh. 1976. Tools and techniques for coastal area management. Pages 161-378 in_ R. Alden, D. Grower, B. J. Copeland, D. Frankenberg, and F. Parker, eds. Ecological determinants of coastal area management, Vol. 2--appendixes . University of North Carolina, Sea Grant Publication No. UNC-SG-76-05. 392 pp. Identifies tools and techniques by which development in the coastal area of North Carolina may be guided or controlled in order to reduce developmental impacts. 349 Dolan, R. 1965. Seasonal variations in beach profiles along the Outer Banks of North Carolina. Shore and Beach 33(2) :22-26. This article presents the results of sand level changes recorded by graduated steel stakes over a 6-month period along the Outer Banks of North Carolina. 350 *Dolan, R. 1972. Barrier dune system along the Outer Banks of North Carolina: a reappraisal. Science 176(4032) :286-288. This article summarizes and reappraises the coastal barrier dune system along the North Carolina Outer Banks. Severe adjustments are being made in geological and ecological processes because of modifications. 351 Dolan, R., and J. Ferm. 1966. Swash processes and beach characteristics. Professional Geographer 18:210-213. A beach process study along the Outer Banks of North Carolina estimated swash velocity in an attempt to establish a more direct link between breaking waves and beach changes. 352 *Dolan, R., and J. C. Ferm. 1968. Crescentic landforms along the Atlantic coast of the United States. Science 159:627-629. An uninterrupted series of hierarchically arranged crescentic coastal landforms occur along the Atlantic coast. The Outer Ranks of North Carolina are emphasized. 353 Dolan, R., and P. Godfrey. 1973. Effects of Hurricane Ginger on the barrier islands of North Carolina. Geological Society of America Bulletin 84(4): 1329-1333. Compares hurricane effects on artificial, stabilized islands in the north sector of the Outer Banks with those of natural barrier islands in the southern sector and points up the ability of the latter to survive severe effects of hurricanes. 75 354 *Dolan, R., P. J. Godfrey, and W. Odum. 1973. Man's impact on the barrier islands of North Carolina. American Scientist 61(2) : 152-162 . This article discusses the physical and biological ramifications of dune stabilization projects on the natural environment of the Outer Banks, North Carol ina. 355 Dunbar, G. S. 1958. Historical Geography of the North Carolina Outer Banks. Louisiana State University Studies, Coastal Studies Series No. 3. Louisiana State University Press, Baton Rouge. 234 pp. This report describes the cultural evolution of this homogeneous, rather isolated coastal community. The topics discussed include source, numbers and distribution of the inhabitants; changes in land use and occupation, and trait acceptances and survivals. 356 El-Ashry, M. T., and H. R. llanless. 1968. Photo interpretation of shoreline changes between Capes Hatteras and Fear (North Carolina). Marine Geology 6:347-379. This article contains detailed reconstruction of morphological changes in barrier beaches, lagoons, bays, estuaries, and sounds on the North Carolina coast. 357 Frankenberg, 0. 1975. Salt marshes. Pages 54-58 i_n_S. Baker, ed . Coastal development and areas of environmental concern. University of North Carolina, Sea Grant Report No. UNC-SG-75-18. Describes the salt marshes of North Carolina, the reasons why these areas are of environmental concern, and the issues that should underlie decisions to develop salt marshes. 358 Godfrey, P. J., and M. M. Godfrey. 1976. Barrier island ecology of Cape Lookout National Seashore and vicinity, North Carolina. National Park Service, Scientific Monograph Series No. 9, 160 pp. 359 Hails, J. R. 1971. Holocene evolution of a portion of the North Carolina coast: discussion. Geological Society of America Bulletin 82(12) :3525- 3526. Discusses paper by J. W. Pierce and D. J. Colquhoun (1970) which deals with the Holocene evolution of the North Carolina barrier islands based on bore hole data. 360 Halvorson, W. L., and C. G. Dawson. 1973. Coastal vegetation. Pages 9-1 to 76 9-92 jn_ S. B. Saila, ed. Coastal and offshore environmental inventory: Cape Hatteras to Nantucket Shoals, complement volume. University of Rhode Island, Marine Publicacion Series No. 3. Describes general geographic features of the area (Cape Hatteras to Nantucket Shoals) including barrier beaches; presents three general forest regions; descusses marine benthic algae, and describes coastal zone land- plant geography by state: North Carolina, Virginia-Delaware, New Jersey, New York-Connecticut, and Rhode Island-Massachusetts. 361 *Klump, V., and J. Smith. 1976. Barrier island values and man's impact. Pages 28-45 j_n R. Alden, D. Brower, B. J. Copeland, D. Frankenberg, and F. Parker, eds. Ecological determinants of coastal area management, Vol. 2--appendixes. University of North Carolina, Sea Grant Publication No. UNC-SG-76-05. 392 pp. Reviews the primary, secondary, and aesthetic values of North Carolina's barrier islands, man's potential impact, and management implications. 362 *Klump, V., and J. Smith. 1976. The beach and shoreface dynamics. Pages 1-13 j_n R. Alden, D. Brower, B. J. Copeland, D. Frankenberg, and F. Parker, eds. Ecological determinants of coastal area management, Vol. 2--ap- pendices. University of North Carolina, Sea Grant Publication No. UNC- SG-76-05. 392 pp. Reviews beach profile, water-sediment transport, migration, and wash- overs of the barrier islands of North Carolina. 363 *Klump, V., and J. Smith. 1976. Dunes. Pages 20-22 in_R. Alden, D. Brower, B. J. Copeland, D. Frankenberg, and F. Parker, eds. Ecological determi- nants of coastal area management, Vol. 2--appendixes. University of North Carolina, Sea Grant Publication No. UNC-SG-76-05. 392 pp. Reviews the physical and dynamic characteristics of dunes on North Carolina's barrier islands. 364 *Klump, V., and J. Smith. 1976. Inlets. Pages 13-20 in_ R. Alden, D. Brower, B. J. Copeland, D. Frankenberg, and F. Parker, eds. Ecological determi- nants of coastal area manaaement, Vol. 2--appendixes. University of North Carolina, Sea Grant Publication No. UNC-SG-76-05. 392 pp. Reviews the physical, dynamic, and temporal characteristics of North Carolina's barrier island inlets. 365 Langfelder, L. J., D. B. Stafford, and M. Amein. 1972. Coastal erosion in North Carolina. Paper 7306 in Amer^an Society of Civil Engineers Proceedings, Vol. 96; and Pages 531-545 in_ Journal of Waterways and Harbors Division, No. WW2. Coastal erosion is studied along the entire length (330 miles) of the North Carolina coast, using aerial photography and wave refraction pro- cedures. 366 Muchmore, W. B., and C. H. Alteri. 1969. Parachernes (Arachnida, Chelonethida, Chernetidae) from the coast of North Carolina. Entomological News 80(5) :131-137. Pseudoscorpions collected under driftwood on North Carolina beaches are described. 367 Paul, J. R., and C. L. Cordes. 1969. New distribution records for five mammals of the coastal plain of North Carolina. Transactions of the Illinois State Academy of Science 62(4) : 373-374 . New locality records are presented for five species of rodents from eastern North Carolina. 368 Phelps, D. S. 1975. Archaeological sites as interim areas of environmental concern. Pages 73-79 jn_ S. Baker, ed. Coastal development and areas of environmental concern. University of North Carolina, Sea Grant Re- port No. UNC-SG-75-18. Archaeological and historical sites are one of the most important areas of environmental concern in the naturally complex and relatively fragile coastal zone of North Carolina. 369 Pierce, J. W. 1970. Tidal inlets and washover fans. Journal of Geology 78:230-234. This paper discusses the conditions under which washover fans or tidal inlets will form and which conditions will permit inlet formation from the seaward side or from the lagoon side along the Outer Banks, North Carolina. 370 Pierce, J. W., and D. J. Colquhoun. 1970. Configuration of the Holocene primary barrier chain, Outer Banks, North Carolina. Southeastern Geology ll(4):231-236. Article focuses on the initial shape of the coastline of Outer Banks during the latter part of the Holocene rise in sea level. 78 371 Pierce, J. W., and D. J. Colquhoun. 1970. Holocene evolution of a portion of the North Carolina coast. Geoloqical Society of America Bulletin 81(12) :3697-3714. A reevaluation of the mode of formation and the evolutionary development of the large barrier chain that makes up much of the North Carolina coast, and the absence of this zone under the remainder of the barrier. 372 Pierce, J. W., and D. J. Colquhoun. 1971. Holocene evolution of a portion of the North Carolina coast: reply. Geological Society of America Bul- letin 82:(12):3527. Explains issues raised by J. R. Hails regarding a paper about the Holo- cene evolution of the North Carolina barrier islands based on bore hole data. 373 *Russell , R. J. 1967. River plains and sea coasts. University of California Press, Berkeley. 173 pp. A general work on geomorphic aspects of river plain and sea coast devel- opment. Chapter on coastal morphology is generally relevant to barrier islands. Louisiana coast and Outer Banks, North Carolina, are mentioned. 374 Savage, R. P., and W. W. Woodhouse, Jr. 1969. Creation and stabilization of coastal barrier dunes. Pages 671-700 i_n_ Proceedings of the 11th Confer- ence on Coastal Engineering, London, 1968, Vol. 1. American Society of Chemical Engineers, New York. The article discusses experiments conducted along the coast of North Carolina using sand fences and dune grasses to create and stabilize a barrier dune line parallel to and behind the existing beaches of low-lying barrier islands. 375 Seapker, J. K. 1975. Historic sites. Pages 80-83 in_S. Baker, ed. Coastal development and areas of environmental concern. University of North Carolina, Sea Grant Report No. UNC-SG-75-18. Historic sites are among the categories of fragile properties which the North Carolina Coastal Resources Commission should designate as areas of environmental concern. 376 Seneca, E. D. 1975. Coastal sand dunes. Pages 23-27 in_S. Baker, ed. Coastal development and areas of environmental concern. University of North Carolina, Sea Grant Report No. UNC-SG-75-18. 79 Vegetated coastal dunes are an integral part of the North Carolina barrier islands and can serve to protect estuaries, roads, and structures from the effects of the open ocean. 377 Shepard, F. P., and H. R. l.'anless. 1971. Cuspate foreland coasts: Cape Hatteras to Cape Romain. Pages 104-131 in F. P. Shepard and H. R. Hani ess, Our changing coastlines. -McGraw-Hill, New York. Provides a detailed physical description for the following islands and beach areas: North Carolina: Kitty Hawk area, Cape Hatteras area, Ocracoke Town and vicinity, Cape Lookout area, Cape Fear area. South Carolina: Myrtle Beach area and the "Carolina Bays," Murrells Inlet, Winyah and Santee Bays, Cape Romain area. 378 *Shideler, G. L. 1973. Evaluation of a conceptual model for the transverse sediment transport system of a coastal barrier chain, Middle Atlantic Bight. Journal of Sedimentary Petrology 43(3) :748-764. Comparative size analyses of adjacent foreshore, berm, and dune sediments were conducted along a coastal barrier chain of the Middle Atlantic Bight between Cape Henry, Virginia, and Cape Hatteras, North Carolina. 379 *Shideler, G. L. 1973. Textural trend analyses of coastal barrier sediments along the Middle Atlantic Bight, North Carolina. Sedimentary Geology 9(3) :195-220. Comparative polynominal trend analyses of textural parameters were con- ducted on adjacent foreshore, berm, and dune sediment populations along a coastal barrier chain of the Middle Atlantic Bight between Cape Henry, Virginia, and Cape Hatteras, North Carolina. 380 *Snow, B. C. 1955. Effects of hurricanes on North Carolina beaches. Shore and Beach 23(2) :14-17 . This article discusses the effects of three hurricanes on the North Carolina coast occurring in 1954 and 1955. 381 *Sonu, C. J., and W. R. James. 1973. A Markov model for beach profile changes, Journal of Geophysical Research 78:1462-1471. This paper introduces numerical and theoretical tests of a beach profile transition model on the Outer Banks, North Carolina, in which profile changes were found to take the form of systematic transitions among a family of six major profile states. 80 382 *Sonu, C. J., and J. L. VanBeek. 1971. Systematic beach changes on the Outer Banks, North Carolina. Journal of Geology 79(4) :416-425. A series of beach profiles on Outer Banks indicates that a 4-month cycle is evident in which a berm climbed up the beach with increasing sediment storage and then disintegrated with loss of sediment. Direction of waves, rather than height, was thought to be responsible. 383 Sonu, C. J., J. M. McCloy, and D. S. McArthur. 1967. Longshore currents and nearshore topographies. Louisiana State University, Coastal Studies Institute, Technical Report 51. 25 pp. The validity of seven analytical formula as well as linear and nonlinear multiple regression schemes were tested using field data from the Outer Banks, North Carolina. 384 Wagner, R. H. 1964. The ecology of Uniola paniculata L. in the dune-strand habitat of North Carolina. Ecological Monographs 34(1 ) :79-96. The general ecology of sea oat habitats is discussed. 385 Waits, E. D. 1967. Net primary productivity of an irregularly flooded North Carolina salt marsh. Ph.D. Thesis. North Carolina State University at Raleigh. 124 pp. (Dissertation Abstracts 28:4027 B.) The major vegetation types of an irregularly flooded salt marsh on the Outer Banks of North Carolina were defined by analyzing species presence data obtained from sample plots. Bodie Island South 386 *Dolan, R. 1966. Beach changes on the Outer Banks of North Carolina. Louisiana State University, Coastal Studies Institute, Technical Report 48. 13 pp. This report considers the relationships between surf-zone processes and subaerial beach changes as they occur on Bodie Island, North Carolina. 387 Dolan, R., J. C. Ferm, and D. S. McArthur. 1969. Measurements of beach process variables, Outer Banks, North Carolina. Office of Naval Research, Geography Branch, Technical Report No. 64. 79 pp. Discusses a series of beach-process experiments conducted on Bodie Island, North Carolina, during 1963-1964. 81 388 *Marshall , H. L. 1974. Irregularly-flooded marsh. Pages 150-170 j_n H. T. Gdum, B. J. Copeland, and E. A. McMahan, eds. Coastal ecosystem of the United States. Vol. 2. The Conservation Foundation, Washington, D.C. Good examples of irregularly flooded marshes are seen in the Pamlico Sound area of North Carolina, from Cedar Keys to Apalachee Bay in Florida, and near the mouth of the Mississippi River. Examples from each of three areas are discussed: Bodie Island, North Carolina; Live Oak Point, Florida; and New England salt marshes. 389 Matta, J. F. 1977. Beach fauna study of the CERC field research facility, Duck, North Carolina. Old Dominion University, Department of Biological Sciences, Norfolk, Virginia. 105 pp. This report presents results of an intensive seasonal study of the invertebrate beach fauna of a barrier island in Dare County, North Carolina. The study area includes the beach face and the sound beach. 390 *Quay, T. L., and T. S. Critcher. 1963. Food habits of waterfowl in Currituck Sound, North Carolina. Proceedings of the Southeastern Association of G-^me and Fish Commissioners 16:200-209. The food contents of 326 gizzards from 15 species of waterfowl collected on Currituck Sound between 1947 and 1952 were analyzed in detail by the aggregate percentage method. 391 *Sonu, C. J. 1972. Bimodal composition and cyclic characteristics of beach sediment in continuously changing profiles. Journal of Sedimentary Petrology 42:852-857. This paper reports samplings of sediment and beach profiles coordinated with wind, wave, tide, longshore current, and swash at Nags Head, Outer Banks, North Carolina. 392 *Soucie, G. 1974. Here today, gone tomorrow. Audubon 76(1) :71-93 . This article describes action being taken by the Park Service in the Cape Hatteras area to combat severe problems with erosion. Portsmouth, Ocracoke, Hatteras, and Bodie islands are discussed. Hatteras Island 393 *Brown, C. A. 1959. Vegetation of the Outer Banks of North Carolina. Louisiana State University Press, Baton Rouge. 179 pp. 82 This report covers the archeology, cultural geography, botany, coastal morphology, and geology of the Cape Hatteras area, North Carolina. 394 Chang, Y. M., and R. L. Kaesler. 1974. Morphological variation of the fora- minifer Ammonia beccarii (Linne) from the Atlantic coast of the United States. University of Kansas, Paleontological Contributions 69:1-23. The foraminifer A. beccarii is discussed in terms of various Holocene environments of the Atlantic coast north and south of Cape Hatteras. 395 *Cooke, C. W. 1968. Barrier island formation: discussion. Geological Society of America Bulletin 79(7) :945-946. This article describes the various ways in which a barrier island may be produced. Areas discussed include Cape Hatteras, Sapelo Island, Padre Island, and the Florida Keys. 396 Cooke, C. W. 1971. Holocene evolution of a portion of the North Carolina coast: discussion. Geological Society of America Bulletin 82(8):2369- 2370. This article discusses the part played by the configuration of the sea bottom and the activity of waves in progradation in Hatteras Banks area during the Pleistocene. 397 Dolan, R. 1970. Sand waves-Cape Hatteras, North Carolina. Shore and Beach 38(1) :23-25. This paper discusses shoreline changes caused by the migration of sand waves along the beach at Cape Hatteras, North Carolina. 398 *Dolan, R. 1971. Coastal landforms: crescentic and rhythmic. Geological Society of America Bulletin 82:177-180. This article discusses rhythmic shoreline landforms along the coast of North Carolina. Emphasis is made on the Cape Hatteras area. 399 *Dolan, R. 1973. Barrier islands: natural and controlled. Pages 263-278 j_n_ D. R. Coates, ed. Coastal geomorphology. State University of New York, Binghamton. Compares the upper section of the Outer Banks, around Cape Hatteras, man-manipulated for many years, to the southern segment including Core Banks, which remains in a natural state. The latter prove much better adapted to natural processes and extreme events. Also compares the effects of Hurricane Ginger in both areas. 83 400 Dolan, R., and R. Glassen. 1973. Oregon Inlet, North Carolina--a history of coastal change. Southeastern Geographer 13(1) :41-53 . This article discusses the uncontrolled migration and rapid shoaling that are affecting the use of Oregon Inlet, North Carolina, and the struc- tures in its vicinity. 401 Dolan, R., and L. Vincent. 1972. Analysis of shoreline changes, Cape Hat- teras, North Carolina. Modern Geology 3(3) : 143-149 . Examines temporal pattern of shoreline change at Cape Hatteras in order to establish a quantitative relation between change and wave energy. 402 *Fisher, J. J. 1967. Development pattern of relict beach ridges, Outer Banks barrier chain, North Carolina. Ph.D. Thesis, University of North Carolina. 255 pp. (Dissertation Abstracts 28:4622-B.) This is a study of relict beach ridges along part of the Virginia-North Carolina coast, including the Outer Banks barrier chain (Cape Hatteras, Cape Henry, and Cape Lookout). 403 Fisher, J. J. 1973. Bathymetric projected profiles and the origin of barrier islands—Johnson 's shoreline of emergence revisited. Pages 161-179 ui D. R. Coates, ed. Coastal geomorphology. State University of New York, Binghamton. Bathymetric profiles were constructed along barrier island shorelines in North Carolina and Virginia and other types of shorelines. Continental Shelf gradient was also examined, particularly off Cape Hatteras and Cape Lookout. 404 Godfrey, P. J., and M. M. Godfrey. 1973. Comparison of ecological and geomorphic interactions between altered and unaltered barrier island sys- tems in North Carolina. Pages 239-258 jn_ D. R. Coates, ed. Coastal geomorphology. State University of flew York, Binghamton. Discusses natural and artificially maintained barrier island systems of the Outer Banks with the former better able to survive natural course of events. Compares barrier islands of Cape Hatteras, which are stabilized by artificial dune building, with the natural barriers of Cape Lookout. 405 ♦Godfrey, P. J., and M. M. Godfrey. 1974. An ecological approach to dune management in the rational recreation areas of the United States east coast. International Journal of Biometeorology 18:101-110. 84 Hypotheses and theories on how to stabilize sand dunes along the U.S. east coast are given. Areas mentioned include Cape Hatteras and the Outer Banks of North Carolina. 406 Harris, W. H. 1967. Stratification of fresh and salt water on barrier islands as a result of differences in sediment permeability. Water Re- sources Research 3(1) :89-97 ." Presents data on freshv/ater zones beneath Hatteras Island. 407 *Hayden, B. P. 1975. Storm wave climates at Cape Hatteras, North Carolina: recent secular variations. Science 190:981-983. This article studies changes in coastal v/ave climates at Cape Hatteras, North Carolina. These changes may account for the observed shoreline erosion along the east coast. 408 Knowles, C. E., and J. J. Singer. 1977. Exchange through a barrier island inlet: additional evidence of upwelling off the northeast coast of North Carolina. Journal of Physical Oceanography 7(1) : 146-152 . From data collected at Oregon Inlet, North Carolina, in 1973, sequence and relationship of wind and water conditions were noted. This can be explained by wind induced upwelling in the area. The conclusion is that temperature, salinity, and current velocity records in and near a barrier island inlet could furnish much information about mixing processes on the adjacent continental shelf. 409 Machemehl , J. L. 1973. Artifical beach saves Hatteras motels. Shore and Beach 41(1) :11-13. Describes how nourishment of beach widened the berm on Hatteras Island to approximately 500 feet providing temporary storm protection for man- made facilities. 410 *Milne, R. C, and T. L. Ouay. 1966. The foods and feeding habits of the nutria on Hatteras Island, North Carolina. Proceedings of the South- eastern Association of Game and Fish Commissioners 20:112-123. This study of nutria on Hatteras Island, North Carolina, centered on feeding methods, plant species utilized for food, and droppings analyses. 411 *Soucie, G. 1974. Here today, gone tomorrow. Audubon 76(l):71-93. 85 This article describes action being taken by the Park Service in the Cape Hatteras area to combat severe problems with erosion. Portsmouth, Ocracoke, Hatteras, and Rodie islands are discussed. 412 Stirewalt, G. L., and R. L. Ingram. 1974. Aerial photographic study of shoreline erosion and deposition, Pamlico Sound, North Carolina. Univer- sity of North Carolina, Sea Grant Publication UNC-SG-74-09. 66 pp. Discusses recent changes in shoreline morphology of Pamlico Sound (and Salvo Island) as determined from examination of aerial photographs dating between 1938 and 1971 at 16 sites. 413 Travis, R. W. 1976. Interactions of plant communities and oceanic overwash on the manipulated barrier islands of Cape Hatteras National Seashore, North Carolina. Ph.D. Thesis. University of North Carolina. 147 pp. (Dissertation Abstracts 37:1537-B.) This report describes the process of overwash and the response of vege- tation in the dune and barrier flat communities of Cape Hatteras National Seashore, North Carolina. Observations are also presented concerning burial of Spartina patens. 414 Van der Valk, A. G. 1974. Mineral cycling in coastal foredune plant com- munities in Cape Hatteras National Seashore. Ecology 55(6) : 1349-1358 . Measurements of salt spray deposition and the quantity of cations are presented for the front (oceanside), top, and back of the foredune at Cape Hatteras. 415 Vincent, L. 1973. Quantification of shoreline meandering. University of Virginia, Department of Environmental Sciences, Technical Report TR-7. 92 pp. Rhythmic shoreline topography, called shoreline meandering, was investi- gated along Hatteras Island, North Carolina, using historical aerial photog- raphy. 416 ♦Williams, R. B., M. B. Murdoch, and L. K. Thomas. 1968. Standing crop and importance of zooplankton in a system of shallow estuaries. Chesapeake Science 9:42-51. This paper describes a year-long study of taxonomic composition and standing crop of zooplankton in the area of Core Banks, North Carolina, which includes Cape Lookout, Cape Fear, Cape Hatteras, and Pamlico Sound. 86 Ocracoke Island 417 *Dolan, R., and R. Mayden. 1974. Adjusting to nature in our national sea- shores. National Parks and Conservation Magazine 48(6):9-14. This article explains a Park Service management policy which deals with the forces of nature that affect national seashores and lakeshores. The Cape Hatteras area is discussed in detail including Core Banks, Portsmouth Island, Ocracoke Island, and flags Head. 418 *Engels, W. L. 1942. Vertebrate fauna of North Carolina coastal islands. ~ American Midland Naturalist 28:273-304. This study is concentrated on those barrier islands which fringe the North Carolina coast from Cape Henry to Cape Lookout. The vertebrate fauna of the most centrally located bar in this series of islands is described, along with geography, vegetation, and climate. Particular emphasis is placed on Ocracoke Island. 419 *Soucie, G. 1974. Here today, gone tomorrow. Audubon 76(l):71-93. This article describes action being taken by the Park Service in the Cape Hatteras area to combat severe problems with erosion. Portsmouth, Ocracoke, Hatteras, and Rodie islands are discussed. Portsmouth Island 420 *Dolan, R., and B. Hayden. 1974. Adjusting to nature in our national sea- shores. National Parks and Conservation Magazine 48(6):9-14. This article explains a Park Service management policy which deals with the forces of nature that affect national seashores and lakeshores. The Cape Hatteras area is discussed in detail including Core Banks, Portsmouth Island, Ocracoke Island, and Nags Head. 421 *Soucie, G. 1974. Here today, gone tomorrow. Audubon 76(l):71-93. This article describes action being taken by the Park Service in the Cape Hatteras area to combat severe problems with erosion. Portsmouth, Ocracoke, Hatteras, and Rodie islands are discussed. Core Ranks 422 *Barnes, R. D. 1953. The ecological distribution of spiders in non-forest 87 maritime communities at Beaufort, North Carolina. Ecological Monographs 23:315-337. The article discusses the distribution of spiders in non-forest maritime communities in the follov/ing areas of coastal North Carolina: Bogue Banks, Shackleford Banks, and Core Banks. 423 ♦Davis, L. V., and I. E. Gray. 1966. Zonal and seasonal distribution of in- sects in North Carolina salt marshes. Ecological Monographs 36:275-295. The study area for this investigation of insects in the salt marshes of North Carolina includes Shackleford Banks, Bogue Banks, and Core Banks. 424 *Dolan, R. 1973. Barrier islands: natural and controlled. Pages 263-278 in D. R. Coates, ed. Coastal geomorphology. State University of New York, Binghamton. Compares the upper section of the Outer Banks, around Cape Hatteras, man-manipulated for many years, to the southern segment including Core Banks, v/hich remains in a natural state. The latter prove much better adapted to natural processes and extreme events. Also compares the ef- fects of Hurricane Ginger in both areas. 425 ♦Godfrey, P. J., and M. M. Godfrey. 1974. The role of overwash and inlet dynamics in the formation of salt marshes on North Carolina barrier islands, Pages 407-427 jn_ R. J. Reimold and W. H. Queen, eds. Ecology of Halophytes, Academic Press, New York. 605 pp. This paper describes studies in the vicinity of Core Banks, North Carolina, a low barrier island where overwash and inlet closure are the major ways in which new salt marshes are formed. 426 ♦Godfrey, P. J., and M. M. Godfrey. 1976. Barrier island ecology of Cape Lookout National Seashore and vicinity, North Carolina. National Park Service, Scientific Monograph Series No. 9. 160 pp. Discusses management approaches, origins, ecological effects of overwash, and the effects of man on the Outer Banks of North Carolina. 427 ♦Williams, R. B., M. B. Murdoch, and L. K. Thomas. 1968. Standing crop and importance of zooplankton in a system of shallow estuaries. Chesapeake Science 9:42-51. This paper describes a year-long study of taxonomic composition and standing crop of zooplankton in the area of Core Banks, North Carolina, which includes Cape Lookout, Cape Fear, Cape Hatteras, and Pamlico Sound. 88 Shackleford Banks 428 *Au, S. 1969. Vegetation and ecological processes on Shackleford Bank, North Carolina. Ph.D. Thesis, Duke University. (Dissertation Abstracts 31: 1756-B.) 188 pp. This study classifies, describes, and maps the vegetation on Shackleford Bank, and measures environmental parameters such as temperature, humidity, v/ind, sand movement, edaphic factors, and plant responses. 429 *Barnes, R. D. 1953. The ecological distribution of spiders in non-forest maritime communities at Beaufort, North Carolina. Ecological Monographs 23:315-337. The article discusses the distribution of spiders in non-forest maritime communities in the following areas of coastal North Carolina: Bogue Banks, Shackleford Banks, and Core Banks. 430 *Davis, L. V., and I. E. Gray. 1966. Zonal and seasonal distribution of in- sects in North Carolina salt marshes. Ecological Monographs 36:275-295. The study sites for this investigation of insects in the salt marshes of North Carolina include Shackleford Banks, Bogue Banks, and Core Banks. 431 *Engles, W. L. 1952. Vertebrate fauna of North Carolina, coastal islands II: Shackleford Banks. American Midland Naturalist 47:702-742. This paper describes which species of tetrapod vertebrates have become established on the various islands of Shackleford Banks, N.C. Shore and aquatic birds are excluded as well as birds occurring only in winter as migrants. 432 *Fox, R. S., and K. H. Bynum. 1975. The amphipod crustaceans of North Carolina estuarine waters. Chesapeake Science 16:223-237. Seventy-four species of qammaridean (nine undescribed) and four species of caprellidean amphipods are reported from estuarine waters of North Carolina near Bogue Banks and Shackleford Banks. 433 *Pierce, J. W. 1969. Sediment budget along a barrier island chain. Sedimen- tary Geology 3(1):5-16. Discusses how physiographic changes along the North Carolina coast (be- tween Cape Hatteras and Cape Lookout) are used to define the sediment budget based on reliable historical records. The area of study includes Shackleford Banks. 89 434 Schwartz, F. J. 1970. Fishes and changing ecology of Mullet Pond, a barrier beach island pond on Shackleford Banks, North Carolina. Journal of the Elisa Mitchell Scientific Society 86(1) :31-34. The changing ecology and fish species composition of Mullet Pond is reviewed. 435 Tagatz, M. E., and D. L. Dudley. 1961. Seasonal occurrence of marine fishes in four shore habitats near Beaufort, North Carolina, 1957-1960. U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service, Special Scientific Report No. 390. 19 pp. Monthly frequency of occurrence and size range of marine fishes in four shore habitats in the vicinity of Beaufort, North Carolina, were deter- mined during a 3-year seining program. 436 ♦Williams, R. B., and M. B. Murdoch. 1969. Annual production of Spartina alterniflora and Juncus roemerianus in salt marshes near Beaufort, North Carolina. The Association of Southeastern Biologists Bulletin 12:49. (Abstracts. ) The production of organic matter by salt marsh phanerogams, Spartina alterniflora and Juncus roemerianus, was studied in areas near Beaufort, N.C. 437 *Williams, R. B., and M. B. Murdoch. 1969. The potential importance of Spartina alterniflora in conveying zinc, manganese and iron into estuarine food chains. Pages 431-439 j_n_ D. J. Nelson, ed . Proceedings of the Sec- ond National Symposium on Radioecology. U.S. Atomic Energy Commission, Washington, D.C. The growth of Spartina was studied with harvest and other techniques in salt marshes near Beaufort, N.C. 438 ♦Williams, R. B., and M. B. Murdoch. 1972. Compartmental analysis of the production of Juncus roemerianus in a North Carolina salt marsh. Chesapeake Science 13:69-79. Data were obtained for Juncus roemerianus production in a marsh near Cape Lookout, North Carolina. Bogue Banks 439 • Adams, S. M. 1976. The ecology of eelgrass, Zostera marina (L.), fish com- munities, functional analysis. Journal of Experimental Marine Biology and Ecology 22:293-311. 90 Consumption, production, and respiration of fish communities utilizing tv/o eel grass beds in a shallow estuarine system near Beaufort, North Carolina have been estimated for 1971-1972. One of the beds was in Bogue Sound near Newport River. 440 *Barnes, R. D. 1953. The ecological distribution of spiders in non-forest maritime communities at Beaufort, North Carolina. Ecological Monographs 23:315-337. The article discusses the distribution of spiders in non-forest maritime communities in the following areas of coastal North Carolina: Bogue Banks, Shackleford Banks, and Core Banks. 441 *Davis, L. V., and I. E. Gray. 1966. Zonal and seasonal distribution of in- sects in North Carolina salt marshes. Ecological Monographs 36:275-295. The study area for this investigation of insects in the salt marshes of North Carolina includes Shackleford Banks, Bogue Banks, and Core Banks. 442 *Fox, R. S., and K. H. Bynum. 1975. The amphipod crustaceans of North Carolina estuarine waters. Chesapeake Science 16:223-237. Seventy-four species of gammaridean (nine undescribed) and four species of caprellidean amphipods are reported from estuarine waters of North Carolina near Bogue Banks and Shackleford Banks. 443 Lindgren, E. W. 1976. Five species of Arenopontia (Copepoda, Harpacticoida) from a North Carolina beach, USA. Crustaceana (Leiden) 30(3) :229-240. This article presents the results of analyses on 24 species of inter- stitial crustaceans taken from sandy beaches near Morehead City, North Carolina. This sample includes five free living species of Arenopontia. 444 *Pearse, A. S., H. J. Humm, and G. W. Wharton. 1942. Ecology of sand beaches at Beaufort, North Carolina. Ecological Monographs 12(2) : 136-190. Deals with flora and fauna, plant and animal adaptations, and seasonal progression of Beaufort beaches, including Bogue Bank and Shackleford Bank. 445 Pilkey, 0. H., Jr., 0. H. Pilkey, Sr., and R. Turner. 1975. How to live with an island: a handbook to Bogue Banks, North Carolina. North Carolina Department of Natural and Economic Resources, Raleigh. 91 446 *Riedl, R., and E. A. McMahan. 1974. High energy beaches. Pages 180-251 in_ H. T. Odum, B. J. Copeland, and E. A. McMahan, eds. Coastal ecological systems of the United States. Vol. 1. The Conservation Foundation, Washington, D.C. Describes an ecological system characterized by high energy beaches such as those south of Cape Cod where surging waters are received, filtered, and returned to sea. Examples presented include: Port Aransas, Texas, and Beaufort, North Carolina. 447 *Stancyk, S. E., F. J. S. Maturo, Jr., and R. VJ. Heard, Jr. 1976. Phoronids from the east coast of the United States. Bulletin of Marine Science 26(4):576-584. Collections from Beaufort, North Carolina; Seashore Key and Tampa Bay, Florida; and Sapelo Island, Georgia, confirmed the presence of Phoronis architecta Andrews at Seashore Key and Tampa Bay, and of _P_. mulleri Selys- Longchamps at Beaufort. 448 *Stiven, A. E., and J. T. Hunter. 1976. Growth and mortality of Littorina irrorata Say in three North Carolina marshes. Chesapeake Science 17:168- 176. This article examines the growth and mortality of the subject salt marsh gastropod over a one-year period. Three levels of population density were selected within three salt marshes in the Morehead City region of North Carolina, one of which was on the east end of Bogue Bank. 449 *Thayer, G. W. 1974. Identity and regulation of nutrients limiting phyto- plankton in the shallow estuaries near Beaufort, North Carolina. Oecologia 14:75-92. Inorganic nutrients limiting phytoplankton production in the shallow estuarine system near Beaufort, North Carolina, v/ere identified. 450 ♦Wilson, K. A. 1960. The otter in North Carolina. Proceedings of the South- eastern Association of Game and Fish Commissioners, 13:267-277. The distribution and habitat of the otter population in North Carolina is discussed, and the following areas are included: Cape Fear, Bogue Banks, and Core Banks. Hammock Island Onslow Beach 92 Ashe Island Lee Island Rich Inlet Figure Eight Island Wrightsville Beach Masonboro Island Carolina Beach Island 451 Vallianos, L. 1971. Recent history of erosion at Carolina Beach, North Carolina. Pages 1223-1242 in_ Coastal Engineering, Vol . 2. Proceedings of the 12th Coastal Engineering Conference. ASCE, New York. Paper develops and quantifies cause and effect relations of the severe erosion problem at Carolina Beach in terms of alongshore processes and furnishes basic data on performance of artifical beach fill. Smith Island (Cape Fear) 452 *Bourdeau, P. F. 1959. The maritime live oak forest in North Carolina. Ecology 40:148-152. This article describes the occurrence of live oak in North Carolina. The best preserved stand is said to be on Smith Island. 453 *Boyce, S. G. 1954. The salt spray community. Ecological Monographs 24:29- 68. This paper analyzes some of the specific effects of salt spray as an ecological factor in the coastal dune environment. Areas of study include the Cape Cod area and Cape Fear, North Carolina. 454 Hoyt, J. H., and V. J. Henry, Jr. 1971. Origin of capes and shoals along the southeastern coast of the United States. Geological Society of America Bulletin 82(l):59-66. 93 Discusses origin of Cape Fear, North Carolina; Cape Romain-Santee Point, South Carolina; and lesser capes at Tybee and Little St. Simons Islands, Georgia. All of these coincide with the mouths of rivers or with the discharge areas of rivers. 455 *Wells, B. W., and I. V. Shunk. 1937. Seaside shrubs: wind forms vs. spray forms. Science 85:499. This article contends that "wind-form" shrubs owe their form to sea spray rather than actual wind. The study was conducted on the lower Cape Fear peninsula. 456 *Wells, B. VJ. 1939. A new forest climax: the salt spray climax of Smith Island, North Carolina. Bulletin of the Torrey Botanical Club 66:629-634. This paper explains local dominance of live oak along the U.S. eastern and southern coast and shows that this tree constitutes a new and unre- cognized kind of climax when it reaches high dominance and stabilization. Smith Island, North Carolina is the principal study area. 457 ♦Williams, R. B., M. B. Murdoch, and L. K. Thomas. 1968. Standing crop and importance of zooplankton in a system of shallow estuaries. Chesapeake Science 9:42-51. This paper describes a year-long study of taxonomic composition and standing crop of zooplankton in the area of Core Banks, North Carolina, which includes Cape Lookout, Cape Fear, Cape Hatteras, and Pamlico Sound. Oak Island 458 *Stroud, L. M. 1976. Net primary production of belowground material and carbohydrate patterns of two height forms of Spartina al term" flora in two North Carolina marshes. Ph.D. Thesis. North Carolina State University at Raleigh. 146 pp. (Dissertation Abstracts 37:2645-46-B.) Seasonal patterns, based on monthly samples, in net belowground produc- tion, caloric content, and carbohydrate composition were determined for living roots, living rhizomes, and total living material of short and tall height forms of Spartina alterniflora growing at Ocracoke Island and Oak Island in North Carolina. Holden Beach Island 459 *Abad, G. N. 1973. Sand-filled nylon bag groins. Military Engineer 65(425): 161-162. 94 A project to combat wind and water erosion on the barrier islands of North Carolina, particularly in the Holden Beach area, is described. Hales Beach Island Sunset Beach Island Bird Island 460 *Calder, D. R., C. M. Bearden, B. B. Boothe, and R. W. Tiner. 1977. A recon- naissance of the macrobenthic communities, wetlands, and shellfish re- sources of Little River Inlet, North Carolina and South Carolina. South Carolina Wildlife and Marine Resources Department, Technical Report No. 17. 58 pp. Covers the benthic ecology, marsh vegetation, shellfish resources, hydrog- raphy, and sediments of the Little River Inlet area, including Bird Island North Carolina, and Waites Island, South Carolina. 95 SOUTH CAROLINA 461 Anderson, W. D., Jr., and D. M. Cupka. 1973. Records of the ocean sunfish, Mola mola, from the beaches of South Carolina and adja- cent waters. Chesapeake Science 14(4) :295-298. Available data are presented on all reliable reports known to the authors of strandings, captures, and sightings of the Mola mola species on the beaches, or in the ocean off South Carolina. 462 Caldwell, D. K. , H. Neuhauser, M. C. Caldwell, and H. W. Coolidge. . 1971. Recent records of marine mammals from the coasts of Georgia and South Carolina. Cetology (St. Augustine, Florida) 5:1-12. Marine mammals recorded (through 1970) from the waters and beaches of Georgia and South Carolina since 1964 are listed along with selected measurements and other miscellaneous data. 463 Gunn, C. R. 1972. Stranded tropical seeds and fruits collected from Carolina beaches. Castanea 37(3) : 195-200. Twenty-two tropical stranded seeds and fruits brought to Caro- lina beaches by the Gulf Stream are listed and the collection sites mapped. 464 Oertel , G. F. 1974. Residual currents and sediment exchange between estuary margins and the inner shelf, southeast coast of the United States. Pages 135-143 j_n Relations sedimentaires entre estuaries et plateaux. Comptes rendus du symposium international, 9-14, Jui 1 let 1973. Memoires de l'Institut de Geologie du Bassin d'Aqutaine. Describes barrier island inlets, residual currents, and sedi- ment exchange along the mesotidal coasts of South Carolina and Georgia. 465 Shepard, F. P., and H. R. Wanless. 1971. Cuspate foreland coasts: Cape Hatteras to Cape Romain. Pages 104-131 i_n F. P. Shepard and H. R. Wanless, Our changing coastlines. McGraw-Hill, Mew York. Provides a detailed physical description for the following islands and beach areas: 96 North Carolina: Kitty Hawk area, Cape Hatteras area, Ocracoke Town and vicinity, Cape Lookout area, Cape Fear area. South Carol ina: Myrtle Beach area and the "Carolina Bays," Mur- rells Inlet and Santee Bays, Cape Romain area. 466 *Shepard, F. P., and H. R. Wanless. 1971. Straight barrier coasts: Cape Romain to Florida Keys. Pages 132-161 in F. P. Shepard and H. R. Wanless, Our changing coastlines. McGraw-Hill, Mew York. Provides a detailed physical description for the following islands and beach areas in South Carolina, Georgia, and Florida: South Carolina: Price, Capers, and Dewees Inlets, Charleston Harbor and Fort Sumter, North Edisto River estuary, Fripps Island- St. Phillips Island area. Georgia- Tybee Island, Ossabaw Island, Sapelo and Blackbeard Islands. Florida: Nassau Sound, St. Johns River Outlet, St. Augustine, Mosquito Lagoon area, Cape Kennedy, Palm Beach-Del ray Beach area, Miami Beach-northern Biscayne area, Key Largo-Elliott Key area, Florida Bay-Matecumbe area, Big Pine-Cudjoe Key, Marquesas Keys. 467 Stephen, M. F., B. J. Brown, D. M. Fitzgerald, D. K. Hubbard, and M. 0. Hayes. 1975. Beach erosion inventory of Charleston County, South Carolina: a preliminary report. University of South Caro- lina, Sea Grant Technical Report No. 4. 79 pp. Deals with rates of shoreline change, 1939-1973, which allow classification of the Charleston County coastline into four cate- gories: areas of long term erosion, areas of long term accretion, unstable areas, arjd stable areas. Waites Island 468 *Calder, D. R., C. M. Bearden, B. B. Boothe, and R. W. Tiner. 1977. A reconnaissance of the macrobenthic communities, wetlands, and shellfish resources of Little River Inlet, North Carolina and South Carolina. South Carolina Wildlife and Marine Resources Department, Technical Report No. 17. 58 pp. Covers the benthic ecology, marsh vegetation, shellfish re- sources, hydrography, and sediments of the Little River Inlet area, including Bird Island, North Carolina, and Waites Island, South Carolina. 97 Murrells Inlet 469 *Calder, D. R., C. M. Bearden, and B. B. Booth. 1976. Environmental inventory of a small neutral embayment: Murrells Inlet, South Carolina. South Carolina Wildlife and Marine Resources Depart- ment, Technical Report No. 10. 58 pp. Covers hydrography, sediments, benthic community, marsh vegeta- tion, oyster reefs, and other habitats of Murrells Inlet, includ- ing Garden City Beach and Huntington Beach. 470 *Cupka, D. M. 1972. A survey of the ichthyofauna of the surf zone in South Carolina. South Carolina Wildlife and Marine Resources Department, Technical Report No. 4. 19 pp. Surf zone seining stations were maintained at Garden City Beach, Pawley's Island, Debidue Beach, Bulls Island, Isle of Palms, Edisto Beach, and Hunting Island. During 1971, seining on a monthly basis netted a total of 6,516 fishes, representing 18 fam- ilies, 29 genera, and 39 species. Pawleys Island 471 *Cupka, D. M. 1972. A survey of the ichthyofauna in the surf zone in South Carolina. South Carolina Wildlife and Marine Resources De- partment, Technical Report No. 4. 19 pp. Surf zone seining stations were maintained at Garden City Beach, Pawley's Island, Debidue Beach, Bulls Island, Isle of Palms, Edis- to Beach, and Hunting Island. During 1971, seining on a monthly basis netted a total of 6,516 fishes, representing 18 families, 29 genera, and 39 species. Debidue Beach 472 *Cupka, D. M. 1972. A survey of the ichthyofauna of the surf zone in South Carolina. South Carolina Wildlife and Marine Resources De- partment, Technical Report No. 4. 19 pp. Surf zone seining stations were maintained at Garden City Beach, Pawley's Island, Debidue Beach, Bulls Island, Isle of Palms, Edis- to Beach, and Hunting Island. During 1971, seining on a monthly basis netted a total of 6,516 fishes, representing 18 families, 29 genera, and 39 species. 98 North Island 473 *Andrews, E., D. G. Stephens, and D. J. Colquhoun. 1973. Scouring of buried Pleistocene barrier complexes as a source of channel sand in tidal creeks, North Island quadrangle, South Carolina. Geological Society of America Bulletin 84:3659-3662. Pleistocene deposits submerged in marshes are being removed by scouring of tidal creek currents and being deposited as large bodies of sand at meander bends. The study area is North Inlet, a tidal marsh-barrier island complex on the South Carolina coast. 474 Finley, R. J. 1972. Geologic process investigations of a beach- inlet-channel complex, North Inlet, South Carolina. Maritime Sediments 8(2):65-67. Describes baseline study to formulate 1-year comprehensive environmental survey systems for coastal zones prior to develop- ment at North Inlet, Georgetown County. 475 *Finley, R. J. 1975. Morphologic development and dynamic processes at a barrier island inlet, North Inlet, South Carolina. Ph.D. Thesis. University of South Carolina. 372 pp. (Dissertation Abstracts 36:5473-B) Contains information on wave patterns, beach and inlet morphol- ogy, and tidal hydraulics at North Inlet, South Carolina. These variables are related to seasonal climatic patterns. South Island Cedar Island Murphy Island Cape Island 476 Caldwell, D. K. 1959. The loggerhead turtles of Cape Romain, South Carolina. Bulletin of the Florida State Museum 4(10) :319-348. Details of the loggerhead's nest, eggs, their incubation and hatching are presented. Hazards for the eggs and hatchlings are shown to exist. Size, color and body form variations are demon- strated. 477 Hoyt, J. H., and V. J. Henry, Jr. 1971. Origin of capes and shoals 99 along the southeastern coast of the United States. Geological Society of America Bulletin 82(1) :59-66. Discusses origin of Cape Fear, North Carolina; Cape Romain- Santee Point, South Carolina; and lesser capes at Tybee and Little St. Simons Islands, Georgia. All of these coincide with the mouths of rivers or with the discharge areas of rivers. Raccoon Key Bull Island 478 *Cupka, D. M. 1972. A survey of the ichthyofauna of the surf zone in South Carolina. South Carolina Wildlife and Marine Resources Department, Technical Report No. 4. 19 pp. Surf zone seining stations were maintained at Garden City Beach, Pawley's Island, Debidue Beach, Bulls Island, Isle of Palms, Edisto Beach, and Hunting Island. During 1971, seining on a monthly basis netted a total of 6,516 fishes, representing 18 fam- ilies, 29 genera, and 39 species. 479 *Stalter, R. 1974. A floristic study of South Carolina's barrier' islands. Abstracts of papers presented at the 35th Annual Meet- ing of the Association of Southeastern Biologists. The Associa- tion of Southeastern Biologists Bulletin 21(2) :86. The flora are described for five South Carolina barrier islands: Bull Island, The Isle of Palms, Otter Island, Hunting Island, and Turtle Island. 480 *Stalter, R. 1974. A synecological study of the evergreen maritime forest of three South Carolina barrier islands. Abstracts of papers presented at the 35th Annual Meeting of the Association of Southeastern Biologists. The Association of Southeastern Biolo- gists Bulletin 21(2) :86. Arborescent species are described for three South Carolina bar- rier islands: Bull Island, The Isle of Palms, and Hunting Island. Capers Island Dewees Island 100 Isle of Palms 481 *Cupka, D. M. 1972. A survey of the ichthyofauna of the surf zone in South Carolina. South Carolina Wildlife and Marine Resources Department, Technical Report No. 4. 19 pp. Surf zone seining stations were maintained at Garden City Beach, Pawley's Island, Debidue Beach, Bulls Island, Isle of Palms, Edis- to Beach, and Hunting Island. During 1971, seining on a monthly basis netted a total of 6,516 fishes, representing 18 families, 29 genera, and 39 species. 482 *Stalter, R. 1974. A floristic study of South Carolina's barrier islands. Abstracts of papers presented at the 35th Annual Meet- ing of the Association of Southeastern Biologists. The Associa- tion of Southeastern Biologists Bulletin 21(2) :86. The flora are described for five South Carolina barrier islands: Bull Island, The Isle of Palms, Otter Island, Hunting Island, and Turtle Island. 483 *Stalter, R. 1974. A synecological study of the evergreen maritime forest of three South Carolina barrier islands. Abstracts of papers presented at the 35th Annual Meeting of the Association of Southeastern Biologists. The Association of Southeastern Biolo- gists Bulletin 21(2) :86. Arborescent species are described for three South Carolina bar- rier islands: Bull Island, The Isle of Palms, and Hunting Island. Sullivans Island 484 *Ziegler, J. M. 1959. Origin of the sea islands of the southeastern United States. Geographical Review 49:222-237. Coastal geographic studies of sea islands, off the coasts of Georgia and South Carolina, were carried out in 1953, 1956, 1957, and 1958. Islands discussed include: Tybee, Wassaw, Ossabaw, St, Catherines, Blackbeard, Sapelo, St. Simons, Jekyll, and Cumber- land (in Georgia) and Hunting, Fripp, Hilton Head, and Sullivans (in South Carolina) . Morris Island 101 Folly Island 485 *Anderson, W. D., Jr., J. K. Dias, R. K. Dias, D. M. Cupka, and N. A. Chamberlain. 1977. The macrofauna of the surf zone off Folly Beach, South Carolina. National Marine Fisheries Service, Special Scientific Report-Fisheries No. 704. 23 pp. A resource inventory by biomass, number, and seasonal occur- rence of 17 swimming invertebrates and 41 finfishes collected during 87 seine hauls in the surf from 1969 to 1971 at Folly Beach, South Carolina. Kiawah Island 486 *Environmental Research Center, Inc. 1975. Environmental inventory of Kiawah Island. Prepared for Coastal Shores, Inc. Columbia, South Carol ina. Thirteen chapters on the physical and biological features of Kiawah Island, South Carolina, cover topics on geology, coastal processes, vegetation, vertebrates (loggerhead turtles), inverte- brates, and archeology. 487 *Hayes, M. 0., L. J. Hulmes, and S. J. Wilson. 1974. Importance of tidal inlets in erosional and depositional history of barrier islands. Geological Society of America, Abstracts with Programs, 6(7) :785. This paper examines erosional and depositional patterns on Kia- wah Island, South Carolina, which are controlled by the morphol- ogy and hydrodynamics of affiliated tidal inlets. 488 Nelson, K. 1975. Goodbye, wild Kiawah. National Parks and Conser- vation Magazine 49(3) : 17-23. This feature article describes the natural splendors of the 3,800-acre wilderness of Kiawah Island, South Carolina, which has been sold to Kuwait and is intended for development by that coun- try as a tourist resort. Seabrook Island Devaux Banks 102 Botany Bay Island 489 Hoyt, J. H., and J. R. Hails. 1967. Significance of radio '.arbon dates from Botany Bay Island, South Carolina. South Carolina State Development Board, Geologic Notes, Division of Geology 10(4) :61-65. Explains how and why marine shells occur above normal high tide level. Investigations were made at Botany Bay Island, South Caro- lina; and Cabretta and Sapelo Islands, Georgia. Edisto Island 490 *Cupka, D. M. 1972. A survey of the ichthyofauna of the surf zone in South Carolina. South Carolina Wildlife and Marine Resources Department, Technical Report No. 4. 19 pp. Surf zone seining stations were maintained at Garden City Beach, Pawley's Island, Debidue Beach, Bulls Island, Isle of Palms, Edis- to Beach, and Hunting Island. During 1971, seining on a monthly basis netted a total of 6,516 fishes, representing 18 families, 29 genera, and 39 species. Pine Island Otter Island 491 *Stalter, R. 1974. A floristic study of South Carolina's barrier islands. Abstracts of papers presented at the 35th Annual Meet- ing of the Association of Southeastern Biologists. The Associa- tion of Southeastern Biologists Bulletin 21(2) :86. The flora are described for five South Carolina barrier islands: Bull Island, The Isle of Palms, Otter Island, Hunting Island, and Turtle Island. Hunting Island 492 *Cupka, D. M. 1972. A survey of the ichthyofauna of the surf zone in South Carolina. South Carolina Wildlife and Marine Resources De- partment, Technical Report No. 4. 19 pp. Surf zone seining stations were maintained at Garden City Beach, Pawley's Island, Debidue Beach, Bulls Island, Isle of Palms, Edis- 103 to Beach, and Hunting Island. During 1971, seining on a monthly basis netted a total of 6,516 fishes, representing 18 families, 29 genera, and 39 species. 493 *Shealy, M. H., B. B. Boothe, and C. M. Bearden. 1975. A survey of the benthic macrofauna of Fripp Inlet and Hunting Island, South Carolina, prior to beach nourishment. South Carolina Wildlife and Marine Resources Department, Technical Report No. 7. 30 pp. Covers the benthic macrofauna and hydrography of the Fripp In- let area, including Hunting Island and Fripp Island. 494 *Stalter, R. 1974.' A floristic study of South Carolina's barrier islands. Abstracts of papers presented at the 35th Annual Meet- ing of the Association of Southeastern Biologists. The Associa- tion of Southeastern Biologists Bulletin 21(2) :86 . The flora are described for five South Carolina barrier islands: Bull Island, the Isle of Palms, Otter Island, Hunting Island, and Turtle Island. 495 *Stalter, R. 1974. A synecological study of the evergreen maritime forest of three South Carolina barrier islands. Abstracts of papers presented at the 35th Annual Meeting of the Association of Southeastern Biologists. The Association of Southeastern Biolo- gists Bulletin 21(2) :86. Arborescent species are described for three South Carolina bar- rier islands: Bull Island, The Isle of Palms, and Hunting Island. 496 *Ziegler, J. M. 1959. Origin of the sea islands of the southeastern United States. Geographical Review 49:222-237. Coastal geographic studies of sea islands, off the coasts of Georgia and South Carolina, were carried out in 1953, 1956, 1957, and 1958. Islands discussed include: Tybee, Wassaw, Ossabaw, St. Catherines, Blackbeard, Sapelo, St. Simons, Jekyll, and Cum- berland (in Geoegia) and Hunting, Fripp, Hilton Head, and Sulli- vans (in South Carolina). Fripps Island 497 *Shealy, M. H., B. B. Boothe, and C. M. Bearden. 1975. A survey of the benthic macrofauna of Fripp Inlet and Hunting Island, South Carolina, prior to beach nourishment. South Carolina Wildlife and Marine Resources Department, Technical Report No. 7. 30 pp. 104 Covers the benthic macrofauna and hydrography of the Fripp In- let area, including Hunting Island and Fripp Island. 498 *Ziegler, J. M. 1959. Origin of the sea islands of the southeastern United States, Geographical Review 49:222-237. Coastal geographic studies of sea islands, off the coasts of Georgia and South Carolina that were carried out in 1953, 1956, 1957, and 1958. Islands discussed include: Tybee, Wassaw, Ossa- baw, St. Catherines, Blackbeard, Sapelo, St. Simons, Jekyll, and Cumberland (in Georgia) and Hunting, Fripp, Hilton Head, and Sul- livans (in South Carolina). Pritchard Island Capers Island St. Phillips Island Bay Point Island Hilton Head Island 499 *Ziegler, J. M. 1959. Origin of the sea islands of the southeastern United States. Geographical Review 49:222-237. Coastal geographic studies of sea islands, off the coasts of Georgia and South Carolina., were carried out in 1953, 1956, 1957, and 1958. Islands discussed include: Tybee, Wassaw, Ossabaw, St. Catherines, Blackbeard, Sapelo, St. Simons, Jekyll, and Cum- berland (in Georgia) and Hunting, Fripp, Hilton Head, and Sulli- vans (in South Carolina). Daufuskie Island Turtle Island 500 *Stalter, R. 1973. The flora of Turtle Island, Jasper County, South Carolina. Castanea 38( 1) : 35-37 . Plants in 36 families (monocots, dicots, pteridophytes , and gym- nosperms), including 30 new county records, are listed for Turtle Island. 501 *Stalter, R. 1974. A floristic study of South Carolina's barrier 105 islands. Abstracts of papers presented at the 35th Annual Meet- ing of the Association of Southeastern Biologists. The Associa- tion of Southeastern Biologists Bulletin 21(2) :86. The flora are described for five South Carolina barrier islands: Bull Island, The Isle of Palms, Otter Island, Hunting Island, and Turtle Island. Jones Island 106 GEORGIA 502 Caldwell, D. K. , H. Neuhauser, M. C. Caldwell, and H. W. Coolidge. 1971. Recent records of marine mammals from the coasts of Geor- gia and South Carolina. Cetology (St. Augustine, Florida) 5:1-12. Marine mammals recorded (through 1970) from the waters and beaches of Georgia and South Carolina since 1964 are listed along with selected measurements and other miscellaneous data. 503 *Dahlberg, M. D. 1975. Guide to coastal fishes of Georgia and near- by states. University of Georgia Press, Athens. 186 pp. A comprehensive guide to Georgia's coastal fishes, with special emphasis on nearshore, estuarine, and marsh habitats. Special data is provided for the Sapelo Island-St. Catherines Island area. 186 pp. 504 *Dean, L. F. 1975. A resource planning process for Georgia's Goast. Pages 1-7 vn_ The value and vulnerability of coastal resources. Georgia Department of Natural Resources, Atlanta, x + 321 pp. Discusses management programs for the Georgia coastal zone in keeping with the conclusions presented in other papers in the same report. 505, 506 Frey, R. W. , and T. V. Mayou. 1971. Decapod burrows in Holocene barrier island beaches and washover fans, Georgia. Senckenber- giana Maritime 3:53-77. Presents data on decapod burrows in Georgia beaches, which ex- hibit conspicuous zonation. Included are data on burrows of Cal- lianassa major (Say), the ghost crab Ocypode quadrata (Fabricius) , and the fiddler crab Uca pugilator (Bosc). 507 *Hails, J. R., and J. H. Hoyt. 1968. Barrier development on sub- merged coasts: problems of sea-level changes from a study of the Atlantic coastal plain of Georgia, U.S.A. and parts of the east Australian coast. Pages 24-55 j_n K. Kaiser, ed. Kustengeomor- phologie. Gebruder Borntraeger, Berlin. This paper discusses the origin of barriers along parts of the 107 East Australian coast and the Atlantic coastal plain of Georgia, U.S.A., in relation to barrier progradation and modification. The interplay of coastal configuration, offshore profile, sedi- ment supply, and wave and current energies is discussed. 508 Hails, J. R. , and J. H. Hoyt. 1969. An appraisal of the evolution of the lower Atlantic coastal plain of Georgia, U.S.A. Trans- actions of the Institute of British Geographers 46:47-61. This article indicates that Quaternary marine and transitional sediments of the lower Atlantic coastal plain parallel the modern coast in an area about 90 km wide. 509 Hails, J. R., and J. H. Hoyt. 1972. The nature and occurrence of heavy minerals in Pleistocene and Holocene sediments of the Lower Georgia coastal plain. Journal of Sedimentary Petrology 42(3): 646-666. Deals with correlation of heavy minerals in six Pleistocene barrier island coastlines to origin in the Georgia Piedmont. 510 *Howett, C. M. 1975. Coastal Georgia's cultural resources. Pages 182-199 Jj2_ The value and vulnerability of coastal resources. Georgia Department of Natural Resources, Atlanta, x + 321 pp. In light of coastal zone management requirements, major historic and archeological sites of natural or cultural significance to Georgia were classified in the first category of resources. 511 *Hoyt, J. H. 1967. Intercontinental correlation of late Pleistocene sea levels. Nature 215:612-614. Compares the late Pleistocene shorelines of coastal Georgia with those of southern South-West Africa. 512 Johnson, A. S., H. 0. Hillestad, S. A. Fanning, and G. Shanholtzer. 1975. The marshes. Pages 223-256 vn_ The value and vulnerability of coastal resources. Georgia Department of Natural Resources, Atlanta, x + 321 pp. Discusses the marshes lying behind Georgia's barrier islands. 513 *Johnson, A. S., H. 0. Hillestad, S. F. Shanholtzer, and G. F. Shan- holtzer. 1974. An ecological survey of the coastal region of Georgia. National Park Service, Scientific Monograph Series No. 3. 233 pp. 108 The ecological characteristics of Georgia's coastal region are described, and specific chapters focus on the fauna, vegetation, and productivity of the islands, marshes, and open marine and estuarine waters. Special emphasis is placed on Tybee Island, Wassaw Island, Ossabaw Island, St. Catherines Island, Blackbeard Island, Sapelo Island, Little St. Simons Island, St. Simons Island, Jekyll Island, and Cumberland Island. 514 *Lyberger, R. D. 1975. Vegetation information for coastal Georgia. Pages 213-222 j_n_ The value and vulnerability of coastal resources. Georgia Department of Natural Resources, Atlanta, x + 321 pp. Classifies and maps the vegetation of the whole coastal region of Georgia, including barrier islands, as part of the statewide Georgia Resource Assessment Program. 515 *Mahood, R. K. , C. D. Harris, J. L. Music, Jr., and B. A. Palmer. 1974. Survey of the fisheries resources in Georgia's estuarine and inshore ocean waters. Georgia Department of Natural Resources, Contribution Series No. 22 (Part I. Southern section, St. Andrews Sound and St. Simons Sound Estuaries) : 104 ; No. 23 (Part II. Central Section, Doboy Sound and Sapelo Sound Estuaries) :999; No. 24 (Part III. Northern section, Ossabaw Sound Estuaries) : 100 ; No. 25 (Part IV. Coastal Georgia - southern, central and northern section) :201. From 1970 to 1973, data were obtained on the distribution, sea- sonal abundance, size composition, and certain aspects of the life histories of fishes, panaeid shrimps, and blue crabs, inhabiting Georgia's estuarine and inshore waters. 516 *McCollum, J. L. 1975. An overview of coastal Georgia wildlife. Pages 171-182 i_n The value and vulnerability of coastal resources. Georgia Department of Natural Resources, Atlanta, x + 321 pp. Available printed sources of i formation are utilized to provide a general overview of coastal widlife, including the wildlife of barrier islands. 517 *0dum, H. T., B. J. Copeland, and E. A. McMahan. 1974. General rec- ommendations. Pages 132-151 in_ Coastal ecological systems of the United States. Vol. 1. The Conservation Foundation, Washinciton, D.C. Chapter contains definition of needs associated with coastal ecological systems. Especially relevant to barrier island ecol- ogy are a discussion of a zoned-sec ir plan for the multiple de- 09 velopment of marine bays and a zoning example delineated along the Georgia coast. 518 *0ertel , G. F. 1972. Sediment transport of estuary entrance shoals and the formation of swash platforms. Journal of Sedimentary Petrology 42:858-863. Shoals seaward of Georgia estuary entrances are formed by the processes of wave refraction and dynamic diversion. 519 Oertel , G. F. 1974. Residual currents and sediment exchange be- tween estuary margins and the inner shelf, southeast coast of the United States. Pages 135-143 jn_ Relations sedimentaires entre estuaries et plateaux. Comptes rendus du symposium international, 9-14, Jui 1 let 1973. Memoires de l'lnstitut de Geologie du Bassin d'Aqutaine. Describes barrier island inlets, residual currents, and sedi- ment exchange along the mesotidal coasts of South Carolina and Georgia. 520 Oertel, G. F. 1975. The value and vulnerability of coastal beaches, sand dunes, and offshore sand bars. Pages 9-33 i_n The value and vulnerability of coastal resources. Georgia Department of Natural Resources, Atlanta, x + 321 pp. Stresses the value of the dune-beach-bar systems of Georgia from a sedimentologic point of view. 521 Richardson, J. I., and J. S. Worthington. 1975. Terrestrial ecology of the Georgia barrier islands. Pages 35-111 rn The value and vulnerability of coastal resources. Georgia Department of Natural Resources, Atlanta, x + 321 pp. The terrestrial ecology of Georgia barrier islands, the physi- cal environment that shapes the island community, and the strate- gies of survival employed by its members are summarized. 522 Sciple, G. W. 1963. Sandwich terns (Thalasseus sandvicensis acu- flavidus) present on outer coastal islands and offshore (Georqia). The Oriole 28( 1) : 11-12. This article describes the species and individuals present on the Georgia coast (on the outer barrier islands or offshore) during the breeding season of 1962 and indicates that not one of the birds sighted was a breeding individual. 110 523 *Shepard, F. P., and H. R. Wanless. 1971. Straight barrier coasts: Cape Romain to Florida Keys. Pages 132-161 j_n_ F. P. Shepard and H. R. Wanless, Our changing coastlines. McGraw-Hill, New York. Provides a detailed physical description for the following islands and beach areas: South Carolina: Price, Capers, and Dewees Inlets, Charleston Harbor and Fort Sumter, North Edisto River estuary, Fripps Island- St. Phi 1 1 ips Island area. Georgia: Tybee Island, Ossabaw Island, Sapelo and Blackbeard Islands. Florida: Nassau Sound, St. Johns River Outlet, St. Augustine, Mosquito Lagoon area, Cape Kennedy, Palm Beach-Delray Beach area, Miami Beach-northern Biscayne area, Key Largo-Elliott Key area, Florida Bay-Matecumbe area, Big Pine-Cudjoe Key, Marquesas Keys. Tybee Island 524 Georgia Department of Natural Resources. 1974. Tri-state conference report: methods for beach and sand dune protection, March 31- April 2, 1974, Jekyll Island, Georgia. Atlanta. 48 pp. Discusses importance of natural beach and sand dune system, typical features of a Georgia barrier island, role of dunes in shoreline stability, and related items from conference of repre- sentatives from Georgia and North and South Carolina. References made to Tybee Island and Savannah Beach, Georgia. 525 Hoyt, J. H., and V. J. Henry, Jr. 1971. Origin of capes and shoals along the southeastern coast of the United States. Geological Society of America Bulletin 82(1)59-66. Discusses origin of Cape Fear, North Carolina; Cape Romain-Santee Point, South Carolina; and lesser capes at Tybee and Little St. Simons Island, Georgia. All of these coincide with the mouths of rivers or withTthe discharge areas of rivers. 526 ♦Johnson, A. S., H. 0. Hillestad, S. F. Shanholtzer, and G. F. Shan- holtzer. 1974. An ecological survey of the coastal region of Georgia. National Park Service, Scientific Monograph Series No. 3. 233 pp. The ecological characteristics of Georgia's coastal region are described, and specific chapters focus on the fauna, vegetation, 111 productivity of the islands, marshes, and open marine and estua- rine waters. Special emphasis is placed on Tybee Island, Wassaw Island, Ossabaw Island, St. Catherines Island, Blackbeard Island, Sapelo Island, Little St. Simons Island, St. Simons Island, Jekyll Island, and Cumberland Island. 527 Oertel , G. F. 1973. Sedimentary framework of the eroding beach- shoreface system, adjacent to Tybee Island, Georgia. University of Georgia, Georgia Marine Science Center, Savannah, Technical Report Series 73-5. 30 pp. The report presents fundamental data on the sediment budget of the Savannah Beach area and the results of detailed topographic surveys of the shoreface. 528 Oertel, G. F. 1974. Patterns of sediment dispersion on the shore- line of an eroding barrier island. University of Georgia, Georgia Marine Science Center, Savannah, Sea Grant Technical Report Series No. 74-2. 90 pp. Deals with the sediment budget of the shoreline at Tybee Island, which illustrates relationships between sediment transport pat- terns and patterns of erosion. 529 *0ertel , G. F. 1974. Patterns of water flow and sediment dispersion adjacent to an eroding barrier island. University of Georgia, Georgia Marine Science Center, Savannah, Technical Report Series No. 73-9. 36 pp. A study of hydrography and sediment transport adjacent to Tybee Island, Georgia, illustrating the role of tidal currents and re- sidual currents in producing sediment transport patterns. 530 *0ertel , G. F. , and C. F. Chamberlain. 1975. Differential rates of shoreline advance and retreat at coastal barriers of Chatham and Liberty counties, Georgia. Transactions of the Gulf Coast Associ- ation of Geological Societies 25:383-390. Historical patterns and rates of erosion and accretion were re- constructed in order to anticipate future erosional and deposi- tional trends on barrier islands between the Savannah River and the entrance to Sapelo Sound, Georgia. Islands discussed include Tybee, Wassaw, Ossabaw, St. Catherines, and Cabbage. 531 U.S. Army Corps of Engineers. 1973. Tybee Island, Georgia, beach erosion control project (final environmental impact statement). Savannah Engineer District, Savannah, Georgia. 70 pp. 112 Describes beach erosion control project at Tybee Island, Geor- gia, involving restoration and periodic nourishment of 13,200 ft of ocean beach and construction of rubble stone terminal groin extending 8,000 ft seaward. 532 *Ziegler, J. M. 1959. Origin of the sea islands of the southeastern United States. Geographical Review 49:222-237. Coastal geographic studies of sea islands, off the coasts of Georgia and South Carolina, were carried out in 1953, 1956, 1957, and 1958. Islands discussed include Tybee, Wassaw, Ossabaw, St. Catherines, Blackbeard, Sapelo, St. Simons, Jekyll, and Cumber- land (in Georgia) and Hunting, Fripp, Hilton Head, and Sullivans (in South Carolina) . Little Tybee Island Williamson Island Wassaw Island 533 Austin, 0. L., Jr. 1965. Bluejays on Wassaw Island. The Oriole 30(3):94. This article reviews records of the frequency of blue jay visits to Wassaw Island, Georgia. 534 *Johnson, A. S., H. 0. Hillestad, S. F. Shanholtzer, and G. F. Shan- holtzer. 1974. An ecological survey of the coastal region of Georgia. National Park Service, Scientific Monograph Series No. 3. 233 pp. The ecological characteristics of Georgia's coastal region are described, and specific chapters focus on the fauna, vegetation, productivity of the islands, marshes, and open marine and estua- rine waters. Special emphasis is placed on Tybee Island, Wassaw Island, Ossabaw Island, St. Catherines Island, Blackbeard Island, Sapelo Island, Little St. Simons Island, St. Simons Island, Jekyll Island, and Cumberland Island. 535 Oertel , G. F. 1977. Wassaw Island erosion study, part II: charac- teristics of water flow at the north end of the Wassaw barrier island complex. University of Georgia, Georgia Marine Science Center, Savannah, Technical Report Series No. 77-2. 113 This report contains an overview of water currents that may .af- fect the sediment carpet of Wassaw Sound, Georgia. 536 *0ertel , G. F. , and C. F. Chamberlain. 1975. Differential rates of shoreline advance and retreat at coastal barriers of Chatham and Liberty counties, Georgia. Transactions of the Gulf Coast Associ- ation of Geological Societies 25:383-390. Historical patterns and rates of erosion and accretion were re- constructed to anticipate future erosional and depositional trends on barrier islands between the Savannah River and the entrance to Sapelo Sound, Georgia. Islands discussed include Tybee, Wassaw, Ossabaw, St. Catherines, and Cabbage. 537 Oertel , G. F. , and J. L. Harding. 1977. Sand stabilization on the dunes, beach, and shorefare of a historically eroding barrier island: Wassaw Island erosion study, Part III. University of Georgia, Georgia Marine Science Center, Savannah, Sea Grant Tech- nical Report Series No. 77-3. 47 pp. Deals with erosion control and shore protection measures em- ployed on Wassaw Island, Georgia. 538 *Ziegler, J. M. 1959. Origin of the sea islands of the southeastern United States, Geographical Review 49:222-237. Coastal geographic studies of sea islands, off the coasts of Georgia and South Carolina, were carried out in 1953, 1956, 1957, and 1958. Islands discussed include Tybee, Wassaw, Ossabaw, St. Catherines, Blackbeard, Sapelo, St. Simons, Jekyll, and Cumber- land (in Georgia) and Hunting, Fripp, Hilton Head, and Sullivans (in South Carolina). Ossabaw Island 539 *Johnson, A. S., H. 0. Hillestad, S. F. Shanholtzer, and G. F. Shan- holtzer. 1974. An ecological survey of the coastal region of Georgia. National Park Service, Scientific Monograph Series No. 3. 233 pp. The ecological characteristics of Georgia's coastal region are described, and specific chapters focus on the fauna, vegetation, productivity of the islands, marshes, and open marine and estua- rine waters. Special emphasis is placed on Tybee Island, Wassaw Island, Ossabaw Island, St. Catherines Island, Sapelo Island, Little St. Simons Island, St. Simons Island, Jekyll Island, and Cumberland Island. 114 540 *0ertel , G. F., and C. F. Chamberlain. 1975. Differential rates of shoreline advance and retreat at coastal barriers of Chatham and Liberty counties, Georgia. Transactions of the Gulf Coast Associ- ation of Geological Societies 25:383-390. Historical patterns and rates of erosion and accretion were re- constructed to anticipate future erosional and depositional trends on barrier islands between the Savannah River and the entrance to Sapelo Sound, Georgia. Islands discussed include Tybee, Wassaw, Ossabaw, St. Catherines, and Cabbage. 541 *Vanstory, B. 1956. Georgia's land of the Golden Isles. The Uni- versity of Georgia Press, Athens. 202 pp. Provides brief description and extensive historical information on Ossabaw, St. Catherines, Sapelo, St. Simons, Sea, Jekyll, and Cumberland Islands, Georgia. 542 *Ziegler, J. M. 1959. Origin of the sea islands of the southeastern United States. Geographical Review 49:222-237. Coastal geographic studies of sea islands, off the coasts of Georgia and South Carolina, were carried out in 1953, 1956, 1957, and 1958. Islands discussed include Tybee, Wassaw, Ossabaw, St. Catherines, Blackbeard, Sapelo, St. Simons, Jekyll, and Cumber- land (in Georgia) and Hunting, Fripp, Hilton Head, and Sullivans (in South Carol ina) . St. Catherines Island 543 *Dahlberg, M. D. 1975. Guide to coastal fishes of Georgia and near- by states. University of Georgia Press, Athens. 186 pp. A comprehensive guide to Georgia's coastal fishes, with special emphasis on nearshore, estuarine, and marsh habitats. Special data is provided for the Sapelo-St. Catherines Island area. 544 *Dahlberg, M. D. , and E. P. Odum. 1970. Annual cycles of species occurrence, abundance, and diversity in Georgia estuarine fish populations. American Midland Naturalist 83(2) :382-392. This paper presents the results of a sampling procedure in the estuarine system of Sapelo and St. Catherine's Sound, Georgia, in which 70 fish species and 37 families were detected. 115 545 *Johnson, A. S., H. 0. Hillestad, S. F. Shanholtzer, and G. F. Shan- holtzer. 1974. An ecological survey of the coastal region of Georgia. National Park Service, Scientific Monograph Series Mo. 3. 233 pp. The ecological characteristics of the coastal region of Georgia are described, and specific chapters focus on the fauna, vegeta- tion, productivity of the islands, marshes, and open marine and estuarine waters. Special emphasis is placed on Tybee Island, Wassaw Island, Ossabaw Island, St. Catherines Island, Blackbeard Island, Sapelo Island, Little St. Simons Island, St. Simons Island, Jekyll Island, and Cumberland Island. 546 Oertel , G. F. 1973. Observations of net shoreline positions and approximations of barrier island sediment budgets. University of Georgia, Georgia Marine Science Center, Savannah, Technical Re- port Series No. 73-2. 23 pp. Discusses shoreline movement and sediment budgets of Georgia barrier islands based on a 30-year history. St. Catherines Island and Sapelo Island are among those considered. 547 *0ertel , G. F. 1975. Post Pleistocene island and inlet adjustment alonq the Georgia coast. Journal of Sedimentary Petrology 45:150-159. Describes the constriction of Georgia's tidal inlets by the intrusion of Holocene beach-ridge development. Sapelo Sound, St. Andrew Sound, and St. Catherine Sound are discussed. 548 *0ertel , G. F. , and C. F. Chamberlain. 1975. Differential rates of shoreline advance and retreat at coastal barriers of Chatham and Liberty counties, Georgia. Transactions of the Gulf Coast Associ- ation of Geological Societies 25:383-390. Historical patterns and rates of erosion and accretion were re- constructed in order to anticipate future erosional and deposi- tional trends on barrier islands between the Savannah River and the entrance to Sapelo Sound, Georgia. Islands discussed include Tybee, Wassaw, Ossabaw, St. Catherines, and Cabbage. 549 Vanstory, B. 1956. Georgia's land of the Golden Isles. The Univer- sity of Georgia Press, Athens. 202 pp. Provides brief description and extensive historical information on Ossabaw, St. Catherines, Sapelo, St. Simons, Sea, Jekyll, and Cumberland Islands, Georgia. 116 550 *Ziegler, J. M. 1959. Origin of the sea islands of the southeastern United States. Geographical Review 49:222-237. Coastal geographic studies of sea islands, off the coasts of Georgia and South Carolina, were carried out in 1953, 1956, 1957, and 1958. Islands discussed include Tybee, Wassaw, Ossabaw, St. Catherines, Blackbeard, Sapelo, St. Simons, Jekyll, and Cumber- land (in Georgia) and Hunting, Fripp, Hilton Head, and Sullivans (in South Carolina) . Blackbeard Island 551 Fincher, G. T. 1975. Dung beetles of Blackbeard Island (Coleoptera: Scarabaeidae). Coleopt Bulletin 29(4) :319-320. This article presents data on 19 species of dung beetles that were captured on Blackbeard Island, Georgia, using feces (swine)- baited traps. 552 *Frey, R. W. , and J. D. Howard. 1969. A profile of biogenic sedi- mentary structures in a Holocene barrier-island-salt marsh com- plex, Georqia. Transactions of Gulf Coast Association of Geo- logical Societies 19:427-444. Biogenic structures that are characteristic of various Holocene beach, marsh, and tidal stream facies are the subject of this re- port. It focuses chiefly on Sapelo Island, Georgia, a barrier island that is representative of the "sea island" section of the Georgia coast. The article includes data on various kinds of lekensspuren, a trace-making organism that inhabits the area. Data are also included for Blackbeard Island, Cabretta Island, and Nannygoat Beach. 553 *Johnson, A. S., H. 0. Hillestad, S. F. Shanholtzer, and G. F. Shan- holtzer. 1974. An ecological survey of the coastal region of Georgia. National Park Service, Scientific Monograph Series No. 3. 233 pp. The ecological characteristics of Georgia's coastal region are described, and specific chapters focus on the fauna, vegetation, and productivity of the islands, marshes, open marine and estua- rine waters. Special emphasis is placed on Tybee Island, Wassaw Island, Ossabaw Island, St. Catherines Island, Blackbeard Island, Sapelo Island, Little St. Simons Island, St. Simons Island, Jekyll Island, and Cumberland Island. 117 554 *Kjerfve, B. H. 1970. Sapelo Island. Oceans 3(2) :7-17. This article discusses the cycle of marine life on Sapelo Is- land, off the Georgia coast, and includes some data on Cabretta Island, Nannygoat Island, Blackbeard Island, and St. Simons Is- land. 555 *Ziegler, J. M. 1959. Origin of the sea islands of the southeastern United States. Geographical Review 49:222-237. Coastal geographic studies of sea islands, off the coasts of Georgia and South Carolina, were carried out in 1953, 1956, 1957, and 1958. Islands discussed include Tybee, Uassaw, Ossabaw, St. Catherines, Blackbeard, Sapelo, St. Simons, Jekyll , and Cumber- land (in Georgia) and Hunting, Fripp, Hilton Head, and Sullivans (in South Carol ina) . Sapelo Island 556 Bahr, L. M., Jr. 1976. Energetic aspects of the intertidal oyster reef community at Sapelo Island, Georgia. Ecology 57(1) : 121-131 . This article discusses the total daily oxygen consumption rate of the intertidal oyster reef community at Sapelo Island, Georgia. 557 *Burkholder, P. R. 1956. Studies on the nutritive value of Spartina grass growing in the marsh areas of coastal Georgia. Bulletin of the Torrey Botanical Club 83:327-334. This paper discusses the results of a detailed study of four different samples of mature marsh grass taken from different loca- tions along the river banks and on high marsh in the area of Sapelo Island, Georgia, in August 1955. 558 *Chapman, R. L. 1971. The macroscopic marine algae of Sapelo Island and other sites on the Georgia coast. Bulletin of the Georgia Academy of Science 29:77-89. A list of 69 taxa based on collections from Sapelo Island, off- shore sites, and other localities along the Georgia coast is pre- sented. 559 Christian, R. R. , K. Bancroft, and W. J. Wiebe. 1975. Distribution of microbial adenosine triphosphate in salt marsh sediments at Sapelo Island, Georgia. Soil Science 119(1) :89-97. 118 This study concerned the vertical distribution of microbial ATP at two sites in the salt marsh at Saeplo Island, each site repre- senting differences in productivity of the marsh grass Spartina alterni flora. 560 *Cooke, C. W. 1968. Barrier island formation: discussion. Geologi- cal Society of America Bulletin 79(7) :945-9^6. This article describes the various ways in which a barrier is- land may be produced. Areas discussed include Cape Hatteras, Sapelo Island, Padre Island, and the Florida Keys. 561 *Cooper, A. W. 1974. Salt marshes. Pages 55-98 in_ H. T. Odum, B. J. Copeland, and E. A. McMahan, eds. Coastal ecological sys- tems of the United States, Vol. 2. The Conservation Foundation, Washington, D.C. This chapter presents a brief general discussion of salt marshes, vegetation, and energy flow. The salt marshes at Sapelo Island, Georgia, are the most intensively studied marshes in North Ameri- ca and are used as a case history model for other North American salt marshes. 562 *Dahlberg, M. D. 1975. Guide to coastal fishes of Georgia and nearby states. University of Georgia Press, Athens. 186 pp. A comprehensive guide to Georgia's coastal fishes, with special emphasis on nearshore, estuarine, and marsh habitats. Special data is provided for the Sapelo-St. Catherines Island area. 563 Dahlberg, M. D. , and J. C. Conyers. 1972. An ecological study of Gibiosoma bosci and G_. ginsburgi (Pisces, Gobilidae) on the Geor- gia coast. Fishery Bulletin 71(1) : 279-287. The ecology of two species of "scaleless" gobies, Gobiosoma bosci and G_. ginsburgi , from estuarine and beach waters around Sapelo Island, Georgia, is compared. 564 *Dahlberg, M. D. , and E. P. Odum. 1970. Annual cycles of species occurrence, abundance, and diversity in Georgia estuarine fish populations. American Midland Naturalist 83(2) :382-392. This paper presents the results of a sampling procedure in the estuarine system of Sapelo and St. Catherine's Sound, Georgia, in which 70 fish species and 37 families were detected. 119 565 Darby, D. G. 1965. Ecology and taxonomy of Ostracoda in the vicinity of Sapelo Island, Georgia. Four Reports of Ostracod Investigations, National Science Foundation Project GB-26, Report Mo. 2. 70 pp. Thirteen new species are described. 566 *Davenport, L. B. 1966. Blue jays recorded on Sapelo Island, Georgia. The Oriole 31:48-49. This article indicates that blue jays were seen and heard on Sapelo Island, Georgia during the annual Christmas count in 1966. Before 1966, blue jays had not been recorded on the island. 567 *De la Cruz, A. A. 1965. A study of particulate organic detritus in a Georgia salt marsh-estuarine ecosystem. Ph.D. Thesis. Univer- sity of Georgia, Athens. 141 pp. (Dissertation Abstracts 27:363-B.) Discusses organic detritus as the chief link between primary and secondary productivity in the Sapelo Island ecosystem. 568 *De la Cruz, A. A., and H. Kawanabe. 1967. The population and food habits of fish in a small estuarine pond. Natural and Applied Science Bulletin 20:473-477. The population of two species of fish in a small tidal estuarine pond at Sapelo Island was estimated by means of the marking and recapture method. Results were compared with figures obtained when actual count of the total fish population was made. 569 Dorjes, J. 1972. Georgia coastal region, Sapelo Island, U.S.A.: sedimentology and biology. VII. Distribution and zonation of macrobenthic animals. Senckenbergiana Maritima 4:183-216. Macrobenthos were sampled along three transects off the coast of Sapelo Island, Georgia, to obtain data on animal abundance, den- sity, distribution, and horizontal zonation in relation to environ- mental factors; e.g., the distribution of sediment types, geo- morphologic features, and hydrographic conditions. 570 *Frey, R. W. , and J. D. Howard. 1969. A profile of biogenic sedimen- tary structures in a Holocene barrier-island-salt marsh complex, Georgia. Transactions of Gulf Coast Association of Geological Societies 19:427-444. 120 Biogenic structures that are characteristic of various Holocene beach, marsh, and tidal stream facies are the subject of this re- port. It focuses chiefly on Sapelo Island, Georgia, a barrier is- land that is representative of the "sea island" section of the Georgia coast. The article includes data on various kinds of lekensspuren, a trace-making organism that inhabits the area. Data are also included for Blackbeard Island, Cabretta Island, and Man- nygoat Beach. 571 Gadow, S. 1972. Georgia coastal region, Sapelo Island, U.S.A.: sedimentology and biology. II. Provenance and distribution of heavy minerals. Senckenbergiana Maritima 4:15-45. Sediments collected on the Georgia continental shelf and along the Savannah, Atlamaha and Ogeechee rivers are analyzed using mechanical and petrographic methods. 572 Greaves, J. A. 1966. Some aspects of modern barrier beach develop- ment, Sapelo Island, Georgia, U.S.A. Pages 40-63 in_ J. H. Hoyt, ed. Pleistocene and Holocene sediments, Sapelo Island, Georgia, and vicinity. Geological Society of America Southwestern Section, Guidebook for Field Trip No. 1, April 11-13, 1966. Beach profiles, wave parameters, current data, and meteorologi- cal data were measured over a fixed period. 573 *Haines, E. B. 1976. Stable carbon isotope ratios in the biota, soils and tidal water of a Georgia salt marsh. Estuarine and Coastal Marine Science 4:609-616. The stable carbon isotope composition of the biota, soils and tidal water particulate material was surveyed in a salt marsh near Sapelo Island, Georgia. 574 Hertweck, G. 1972. Georgia coastal region, Sapelo Island, U.S.A.: sedimentology and biology. V. Distribution and environmental significance of Lebensspuren and in situ skeletal remains. Senckenbergiana Maritima 4:125-167. Ichthyological investigations were carried out in the shallow, nearshore marine environment near Sapelo Island, Georgia. Box cores from 61 offshore sampling stations were investigated. 575 Hoese, H. D. 1973. A trawl study of nearshore fishes and inverte- brates of the Georgia coast. University of Texas, Contributions in Marine Science 17:63-98. 121 This article describes a trawl study of fishes that was con- ducted for 12-month period in 1955-1956 on the central Georgia in- shore continental shelf and adjacent Doboy Sound. 576 Howard, J. D. 1969. Radiographic examination of variations in bar- rier island facies, Sapelo Island, Georgia. Transactions of Gulf Coast Association of Geological Societies. 19:217-219. This article shows how differences in texture and in physical and biogenic sedimentary structures affect the lateral variations that characterize the facies of present-day barrier islands. 577 Howard, J. D., and J. Doerjes. 1972. Animal -sediment relationships in two beach-related tidal flats, Sapelo Island, Georgia. Jour- nal of Sedimentary Petrology 42(3) :608-623. Discusses the interaction of physical and biological factors in controlling the sedimentary record of two similar tidal flats on Sapelo Island, Georgia. 578 Howard, J. D. , R. W. Frey, and H. E. Reineck. 1972. Georgia coastal region, Sapelo Island, U.S.A.: sedimentology and biology. I. Introduction. Senckenbergiana Maritima 4:3-14. The article introduces six papers and a concluding paper relating to a study of the geological characteristics of the nearshore shelf of a low-energy, tide-dominated strand line on Sapelo Island, which is part of a complex of Pleistocene and Holocene barrier island facies formed during the last major regression across the Georgia coastal plain. Area also includes Nannygoat Beach, the central part of Cabretta Beach, and an adjacent segment of the shelf. 579 Howard, J. D. , and H. E. Reineck. 1972. Georgia coastal region, Sapelo Island, U.S.A.: sedimentology and biology. IV. Physical and biogenic sedimentary structures of the nearshore shelf. Senckenbergiana Maritima 4:81-123. Investigates primary physical and biogenic sedimentary structures on Sapelo Island from the low tide line seaward to approximately 12 nmi (22 km) offshore. 580 Howard, J. D. , and H. E. Reineck. 1972. Georgia coastal region, Sapelo Island, U.S.A.: sedimentology and biology. VIII. Con- clusions. Senckenbergiana Maritima 4:220-224. This summary analyzes the conclusions reached in six individual 122 papers on the recent environments and ancient nearshore facies of the Georgia coast, nearshore shelf. 581 Hoyt, J. H. 1962. High-angle beach stratification, Sapelo Island, Georgia. Journal of Sedimentary Petrology 32(2) :309-311. Discusses foreshore sand bars on Sapelo Island in relation to dip of stratification and other physical characteristics. 582 *Hoyt, J. H., and V. J. Henry, Jr. 1964. Development and geologic significance of soft beach sand. Sedimentology 3:44-51. This article discusses variables affecting the firmness of sand beaches along the Georgia coast (particularly Sapelo Island), coastal South Carolina, and northeastern Florida. 583 Hoyt, J. H., V. J. Henry, Jr., and J. D. Howard, eds. 1966. Pleis- tocene and Holocene sediments, Sapelo Island, Georgia, and vicinity. Geological Society of America, Southeastern Section, Guidebook for Field Trip No. 1, April 11-13, 1966. 78 pp. This guidebook contains illustrated commentaries on nine locali- ties: Sapelo Island beach, Caloretta Island beach, Raccoon bluff, dune ridge, barrier spit and salt marsh, Sutherland bluff, and the Pamlico and Talbot shorelines. 584 Jenkins, J. H. 1949. The occurrence of the chachalaca on Sapelo Island, Georgia. The Oriole 14:11-12. The article details the occurrence and observation of the cha- chalaca bird on Sapelo Island, Georgia. 585 *Johnson, A. S. , H. 0. Hillestad, S. F. Shanholtzer, and G. F. Shan- holtzer. 1974. An ecological survey of the coastal region of Georgia. National Park Service, Scientific Monograph Series No. 3. 233 pp. The ecological characteristics of Georgia's coastal regions are described, and specific chapters focus on the fauna, vegetation, and productivity of the islands, marshes, and open marine, and estuarine waters. Special emphasis is placed on Tybee Island, Wassaw Island, Ossabaw Island, St. Catherines Island, Blackbeard Island, Sapelo Island, Little St. Simons Island, St. Simons Island, and Cumberland Island. 586 *Kale, H. W. 1964. Food of the long-billed marshwren, Telmatodytes 123 pal ustris griseus, in the salt marshes of Sapelo Island, Georqia. The Oriole 29(4) :47-66. During a study of the ecology and bioenergetics of the long- billed marsh wren, Telmatodytes pal ustris ariseus, in the salt marshes of Sapelo Island, Georgia, stomachs of 195 adult, immature, and nesting wrens were analyzed for food items. 587 *Kale, N. W. , and P. A. Hyypio. 1966. Additions to the birds of Sapelo Island and vicinity. The Oriole 31:1-11. This paper adds 24 species to the list of birds found on Sapelo Island that was. compiled in 1959. Additional observations are al- so made on some of the previously identified species on the island. 588 *Kuenzler, E. J. 1961. Phosphorous budget of a mussel population. Limnology and Oceanography 6:400-415. This study, which took place at Sapelo Island, was one of the earliest to suggest the great complexity of the food chain in estuarine areas. 589 *Kuenzler, E. J. 1961. Structure and energy flow of a mussel popu- lation in a Georgia salt marsh. Limnology and Oceanography 6: 191-204. . Modiolus demissus Dillwyn was studied near Sapelo Island, Geor- gia. 590 Land, L. S. 1964. Eolian cross-bedding in the beach dune environ- ment, Sapelo Island, Georgia. Journal of Sedimentary Petroloqy 34(2) :389-394. Deals with deposition of modern beach dunes on Sapelo Island by prevailing dry winds. 591 *Marples, T. G. 1966. A radionuclide tracer study of arthropod food chains in a Spartina salt marsh ecosystem. Ecology 47:270-277. This study defines the grazing and detritus food chains among terrestrial arthropods in the salt marshes at Sapelo Island, Geor- gia. 592 Martof, B. S. 1963. Some observations of the herpetofauna of Sapelo Island, Georgia. Herpetologica 19(1) :70-72. 124 This brief article describes the herpetofauna collected during a 10-year period on Sapelo Island, Georgia. 593 *0dum, E. P., and A. A. de la Cruz. 1967. Particulate organic detri- tus in a Georgia salt marsh-estuarine ecosystem. Pages 383-388 in G. H. Lauff, ed. Estuaries. American Association for the Ad- vancement of Science, Washington, D.C. Discusses particulate organic detritus in the Sapelo Island eco- system. 594 *0ertel , G. F. 1975. Post Pleistocene island and inlet adjustment along the Georgia coast. Journal of Sedimentary Petrology 45: 150-159. Describes the constriction of Georgia's tidal inlets by the in- trusion of Holocene beach-ridge development. Sapelo Sound, St. Andrew Sound, and St. Catherine Sound are discussed. 595 Pilkey, D. H., and D. M. Richter. 1965. Beach profiles of a Geor- . gia barrier island. Southeastern Geology 6(1): 11-19. Discusses seasonal beach profiles and observed storm changes at seven stations on Sapelo Island during 1963. 596 *Pomeroy, L. R. 1959. Algal productivity in salt marshes of Georgia. Limnology and Oceanography 4:386-397. This study is concerned with the productivity of the microscopic algae of intertidal salt marshes and with the environmental condi- tions that influence productivity. Most of the measurements of production and associated factors were made in the marshes of the Duplin River, a tidal creek adjacent to Sapelo Island, Georgia. 597 *Pomeroy, L. R. 1959. Productivity of algae in salt marshes. Pages 88-96 i_n_ Proceedings of the Salt Marsh Conference, Sapelo Island, Georgia. University of Georgia, Athens. Photosynthesis of the marsh algae was measured under bell jars filled with filtered, boiled estuarine water (by change in oxygen content of the water) and made at various elevations on the side of a natural levee beside the Duplin River, a tidal drainage creek adjacent to Sapelo Island, Georgia. 598 *Ragotzkie, R. A. 1959. Plankton productivity in estuarine waters cf Georgia. University of Texas, Publications of the Institute of 125 Marine Science 6:147-158. Primary production of the plankton community in the estuarine waters near Sapelo Island, Georgia, was estimated by oxygen evolu- tion in light and dark bottles at several locations. dino- 599 *Ragotzkie, R. A., and L. R. Pomeroy. 1957. Life history of a flagellate bloom. Limnology and Oceanography 2:62-69. In late February and early March 1955, a small, dense concentra- tion of a dinoflagellate of the genus Gymnodinium was observed in the extreme upper end of the Duplin River at Sapelo Island, Geor- gia. This river is estuarine and receives practically no fresh- water runoff from land. 600 *Rickards, W. L. 1968. Ecology and growth of juvenile tarpon, Mega- lops atlanticus, in a Georgia salt marsh. Bulletin of Marine Science 18:220-239. Juvenile tarpon were found in both still and flowing dark water in marsh pools and creeks on Sapelo Island, Georgia. 601 *Schleske, C. L. , and E. P. Odum. 1962. Mechanisms maintaining high productivity in Georgia estuaries. Proceedings of the Gulf and Caribbean Fisheries Institute 14:75-80. This article presents the results of studies of the extensive, unpolluted estuaries at Sapelo Island, Georgia. 602 *Shanholtzer, S. F. 1973. Energy flow, food habits and population dynamics of Uca pugnax in a salt marsh system. Ph.D. Thesis. University of Georgia, Athens. 100 pp. (Dissertation Abstracts 34:3755-B.) The energy budget, food habits and population dynamics of Uca pugnax are studied in the Georgia salt marshes near Sapelo Island. Uca pugnax, a detritivore, serves as an important link in the highly productive detrital salt marsh energy budget. 603 *Sharp, H. F., Jr. 1967. Food ecology of the rice rat, Oryzomys palustris (Harlan), in a Georgia salt marsh. Journal of Mammalogy 48:557-563. This paper discusses the food ecology of the rice rat, Oryzomys palustris, in the salt marsh area of Sapelo Island, Georgia. 126 604 *Smalley, A. E. 1959. The growth cycle of Spartina and its relation to the insect populations in the marsh. Pages 96-100 j_n_ Proceed- ings of the Salt Marsh Conference, Sapelo Island, Georgia. Uni- versity of Georgia, Athens. Gives net production figures for a high marsh area on Sapelo Island, Georgia, and discusses the insect populations that feed on Spartina. 605 *Smalley, A. E. 1959. The role of two invertebrate populations, Lit- ton* na irrorata and Orchel imum fidicinium, in the energy flow of a salt marsh ecosystem. Ph.D. Thesis. University of Georgia, Athens. 135 pp. (Dissertation Abstracts 20:2979-B.) Energy relationships of three components of a salt marsh at Sapelo Island, Georgia, were studied: (1) Spartina alterniflora, the only higher plant occurring on the marsh, (2) Littorina irror- ata, a snail and (3) Orchel imum fidicinium, a grasshopper. 606 *Smalley, A. E. 1960. Energy flow of a salt marsh grasshopper popu- lation. Ecology 41:672-677. This paper describes a study of the energy flow of a natural population of a grasshopper, Orchel imum fidicinium Rehn and Hebard, in salt marshes near Sapelo Island, Georgia. 607 *Teal , J. M. 1959. Energy flow in the salt marsh ecosystem. Pages 101-107 jn_ Proceedings of the Salt Marsh Conference, Sapelo Island, Georgia. University of Georgia, Athens. In order to evaluate the role of the salt marsh in the estuary- marsh system along the Georgia coast and to understand the trophic relationships of the various organisms living in the marsh, the author has constructed an energy flow diagram for a Sapelo Island marsh which shows the energy flow in kilo-calories per square meter per year. 608 *Teal , J. M. 1962. Energy flow in the salt marsh ecosystem of Geor- gia. Ecology 43:614-624. The Sapelo Island marsh was divided into five regions for study. They are: streamside marsh; creek bank; levee marsh; short-Spar- tina marsh; and Salicornia marsh. Marsh fauna and the food web are examined in detail, and an extensive listing of macro-fauna is provided. 127 609 *Teal , J. M., and J. Kanwisher. 1961. Gas exchange in a Georgia salt marsh. Limnology and Oceanography 6:388-399. This paper is concerned with the role of marsh mud and its micro- fauna in the Sapelo Island energy budget. 610 *Teal , J., and M. Teal. 1969. Life and death of the salt marsh. Little, Brown and Company, Boston, Massachusetts. 278 pp. This book presents an introduction to the study of marshes on the basis of the scientific work done by the Sapelo Island Marine Institute, it contains three parts which deal with the formation of the marshes of the East Coast; the ecology of salt marshes, including a chapter on marsh production; and marsh conservation. 611 *Vanstory, B. 1956. Georgia's land of the Golden Isles. The Uni- versity of Georgia Press, Athens. 202 pp. Provides brief description and extensive historical information on Ossabaw, St. Catherines, Sapelo, St. Simons, Sea, Jekyll, and Cumberland Islands, Georgia. 612 Wolf, P. L., S. F. Shanholtzer, and R. J. Reimold. 1972. First oc- currence of the violet goby in Georgia. Quarterly Journal of the Florida Academy of Sciences 35(2/3) ":81-84 . Measurements are listed and compared for the violet goby Gobi- oides broussonneti (Lacepede), which was collected July 2, 1969, in the Duplin River estuary, Sapelo Islnad, Georgia--the first reported occurrence of the fish north of Florida. 613 Woolsey, J. R., V. J. Henry, and J. L. Hunt. 1975. Backshore heavy- mineral concentration on Sapelo Island, Georgia. Journal of Sedi- mentary Petrology 45(1) :280-284. This article discusses the concentration of minerals on Sapelo Island. According to the data, the concentration of heavy miner- als is caused by the storm wave erosion of dune/beach ridges, while the concentration of light minerals is caused by the wind-winnow- ing of the beach surface. 614 Wunderl ich, F. 1972. Georgia coastal region, Sapelo Island, U.S.A.: sedimentology and biology. III. Beach dynamics and beach devel- opment. Senckenbergiana Maritima 4:47-79. Discusses investigations in beach stratification and bedding, which were carried out in relation to physical parameters. Prob- 128 Terns concerning beach and barrier island migrations are also dis- cussed. 615 *Ziegler, J. M. 1959. Origin of the sea islands of the southeastern United States. Geographical Review 49:222-237. Coastal geographic studies of sea islands, off the coasts of Georgia and South Carolina, were carried out in 1953, 1956, 1957, and 1958. Islands discussed include Tybee, Wassaw, Ossabaw, St. Catherines, Blackbeard, Sapelo, St. Simons, Jekyll, and Cumberland (in Georgia) and Hunting, Fripp, Hilton Head, and Sullivans (in South Carolina). Wolf Island Little St. Simons 616 Hoyt, J. H., and V. J. Henry, Jr. 1971. Origin of capes and shoals along the southeastern coast of the United States. Geological Society of America Bulletin 82(1) :59-66. Discusses origin of Cape Fear, North Carolina; Cape Romain- Santee Point, South Carolina; and lesser capes at Tybee and Little St. Simons Islands, Georgia. All of these coincide with the mouths of rivers or with the discharge areas of rivers. 617 *Johnson, A. S., H. 0. Hillestad, S. F. Shanholtzer, and G. F. Shan- holtzer. 1974. An ecological survey of the coastal region of Georgia. National Park Service, Scientific Monograph Series No. 3. 233 pp. The ecological characteristics of Georgia's coastal regions are described, and specific chapters focus on the fauna, vegetation, productivity of the islands, marshes, open marine, and estuarine waters. Special emphasis is placed on Tybee Island, Wassaw Island, Ossabaw Island, St. Catherines Island, Blackbeard Island, Sapelo Island, Little St. Simons Island, St. Simons Island, Jekyll Island, and Cumberland Island. 618 *Peake, R. H., Jr. 1968. A gathering of Georgia waterbirds and shore- birds (Little St. Simons Island, Georgia). The Oriole 33(1) :18. Reports sightings of shorebirds and waterbirds on St. Simons Island in 1966. Sea Island St. Simons Island 619 ♦Caldwell, D. K. 1962. Comments on the nesting behavior of Atlantic 129 loggerhead sea turtles, based primarily on tagging returns. Journal of Florida Academy of Sciences 25(4) :287-302.~ This article presents results of a study on the nesting behavior of loggerhead sea turtles on Jekyll Island, St. Simons Island, and the Little Cumberland Islands, Georgia. 620 *Johnson, A. S., H. 0. Hillestad, S. F. Shanholtzer, and G. F. Shan- holtzer. 1974. An ecological survey of the coastal region of Georgia. National Park Service, Scientific Monograph Series No. 3. 233 pp. The ecological characteristics of Georgia's coastal region are described, and specific chapters focus on the fauna, vegetation, and productivity of the islands, marshes, open marine, and estua- rine waters. Special emphasis is placed on Tybee Island, Wassaw Island, Ossabaw Island, St. Catherines Island, Blackbeard Island, Sapelo Island, Little St. Simons Island, St. Simons Island, Jekyll Island, and Cumberland Island. 621 Miller, G. L., and S. C. Jorgensen. 1969. Seasonal abundance and length frequency distribution of some marine fishes in coastal Georgia. U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service, Data Report No. 35. 102 pp. Presents the results of systematic seining surveys at a beach habitat on St. Simons Island and two high marsh stations, one near Jekyll Island and one near Meridian, Georgia. 622 *0tto, J. S. 1975. Status differences and the archeological record-- a comparison of planter, overseer, and slave sites from Cannon's Point Plantation (1794-1861), St. Simons Island, Georgia. Xerox University Microfilms, Ann Arbor, Michigan. 409 pp. An extensive archeological survey of a St. Simons Island site. 623 *Teal , J. M. 1958. Distribution of fiddler crabs in Georgia salt marshes. Ecology 39:185-193. The distribution of fiddler crabs in Georgia salt marshes is discussed, with specific data on St. Simon's Island, Sapelo Island, and St. Catherine's Island. 624 *Vanstory, B. 1956. Georgia's land of the Golden Isles. The Univer- sity of Georgia Press, Athens. 202 pp. Provides brief description and extensive historical information 130 on Ossabaw, St. Catherines, Sapelo, St. Simons, Sea, Jekyll, and Cumberland Islands, Georgia. 625 *Wightman, 0. S. 1955. Early days of coastal Georgia. Fort Frederica Association, St. Simons Island, Georgia. 235 pp. Contains a great deal of historical information on St. Simons Island, Georgia. 626 *Ziegler, J. M. 1959. Origin of the sea islands of the southeastern United States. Geographical Review 49:222-237. Coastal geographic studies of sea islands, off the coasts of Georgia and South Carolina, were carried out in 1953, 1956, 1957, and 1958. Islands discussed include Tybee, Wassaw, Ossabaw, St. Catherines, Blackbeard, Sapelo, St. Simons, Jekyll, and Cumberland (in Georgia) and Hunting, Fripp, Hilton Head, and Sullivans (in South Carolina). Jekyll Island 627 *Caldwell, D. K. 1962. Comments on the nesting behavior of Atlantic loggerhead sea turtles, based primarily on tagging returns. Jour- nal of Florida Academy of Sciences 25(4) :287-302. This article presents results of a study on the nesting behavior of loggerhead sea turtles on Jekyll Island, St. Simons Island, and the Little Cumberland Islands, Georgia. 628 Floyd, C. F., and C. F. Sirmans. 1975. The economic impact of rec- reational land use in an island environment: a case study of Jekyll Island, Georgia. Georgia Marine Science Center, Technical Report Mo. SG 75-7. 99 pp. Compiled data to indicate the effect of recreational land utili- zation affects employment, income, population and migration pat- terns, and housing. 629 *Johnson, A. S., H. 0. Hillestad, S. F. Shanholtzer, and G. F. Shan- holtzer. 1974. An ecological survey of the coastal region of Georgia. National Park Service, Scientific Monograph Series No. 3. 233 pp. The ecological characteristics of Georgia's coastal region are described, and specific chapters focus on the fauna, vegetation, and productivity of the islands, marshes, open marine, and estua- rine waters. Special emphasis is placed on Tybee Island, Wassaw Island, Ossabaw Island, St. Catherines Island, Blackbeard Island, 131 Sapelo Island, Little St. Simons Island, St. Simons Island, Jekyll Island, and Cumberland Island. 630 Miller, G. L., and S. C. Jorgensen. 1969. Seasonal abundance and length frequency distribution of some marine fishes in coastal Georgia. National Park Service, Scientific Monograph Series 102 pp. Presents the results of systematic seining surveys at a beach habitat on St. Simons Island and two high marsh stations, one near nd one near Meridian, Georgia. ridu i idl uri ju ji iiiui Jekyll Island and or 631 *Vanstory, B. 1956. Georgia's land of the Golden Isles. The Univer- sity of Georgia Press, Athens. 202 pp. Provides brief description and extensive historical information on Ossabaw, St. Catherines, Sapelo, St. Simons, Sea, Jekyll, and Cumberland Islands of the Georgia coast. 632 *Ziegler, J. M. 1959. Origin of the sea islands of the southeastern United States. Geographical Review 49:222-237. Coastal geographic studies of sea islands, off the coasts of Georgia and South Carolina, were carried out in 1953, 1956, 1957, and 1958. Islands discussed include Tybee, Wassaw, Ossabaw, St. Catherines, Blackbeard, Sapelo, St. Simons, Jekyll, and Cumberland (in Georgia) and Hunting, Fripp, Hilton Head, and Sullivans (in South Carolina). Little Cumberland Island 633 *Cal dwell, D. K. 1962. Comments on the nesting behavior of Atlantic loggerhead sea turtles, based primarily on tagging returns. Jour- nal of Florida Academy of Sciences 25(4) :287-302. This article presents results of a study on the nesting behavior of loggerhead sea turtles on Jekyll Island, St. Simons Island, and the Little Cumberland Islands, Georgia. 634 *0ertel , G. F. 1975. Post Pleistocene island and inlet adjustment along the Georgia coast. Journal of Sedimentary Petrology 45:150- 159. Describes the constriction of Georgia's tidal inlets by the intru- sion of Holocene beach-ridge development. Sapelo Sound, St. Andrew Sound, and St. Catherine Sound are discussed. 132 Cumberland Island 635 Beshear, R. J. 1971. Thrips collected on Spartina spp. from Cumber- land Island, Georgia. Journal of Georgia Entomological Society 6(4):243-246. This article lists the 15 species of thrips (Thysanoptera) col- lected on Spartina alterniflora Loisel and S_. patens (Ait.) Muh. from Cumberland Island, Georgia. 636 Beshear, R. J. 1975. A new species of Caprithrips (Thysanoptera: Thripidae) from Cumberland Island, Georaia. Annals of the Entomological Society of America 68(3) : 500-502. This paper includes a description of Caprithrips insularis, sp. nov., from Cumberland Island, Georgia, on centipede grass, Eremochloa ophiuroides (Munro) Mack.; and a key to the world species of Caprithrips. 637 *Hillestad, H. 0., J. R. Bozeman, A. S. Johnson, C. W. Berisford, and J. I. Richardson. 1975. The ecology of the Cumberland Island National Seashore, Camden County, Georgia. University of Georgia, Georgia Marine Science Center, Skidaway Island, Technical Report Series No. 75-5. 299 pp. + 4 maps. The objectives were to inventory and describe the natural re- sources within the boundaries of the Cumberland Island National Seashore and to generally describe their functions and relation- ships. 638 Mohnson, A. S., H. 0. Hillestad, S. F. Shanholtzer, and G. F. Shan- holtzer. 1974. An ecological survey of the coastal region of Georgia. National Park Service, Scientific Monograph Series No. 3. 233 pp. The ecological characteristics of the coastal region of Georgia are described, and specific chapters focus on the fauna, vegeta- tion, and productivity of the islands, marshes, and open marine and estuarine waters. Special emphasis is placed on Tybee Island, Wassaw Island, Ossabaw Island, St. Catherines Island, Blackbeard Island, Sapelo Island, Little St. Simons Island, St. Simons Island, Jekyll Island and Cumberland Island. 639 Tippins, H. H., and R. J. Beshear. 1970. The armored scale insects (Homoptera: Diaspididae) of Cumberland Island, Georgia. Journal of the Georgia Entomological Society 5(1): 7-12 . An annotated list of 41 species of armored scale insects col- lected on Cumberland Island, Georgia, is given. 133 640 U.S. House of Representatives. 1972. Proposed Cumberland Island National Seashore. 92d Cong, 2d Sess, April 20-21, 1972. 132 pp, Evidence was given by various environmental groups on the eco- logical value of Cumberland Island, Georgia, in the hopes of es- tablishing a national seashore. 641 *Vanstory, B. 1956. Georgia's land of the Golden Isles. The Univer- sity of Georgia Press, Athens. 202 pp. Provides brief description and extensive historical information on Ossabaw, St. Catherines, Sapelo, St. Simons, Sea, Jekyll , and Cumberland Islands of the Georgia coast. 642 jc United States. Geographical Review 49:222-237. *Ziegler, J. M. 1959. Origin of the sea islands of the southeastern Coastal geographic studies of sea islands, off the coasts of Georgia and South Carolina, were carried out in 1953, 1956, 1957, and 1958. Islands discussed include Tybee, Wassaw, Ossabaw, St. Catherines, Blackbeard, Sapelo, St. Simons, Jekyll, and Cumber- land (in Georgia) and Hunting, Fripp, Hilton Head, and Sullivans (in South Carolina) . 134 FLORIDA 643 Caine, E. A. 1974. Comparative functional morphology of feeding in three species of caprellids (Crustacea, Amphipoda) from the north- western Florida Gulf Coast. Journal of Experimental Marine Biol- ogy and Ecology 15(1) -81-96. The functional morphology of feeding is discussed in three spe- cies of caprellid amphipods collected along the Florida coast. 644 Caldwell, D. K. , A. Carr, and L. H. Ogren. 1959. Nesting and migra- tion of the Atlantic loggerhead turtle. Bulletin of the Florida State Museum 4(10) :295-308. The nesting procedure of the Atlantic loggerhead is described and illustrated. The principal nesting range of the subspecies is from Cape Lookout, North Carolina, to Mexico. Females may travel as much as 1000 shoreline miles away from the nesting beach in 10 months. 645 *Carter, M. R. , L. A. Burns, T. R. Cavinder, K. R. Dugger, P. L. Fore, D. B. Hicks, H. L. Revells, and T. W. Schmidt. 1973. Ecosystems analysis of the Big Cypress Swamp and estuaries. Environmental Protection Agency, Region IV, Atlanta, Georgia. EPA-904/9-74-002. 379 pp. This was a 2-year study to obtain biological and hydrological information for objective planning of the wise use of south Flori- da's land, water, wildlife and fisheries resources. Field investi- gations during 1971-1972 intensively examined the details of biotic community interactions with hydrologic conditions of dis- turbed and relatively unaffected regions of the Big Cypress Swamp and contiguous tidal v/etlands and estuaries. 646 Craighead, F. C, Sr. The trees of south Florida. Vol. I. The natural environments and their succession. University of Miami Press, Coral Gables, Florida. 212 pp. This volume presents information pertaining to the numerous plant communities of south Florida. The interrelations among these plant communities and their changes under the influences of various climatic and edaphic preserves, are described. 135 647 *Croker, R. A. 1962. Growth and food of the gray snapper, Lutjanus griseus, in Everglades National Park. Transactions of the Ameri- can Fisheries Society 91(4) :379-383. This study of the biology of the gray snapper is based on the examination of 849 specimens collected from the sport fishery. 648 *Gorsline, D. S. 1966. Dynamic characteristics of west Florida Gulf coast beaches. Marine Geology 4:187-206. This study of fifteen Florida coast beach stations enabled a comparison of beach conditions in a low- and medium-energy envi- ronment (Florida) with a high-energy environment (California). 649 Hastings, R. W. 1969. Rivulus marmoratus Poey from the west coast of Florida. Quarterly Journal of the Florida Academy of Sciences 32(l):37-38. This article discusses the first record of collection of this species from the west coast of Florida (Collier County). 650 Kruczynski, W. L., and G. J. Myers. 1976. Occurrence of Apanthura magnifica. Menzies and Frankenberg, 1966 (Isopoda: Anthur'idae) from the west coast of Florida, with a key to the species of Apanthura Stebbing, 1900. Proceedings of the Biological Society of Washington 89(28) :353-360. Diagnostic characteristics are listed for Anthuridae and Apan- thura Stebbing, 1900. A description and illustrations of diag- nostic features characterize A. magnifica Menzies and Frankenberg. 651 *Kuenzler, E. J. 1974. Mangrove swamp systems. Pages 346-371 in_ H. T. Odum, B. J. Copeland, and E. A. McMahan, eds. Coastal eco- logical systems of the United States. Vol. 1. The Conservation Foundation, Washington, D.C. Describes mangrove ecological system, including the distribution, ecology, physiology, geological role, and human use and disturbance. These marine-based forests occur on the mainland, many islands, and keys in Florida. 652 Lebuff, C. R. , and R. W. Beatty. 1971. Some aspects of nesting of the loggerhead turtle, Caretta carreta carreta (Linne), on the Gulf coast of Florida. Herpetologica 27(2) -153-156. This article provides information on multiple laying of logger- head turtles in southwest Florida. 136 653 *Leverett, F. 1931. The Pensacola terrace and associated beaches and bars in Florida. Florida State Geological Survey Bulletin 7:7-32. This article summarizes the results of studies conducted to de- termine whether one of the best defined raised beaches, that bor- dering the Pensacola terrace, has been subjected to differential uplift, or has remained at a uniform altitude above sea level throughout the area studied. The article includes a discussion of islands, dunes, sand ridges, and offshore bars on the Atlantic coast, but none are identified by name. 654 *Lugo, A. E., and S. C. Snedaker. 1974. The ecology of mangroves. Pages 39-64 in_ R. F. Johnson, ed. Annual review of ecology and systematics. Vol. 5. Annual Reviews, Inc., Palo Alto, Calif. This article offers the latest and most comprehensive review of studies related to the productivity of mangroves and their utili- zation in the food chain. A table summarizes productivity values derived from the various Floridian and Puerto Rican mangrove studies that are discussed in the text. 655 *Martens, J. H. C. 1921. Beaches of Florida. Pages 67-119 in_ Florida Geological Survey, 22nd Annual Report. Tallahassee, Fla. This paper contains a discussion of the following elements: types of shores in Florida, the extent of beaches, conditions favorable for extensive formation of beaches, composition and tex- ture of Florida beach sand, wave action and its results, offshore bars, tides and their relation to beaches. 656 *McNulty, J. K., W. N. Lindall , Jr., and J. E. Sykes. 1972. Coopera- tive Gulf of Mexico estuarine inventory and study, Florida: phase 1, area description. U.S. Department of Commerce, National Marine Fisheries Service, Circular 368. 126 pp. This study represents a portion of the larger Cooperative Gulf of Mexico Estuarine Inventory, which was conducted in the Gulf Coast States—Alabama, Florida, Louisiana, Mississippi, and Texas. It describes all aspects of the Florida Gulf Coast estuarine area, including offshore islands, from Florida Bay to Perdido Bay. 657 *Niedoroda, A. W. 1972. Waves, currents, sediments, and sand bars associated with low energy coastal environments. Transactions of the Gulf Coast Association of Geological Societies 22:229-239. This study of the Florida Big Bend coast reports on the physical 137 interactions of waves and currents with low energy bathymetric features resulting in a distinct areal distribution of sediment parameters. 658 *Phillips, L. C. 1960. Observations on the ecology and distribution of the Florida seagrasses. Florida State Board of Conservation Marine Laboratory, Professional Papers Series No. 2. 72 pp. Shallow, quiet water of barrier islands and offshore keys are favorable habitats for the establishment and growth of submerged plants, which offer food and protection for young fish and shrimp in Florida waters. 659 Plumb, J. A., J. H. Schachte, J. L. Gaines, W. Peltier, and B. Car- roll. 1974. Streptococcus sp. from marine fishes along the Ala- bama and northwest Florida coast of the Gulf of Mexico. Trans- actions of the American Fisheries Society 103(2) :358-361 . Fish kills in estuarine bays along the Florida and Alabama Gulf coasts during August and September 1972 are discussed, based on examination of eight species of moribund fish. 660 Price, D. J. 1975. The apparent growth of Gulf Beach, extreme west Florida. Transactions of the Gulf Coast Association of Geological Societies 25:369-372. This study indicates that Gulf Beach, in western Florida, has been growing at the rate of 60+ m a year for the past 108 years. 661 *Shepard, F. P., and H. R. Wanless. 1971. Alternating white beaches and swamps: West Florida to Mississippi Sound. Pages 162-197 j_n_ F. P. Shepard and H. R. Wanless, Our changing coastlines. McGraw- Hill, New York. Provides a detailed physical description for the following is- lands and beach areas: Florida: Cape Sable area, Ponce de Leon Bay and the Everglades, Ten Thousand Islands area, Cape Romano, Estero Bay, Sanibel Island- Charlotte Harbor, Tampa Bay and Pinellas peninsula, Honeymoon Is- land and Hurricane Pass, Homosassa Bay area, Cedar Keys-Suwannee River area, Fenholloway River, Ochlockonee Bay, Dog Island and Dog Island "Reef", Apalichicola-St. Vincent Island area, Cape San Bias and St. Joseph Spit area, Panama City area, Choctawhatchee Bay and Santa Rose Island, Pensacola Bay, Perdido Bay. Alabama: Perdido Bay, Mobile Bay. Mississippi : Horn Island, Gulfport-Ship Island, Cat Island. 138 662 *Shepard, F. P., and H. R. Wanless. 1971. Straight barrier coasts: Cape Roma in to Florida Keys. Pages 132-161 in_ F. P. Shepard and H. R. Wanless, Our changing coastlines. McGraw-Hill, New York. Provides a detailed physical description for the following is- lands and beach areas: South Carolina: Price, Capers, and Dewees Inlets, Charleston Har- bor and Fort Sumter, North Edisto River estuary, Fripps-St. Phil- lips Island area. Georgia: Tybee Island, Ossabaw Island, Sapelo and Blackbeard Islands. Florida: Nassau Sound, St. Johns River Outlet, St. Augustine, Mosquito Lagoon area, Cape Kennedy, Palm Beach-Del ray Beach area, Miami Beach-northern Biscayne area, Key Largo-Elliott Key area, Florida Bay-Matecumbe area, Big Pine-Cudjoe Key, Marquesas Keys. 663 *Tanner, W. F. 1960. "Perched" barrier islands, east Florida coast. Southeastern Geology 2:133-135. The ratio between lagoon width and barrier width is discussed in the abstract for 12 points along the east Florida coast, and a comparison is made with ratios for 33 points elsewhere around the world. 664 *Tebeau, C. W. 1968. Man in the Everglades. University of Miami Press, Coral Gables, Florida. 192 pp. This book reviews 2000 years of human history in the Everglades National Park area, including all of the offshore islands. 665 Walton, T. L., and R. G. Dean. 1976. Use of outer bars of inlets as sources of beach nourishment material. Shore and Beach 44(2): 13-19. Concerns methods and approaches by which outer bars of inlets, containing large quantities of high quality material, can be used for beach nourishment purposes in Florida without significant ad- verse effects on adjacent beaches. 666 *Williams, L. E. , Jr., and L. L. Martin. 1970. Nesting populations of brown pelicans in Florida. Proceedings of the Southeastern Association of Game and Fish Commissioners 24:154-169. Aerial searches and mail questionnaires revealed 22 active nest- ing colonies of brown pelicans (Pelecanus occidentalis) on small 139 islands close to shore off the Florida peninsula and a number of additional colonies in Florida Bay and the Florida Keys between 1968 and 1970. Amelia Island Bird Island Talbot Island Guana 667 *Ivey, R. D. 1948. Raccoon in the salt marshes of northeastern Flori da. Journal of Mammalogy 29:290-291. The article summarizes a study conducted in the area between St. Augustine and Ponte Vendra Beach, Florida. Included is a discus- sion of a barrier island (not named), consisting of beach, dunes, scrub, hummock, cypress swamp, hardwood swamp, fresh water marsh, and pine flatwoods. Anastasia 668 *Laessle, A. M. 1961. Some live oak forests of northeastern Florida. Quarterly Journal of the Florida Academy of Sciences 24:39-55. The purpose of this study was: (1) to determine whether the coastal live oak hammocks represent a salt spray climax and (2) to determine the position of live oak in succession in the inland sites. Anastasia Island State Park, Florida, was one of the study sites. 669 Pournelle, G. H., and B. A. Barrington. 1953. Dotes on mammals of Anastasia Island, St. Johns County, Florida. Journal of Mammalogy 34:133-135. This brief article supplements the meager data available on the mammals of Anastasia Island, Florida. Matanzas Flagler 140 Mosquito 670 Mehta, A. J., and M. P. O'Brien. 1973. Kennedy Space Center ocean beach erosion. University of Florida, Gainesville, Coastal and Oceanographic Engineering Laboratory. 66 pp. Discusses dune barrier erosion and possible breakthrough due to storm and hurricane wave activity near Mosquito Lagoon on Kennedy Space Center property. Cape Canaveral 671 Chaki, S. 1974. Study of beach ridges, Cape Canaveral, Florida. Florida State University, Coastal Research Notes 4(2) : 5-7 . This article describes eleven distinct sets of beach ridges at Cape Canaveral and discusses their morphology and formation. 672 *Field, M. E. 1974. Buried strandline deposits on the central F^r- ida inner continental shelf. Geological Society of America Bulle- tin 85:57-60. Modern shoal formation may be unrelated to relict strand topog- raphy. This finding is based on the occurrence and distribution of intertidal clam deposits at Cape Kennedy, Florida. 673 Harris, W. D. , and B. C. Jones. 1964. Repeat mapping for a record of shore erosion, Cape Kennedy. Shore and Beach 32(2) : 31-34. This article discusses a project in which tide-controlled infra- red photography was used to record mean high- and low-tide lines in the Cape Kennedy area. 674 Mehta, A. J., and H. K. Brooks. 1973. Mosquito lagoon barrier beach study. Shore and Beach 41(2) :27-34. A study of Mosquito lagoon barrier beach on the cuspate foreland of Cape Canaveral, Florida, indicated that no major barrier break- throughs are likely to occur and that even in the event of such a break, the resultant tidal inlet will be subsequently closed by normal wave action. 675 Osmond, J. K. , J. P. May, and W. F. Tanner. 1970. Age of the Cape Kennedy barrier-and-lagoon complex. Journal of Geophysical Re- search 75(2) :469-479. .41 This article presents the results of thorium and uranium iso- topic analyses of modern and fossil shells and beach rock of the Cape Kennedy, Florida, area. Cocoa Beach Island Vero Beach Island 676 Gore, R. H., and R. E. Grizzle. 1974. Studies on decapod Crustacea from the Indian River region of Florida: III. Callinectes bo- courti A. Milne Edwards, 1879 (Decapoda, Portunidae) from the central east coast of Florida. Crustaceana (Leiden) 27(3) : 306-308. Notes are given on color, morphology, and occurrence of a mature male Cal 1 inectes at Vero Beach, Florida, the third record for the continental United States. Hutchinson Island 677 Routa, R. A. 1967. Sea turtle nest survey of Hutchinson Island, Florida. Quarterly Journal of the Florida Academy of Science 30(4) :287-294. Based on research in the area, this article indicates that an estimated 5,265 nests containing about 658,125 eggs occurred on Hutchinson Island from May through August 1967. Jupiter Island Lake Worth Palm Beach Boca Raton Hillsbo ro Beach Fort Lauderdale Miami Beach Fisher Island 142 Virginia Key 678 Hendrix, G. Y., and R. H. Gore. 1973. Studies on decapod Crustacea from the Indian River region of Florida: I. Alpheus thomasi , new species, a new snapping shrimp from the subtropical east coast of Florida (Crustacea: Decapoda: Caridea). Proceedings of the Biological Society of Washington 86(35) :413-422. Illustrations of diagnostic characteristics of the new species of Alpheus are provided for Virginia Beach, Virginia Key, Miami, Florida. Key Biscayne 679 *Bayer, F. M. 1964. Littoral marine life of southern Florida. A Guidebook for the Geological Society of America Convention, Field Trip No. 7. 21 pp. This booklet contains the findings from a field trip along the north end of Key Biscayne, Florida. Flora and fauna of the area are described. Cape Sable 680 Craighead, F. C, and V. C. Gilbert. 1962. The effects of Hurricane Donna on the vegetation of southern Florida. Quarterly Journal of the Florida Academy of Science 25(1) : 1-28. This study concluded that hurricane damage was generally most severe in the mangrove belt and on the keys in the western portion of Florida Bay. 681 *Heald, E. J. 1971. The production of organic detritus in a South Florida estuary. University of Miami, Sea Grant Technical Bulle- tin No. 6. 110 pp. The mechanisms and pathways by which dead plant material is in- corporated into the aquatic system, thereby constituting an im- portant energy source, are delineated and quantified on the basis of studies in the North River estuary behind Cape Sable, Florida. 682 *Heald, E. J., and W. E. Odum. 1969. The contribution of mangrove swamps to Florida fisheries. Proceedings of the Gulf and Carib- bean Fisheries Institute 22:130-135. This paper discusses the importance of mangrove swamps to the 143 ecology of south Florida estuarine areas from the perspective of detritus production. The data upon which the discussion is based were gathered during 1967 and 1968 in the North River estuarine system of Everglades National Park immediately behind Cape Sable. 683 *0dum, W. E. 1971. Pathways of energy flow in a south Florida estu- ary. University of Miami, Sea Grant Technical Bulletin No. 7. 162 pp. Food habits are discussed for aquatic species of the North River estuarine area behind Cape Sable, Florida. 684 *0dum, W. E. , and E. J. Heald. 1972. Trophic analyses of an estua- rine mangrove community. Bulletin of Marine Science 22:671-738. Summarizes food habits for most of the fishes and aquatic inver- tebrate species that occur in the North River mangrove ecosystem behind Cape Sable, FlorTda. 685 *0dum, W. E. , and E. J. Heald. 1975. The detritus-based food web of an estuarine mangrove community. Pages 265-286 in L. E. Cronin, ed. Estuarine research. Vol. 1. Academic Press, New York. This paper attempts to construct a conceptual model of the food web of an estuarine mangrove community located in the North River area of Florida behind Cape Sable. 686 ♦Russell, R. J. 1971. Beaches and ground water of Cape Sable, Flor- ida, during extreme drought. Louisiana State University, Coastal Studies Institute, Technical Report 103. 18 pp. Deals with effects of extreme drought in the Cape Sable complex: erosion of beach rock, cemented water table rock, and replacement of groundwater with stagnant water. 687 *Scholl , D. W. 1964. Recent sedimentary record in mangrove swamps and rise in sea level over the southwestern coast of Florida: Part 2. Marine Geology 2(4) :343-364. Sedimentary data were given for coastal mangrove swamps in area of Whitewater Bay, Cape Sable, Huston Bay, and Ten Thousand Is- lands, Florida. Mud Bay Shark Point 144 McLaughlin Alligator Cove Duck Rock Jen Thousand Islands 688 *Fore, P. L. , and T. W. Schmidt. 1973. Fishes of Fahkahatchee Strand and Ten Thousand Islands. Chapter 15 i_n M. R. Carter, et al . , Eco- system analysis of the Big Cypress Swamp and estuaries. Environ- mental Protection Agency, Region IV, Atlanta, Georgia. EPA-904/9- 74-002, Seasonal distribution and abundance of the fish fauna are de- scribed from the beach habitats and adjacent waters of Panther Key and Round Key, Ten Thousand Islands, Florida, in 1972. A checklist of the 68 fish species from the surf zone of the barrier beaches appears in Appendix MM. 689 Kinch, J. C, and W. L. E. O'Harra. 1976. Characteristics of the sport fishery in the Ten Thousand Islands area of Florida. Bulle- tin of Marine Science 26(4) :479-487. This study of the Ten Thousand Islands area provides comparative observations with similar studies conducted along the southern coastal areas in Everglades National Park. 690 *Scholl , D. W. 1964. Recent sedimentary record in mangrove swamps and rise in sea level over the southwestern coast of Florida: part 2. Marine Geology 2(4) :343-364. Sedimentary data are examined on coastal mangrove swamps in area of Whitewater Bay, Cape Sable, Huston Bay, and Ten Thousand Islands, Florida. 691 Shier, D. E. 1969. Vermetid reefs and coastal development in the Ten Thousand Islands area, southwest Florida. Bulletin of the Geological Society of North America 80(3) :485-508. This article covers the geologic history of the barrier island complex known as Ten Thousand Islands since its beginning about 3000 years ago with the establishment of the sessile, reef-build- ing vermetid gastropod, Vermetus (Thylaeodus) nigricans Dall. Cape Romano 145 Rice Island Marco Island 692 *Gilliland, M. S. 1975. The material culture of Key Marco, Florida. The University of Florida Press, Gainesville. 266 pp. This book is limited to a discussion of a single site on Key Marco. Little Marco Group 693 Lee, T. N., and B. J. Yokel. 1973. Hydrology and beach dynamics. Page 4 jn_ Study on Rookery Bay land use studies: environmental planning strategies for the development of a mangrove shoreline. Conservation Foundation, Washington, D.C. Discusses hydrologic and beach dynamics studies in and near Rookery Bay Sanctuary on the southwest coast of Florida. Water exchange rates, tidal range variations, characteristics of the tidal prism, and similar parameters are described. Changing con- figurations of Keewaytin and Little Marco Islands are illustrated, Naples Park Bonita Beach Big Hickory Island Black Island Estero Island Sanibel Island 694 *Gunter, G., and G. E. Hall. 1965. A biological investigation of the Caloosahatchee estuary of Florida. Gulf Research Reports 2(1) : 1- 72. This study of biological parameters of the Caloosahatchee estu- ary includes the following areas: Pine Island, Sanibel Island, and Punta Rassa. 695 *LaHart, D. E., and G. W. Cornwell. 1970. Habitat preference and sur- vival of Florida duck broods. Proceedings of the Southeastern 146 Association of Game and Fish Commissioners 24:117-121. The most productive Florida duck brood habitat is the brackish water marshes on Merritt Island and Sanibel. 696 Missimer, T. M. 1973. Depositional history of Sanibel Island, Flor- ida. Florida State University, Coastal Research Notes 3(11) : 13-14 . Describes the multi-phase depositional and erosional history of a very complex barrier island (Sanibel) as related to the change in sea level . 697 Missimer, T. M. 1973. Growth rates of beach ridges on Sanibel Is- land, Florida. Transactions of the Gulf Coast Association of Geo- logical Societies 23:383-388. Discusses growth rates of beach ridges on Sanibel Island, one in a series of barrier islands located approximately 100 miles south of Tampa along the southwest Florida coast. Captiva Island North Captiva Island Cayo Costa Gasparilla Little Gasparilla Manasota Key Casey Key Sarasota 698 Chin, T. Y., J. Van de Kreeke, and R. G. Dean. 1970. Residence times of waters behind barrier islands. University of Florida, Water Resources Research Center, Publication No. 11. 120 pp. Attention is focused on exchange processes of waters behind bar- rier islands on Atlantic and Gulf of Mexico coastlines in general and on Florida coastline in particular. Computational procedure is developed with reference to Lake Worth and Sarasota Bay, Flor- ida. 147 Lido Key Longboat Key 699 Banks, R. S. 1975. Beach erosion along the lower west coast of peninsular Florida. Transactions of the Gulf Coast Association of Geological Societies 25:391-392. This detailed study by aerial photography of 24 km of coastline along Anna Maria and Longboat Keys provides proof of massive beach retreat in recent years. Anna Maria Key 700 Banks, R. S. 1975. Beach erosion along the lower west coast of oen- insular Florida. Transactions of the Gulf Coast Association of Geological Societies 25:391-392. This detailed study by aerial photography of 24 km of coastline along Anna Maria and Longboat Keys provides proof of massive beach retreat in recent years. Passage Key Egmont Key Mullet Key Group Cabbage Key Group Long Key Treasure Island 701 *Saloman, C. H. 1974. Physical, chemical and biological character- istics of nearshore zone of Sand Key, Florida, prior to beach restoration. National Marine Fisheries Service, Panama City, Florida. 2 vols. Defines some of the major physical, chemical, and biological characteristics of the nearshore zone off Sand Key prior to resto- ration of the damaged beaches by U.S. Army Corps of Engineers. Also includes results of a supplemental study on effects of hy- draulic dredging at Sunset Beach on Treasure Island, Florida. Extensive bibliography included in volume 2. 148 Sand Key 702 *Riggs, S. R., and M. P. O'Connor. 1974. Relict sediment deposits in a major transgressive coastal system. University of North Caro- lina, Sea Grant Publication UNC-SG-74-04. 40 pp. Detailed sediment studies in barrier island coastal systems of North Carolina and Gulf coast area of central Florida are presented to examine possible relict origin for nearshore shelf features ex- posed seaward of a transgressing barrier system. Reference is made to the barrier island system in Florida's Indian Rocks area. 703 *Saloman, C. H. 1974. Physical, chemical and biological character- istics of nearshore zone of Sand Key, Florida, prior to beach restoration. U.S. National Marine Fisheries Service, Panama City, Florida. 2 vols. Defines some of the major physical, chemical, and biological characteristics of the nearshore zone off Sand Key prior to resto- ration of the damaged beaches by U.S. Army Corps of Engineers. Also includes results of a supplemental study on effects of hy- draulic dredging at Sunset Beach on Treasure Island, Florida. Extensive bibligraphy included in, Volume 2. Clearwater Beach Isl and Caladesi Island Honeymoon Island Anclote Keys Bay Port 704 *Kilby, J. D. 1955. The fishes of two Gulf coastal marsh areas of Florida. Tulane Studies in Zoology 2(8) : 175-247. This paper discusses fish species in the Cedar Key and Bayport areas, based on sampling and analyses at 11 stations in each of the two areas. Includes an annotated list of species. Pine Island 705 *Gunter, G., and G. E. Hall. 1965. A biological investigation of the 149 Caloosahatchee estuary of Florida. Gulf Research Reports 2(1): 1-72. This study of biological parameters of the Caloosahatchee estu- ary includes the following areas: Pine Island, Sanibel Island, and Punta Rassa. Chassahowitzka Seashore Keys 706 *Stancyk, S. E., F. J. S. Maturo, Jr., and R. W. Heard, Jr. 1976. Phoronids from the east coast of the United States. Bulletin of Marine Science 26(4) :576-584. Collections from Beaufort, North Carolina; Seashore Key and Tampa Bay, Florida; and Sapelo Island, Georgia; confirmed the presence of Phoronis architecta Andrews at Seashore Key and Tampa Bay, and of JP. muelleri Selys-Longchamps at Beaufort. Cedar Keys 707 Igmanson, D. 1969. Seasonal changes in forminifera at Seahorse Key. Quarterly Journal of Florida Academy of Science 32(2) : 108-118. This article discusses seasonal fluctuations in shallow water, marginal marine calcareous foraminiferal populations at Seahorse Key, Florida. 708 *Kilby, J. D. 1955. The fishes of two Gulf coastal marsh areas of Florida. Tulane Studies in Zoology 2(8) :175-247. This paper discusses fish species in the Cedar Key and Bayport areas, based on sampling at 11 stations in each of the two areas. Includes an annotated list of species. 709 *Marshall , H. L. 1974. Irregularly-flooded marsh. Pages 150-170 in H. T. Odum, B. J. Copeland, and E. A. McMahan, eds. Coastal eco- systems of the United States. Vol. 2. The Conservation Foundation, Washington, D.C. Good examples of irregularly flooded marshes are seen in the Pamlico Sound area of North Carolina, from Cedar Keys to Apalachee Bay in Florida, and near the mouth of the Mississippi River. Studied examples from each of three areas are discussed: Bodie Is- land, North Carolina; Live Oak Point, Florida; and Mew England. 150 710 *Reid, G. K., Jr. 1954. An ecological study of the Gulf of Mexico fishes, in the vicinity of Cedar Key, Florida. Bulletin of Marine Science of the Gulf and Caribbean 4(1): 1-94. This study discusses an investigation that was made from June 1950 through May 1951 of fishes inhabiting the extensive shallow areas and channels in the vicinity of Cedar Key, Florida. It in- cludes data on physiography, vegetation, hydrography, and equip- ment, methods, and techniques of sample collection. 711 Wharton, C. H. 1969. The cottonmouth moccasin on Sea Horse Key, Florida. Bulletin of the Florida State Museum Biological Series 14(3) :227-272. The article deals with the author's 1954-1957 studies of cotton- mouth moccasin populations of the islands near Cedar Key, Levy County, Florida. Piney Island 712 Livingston, R. J. 1975. Impact of kraft pulp-mill effluents on estu- arine and coastal fishes in Apalachee Bay, Florida. Marine Biol- ogy 32(1) :19-48. The article presents the results of a 2-year study to deter- mine the impact of kraft pulp-mill effluents on the fish fauna of a shallow bay system in Apalachee Bay, Florida, and adjacent off- shore areas. Mashes Island Alligator Point 713 *Glooschenko, W. A., and R. C. Harriss. 1974. Neutral embayments. Pages 488-497 j[n H. T. Odum, B. J. Copeland, and E. A. McMahan, eds. Coastal ecological systems of the United States. Vol. 2. The Conservation Foundation, Washington, D.C. Alligator Harbor, Florida, is presented as an example of a typi ca l neutral embayment. 714 *Hopkins, E. M. , H. G. Goodell, S. A. Chesser, J. P. May, and D. J. Poche. 1969. The relict nature of the sediments and submarine topography off Alligator Harbor, Florida. Transactions of the 151 Gulf Coast Association of Geological Societies 19:445-463. This paper discusses the morphology and sediments of large shoals adjacent to Alligator Spit, south of Alligator Harbor, Franklin County, Florida. 715 Kornicker, L. S., and M. Bowen. 1976. Sarsiella ozotothrix, a new species of marine Ostracoda (Myodocopina) from the Atlantic and Gulf coasts of North America. Proceedings of the Biological Soci- ety of Washington 88(46) :497-502. A description and drawings are included characterizing S_. ozo- tothrix from Massachusetts. Additional data are provided on this species in Long Island Sound, near Connecticut, and at Alligator Harbor, Florida, on the Gulf coast. 716 *Menzel , R. W. , ed. 1971. Checklist of the marine fauna and flora of the Apalachee Bay and St. George's Sound area. Florida State Uni- versity, Department of Oceanography. 126 pp. Presents a comprehensive list of flora and fauna for Alligator Harbor, Dog Island, St. George Island, and St. Vincent Island. 717 Warnke, D. A. 1967. Conditions of beach retrogression in a low energy environment. Zeitschrift fur Geomorphologie 11(1) :47-61 . Rates of recession are studied on Alligator Spit, Florida. Dog Island 718 ♦Menzel , R. W. , ed. 1971. Checklist of the marine fauna and flora of the Apalachee Bay and St. George's Sound area. Florida State Uni- versity, Department of Oceanography. 126 pp. Presents a comprehensive list of flora and fauna for Alligator Harbor, Dog Island, St. George Island, and St. Vincent Island. 719 *Stapor, F. W. , Jr. 1975. Holocene beach ridge plain development, northwest Florida. Pages 116-144 j_n R. W. Fairbridge ed. Contri- butions to coastal geomorphology. Gebruder Borntraeger, Berlin. Deals with formation of beach ridges in northwest Florida, their structure, and organization based on topographic pattern. Beach ridge patterns are given for Dog Island, St. George Island, St. Vincent Island, Cape San Bias, St. Joseph Spit, Beacon Hill and Shell Island. 152 720 *Tanner, W. F. 1971. Net kinetic energy in littoral transport. Science 172:1231-1232. This study examines the energy expended in unidirectional net littoral transport of sediment for six coastal drift cells includ- ing Dog Island, St. George Island, Cape St. George, Cape San Bias, and St. Joseph peninsula. 721 *Tanner, W. F. 1975. Historical beach changes, Florida "Big Bend" coast. Transactions of the Gulf Coast Association of Geological Societies 25:379-382. This study contains erosion and deposition rates for the "Big Bend" coastal area of Florida. Areas studied include Dog Island, St. George Island, St. Vincent Island, and St. Joseph Peninsula. St. George Island 722 Gorsline, D. S. 1967. Contrasts in coastal bay sediments on the Gulf and Pacific coasts. Pages 219-225 vn_ G. H. Lauff, ed. Estu- aries. American Association for the Advancement of Science, Pub- lication 83. This study includes discussion of Gulf and Atlantic coastal plains and the Florida Peninsula, particularly Apalachicola Bay, Florida, a composite of a true estuary, barrier island, lagoons, and open coastal embayments. 723 Machek, A. 1966. A study of deposition in the surf zone of a low- energy coastline. Florida State University, Coastal Research Notes 2(3):11-12. This article discusses the results of analyses on twelve samples taken from St. George Island, Florida--six from the beach facing the Gulf and six from that facing Apalachicola Bay. 724 *Menzel , R. W. , ed. 1971. Checklist of the marine fauna and flora of the Apalachee Bay and St. George's Sound area. Florida State Uni- versity, Department of Oceanography. 126 pp. Presents a comprehensive list of flora and fauna for Alligator Harbor, Dog Island, St. George Island, and St. Vincent Island. 725 Schnable, J. 1966. Development of part of the northwest Florida 153 coast. 14. Florida State University, Coastal Research Notes 2(2) : 13- This paper covers the results of an investigation in the Apala- chicola delta region relating to Pleistocene and Recent sediments. 726 Stapor, F. W. , Jr. 1973. Heavy mineral concentrating processes and density/shape/size equilibria in the marine and coastal dune sands of the Apalachicola, Florida, region. Journal of Sedimentary Petrology 43(2) :396-407. Discusses the two marine concentrating processes that operate to produce the heavy mineral deposits found on beaches in the vicinity of Apalachicola, Florida. Minerals include quartz, ilmenite, staurolite, and kyanite. 727 *Stapor, F. W. , Jr. 1975. Holocene beach ridge plain development, northwest Florida. Pages 116-144 i_n R. W. Fairbridge ed. Contri- butions to coastal geomorphology. Gebruder Borntraeger, Berlin. Deals with formation of beach ridges in northwest Florida, their structure, and organization based on topographic pattern. Beach ridge patterns are given for Dog Island, St. George Island, St. Vincent Island, Cape San Bias, St. Joseph Spit, Beacon Hill, and Shell Island. 728 *Tanner, W. Science F. 1971. Net 172:1231-1232. kinetic energy in littoral transport. This study examines the energy expended in unidirectional net littoral transport of sediment for six coastal drift cells includ- ing Dog Island, St. George Island, Cape St. George, Cape San Bias, and St. Joseph peninsula. 729 *Tanner, W. F. 1975. Historical beach changes, Florida "Big Bend" coast. Transactions of the Gulf Coast Association of Geological Societies 25:379-382. This study contains erosion and deposition rates for the "Big Bend" coastal area of Florida. Areas studied include Dog Island, St. George Island, St. Vincent Island, and St. Joseph Peninsula. St. Vincent Island 730 *Menzel R. W., ed. 1971. Checklist of the marine the Apalachee Bay and St. George's Sound area. fauna and flora of Florida State Uni- 154 versity, Department of Oceanography. 126 pp. Presents a comprehensive list of flora and fauna for Alligator Harbor, Dog Island, St. George Island, and St. Vincent Island. 731 *Stapor, F. W., Jr. 1975. HoloCene beach ridge plain development, northwest Florida. Pages 116-144 in'R. W. Fairbridge ed. Contri- butions to coastal geomorphology. Gebruder Borntraeger, Berlin. Deals with formation of beach ridges in northwest Florida, their structure, and organization based on topographic pattern. Beach ridge patterns are given for Dog Island, St. George Island, St. Vincent Island, Cape San Bias, St. Joseph Spit, Beacon Hill, and Shell Island. 732 *Tanner, W. F. 1975. Historical beach changes, Florida "Big Bend" coast. Transactions of the Gulf Coast Association of Geological Societies 25:379-382. This study contains erosion and deposition rates for the "Big Bend" coastal area of Florida. Areas studied include Dog Island, St. George Island, St. Vincent Island, and St. Joseph Peninsula. 733 Tanner, W. F., ed. 1974. Sediment transport in the nearshore zone. Proceedings of a symposium at Florida State University, Tallahas- see, 26 January 1974. Florida State University, Tallahassee. 147 pp. This is a study of coastal cells along the Florida Panhandle coast, and Florida-Georgia-South Carolina coast. A model devel- oped to study these coasts has also been applied to St. Vincent Island. Indian Peninsula Cape San Bias 734 Florida State University. 1974. A sedimentological investigation of coastal cells from Cape San Bias to Indian Pass, Florida. Flor- ida State University, Coastal Research Notes 4(1):16. A sedimentological study of beach sand near Cape San Bias indi- cates a number of longshore drift cells in which the direction of decreasing grain size, increasing sorting, and a decreasing per- centage of unstable minerals is found. 155 735 May, J. P. 1973. Response to variation of nearshore wave energy. Florida State University, Coastal Research Notes 3(11) :2-4. Outlines interaction between wave input, sediment, and topogra- phy in the St. Joseph Spit study area. 736 *Stapor, F. W. , Jr. 1975. Holocene beach ridge plain development, northwest Florida. Pages 116-144 j_n R. W. Fairbridge ed. Contri- butions to coastal geomorphology. Gebruder Borntraeger, Berlin. Deals with formation of beach ridges in northwest Florida, their structure, and organization based on topographic pattern. Beach ridge patterns are given for Dog Island, St. George Island, St. Vincent Island, Cape San Bias, St. Joseph Spit, Beacon Hill, and Shell Island. 737 *Tanner, W. F. 1971. Net kinetic eneray in littoral transport. Science 172:1231-1232. This study examines the energy expended in unidirectional net littoral transport of sediment for six coastal drift cells includ- ing Dog Island, St. George Island, Cape St. George, Cape San Bias, and St. Joseph peninsula. 738 *Tanner, W. F. 1975. Historical beach changes, Florida "Big Bend" coast. Transactions of the Gulf Coast Association of Geological Societies 25:379-382. This study contains erosion and deposition rates for the "Big Bend" coastal area of Florida. Areas studied include Dog Island, St. George Island, St. Vincent Island, and St. Joseph Peninsula. Crooked Island 739 *Stapor, F. 1973. History and sand budgets of the barrier island system in the Panama City, Florida, reaion. Marine Geology 14(4): 227-286. This article explores the history of alternating integration and fragmentation of Shell Island and Crooked island peninsulas near Panama City, Florida. Rates of erosion and deposition are also explored. 156 Shell Island 740 *Stapor, F. W., Jr. 1975. Holocene beach ridge plain development, northwest Florida. Pages 116-144 in R. W. Fairbridge ed. Contri- butions to coastal geomorphology. Gebruder Borntraeger, Berlin. Deals with formation of beach ridges in northwest Florida, their structure, and organization based on topographic pattern. Beach ridge patterns are given for Dog Island, St. George Island, St. Vincent Island, Cape San Bias, St. Joseph Spit, Beacon Hill, and Shell Island. St. Andrew Miramar Santa Rosa Island 741 Gunn, C. R., and J. V. Dennis. 1973. Tropical and temperate stranded seeds and fruits from the Gulf of Mexico. University of Texas, Contributions in Marine Science 17:111-121. This article discusses the frequent strandings of buoyant tropi- cal seeds and fruits (disseminules) on northern and western Gulf of Mexico beaches, such as Padre Island, Texas; Santa Rosa Island, Florida; northward along the west Texas coast; and along the west- ern coast of Louisiana. 742 Kwon, H. J. 1969. Barrier islands of the northern Gulf of Mexico coast: sediment source and development. Louisiana State Univer- sity Press, Baton Rouge. 51 pp. Santa Rosa Island, the Mississippi Sound barrier islands, Bolivar Peninsula, the interdeltaic barrier arc of southeast Texas, and the Mississippi Delta barrier islands are all discussed in relation to source of sediments and littoral processes. 743 Sonu, C. J., S. P. Murray, S-A. Hsu, J. N. Suhayda, and E. Waddell. 1973. Sea breeze and coastal processes. Louisiana State Univer- sity, Coastal Studies Institute, Technical Report 153. 17 pp. This report describes a field program conducted at Santa Rosa Island to determine the amplitude, phase, and frequency character- istics of waves, currents, and beach topography to the diurnal excitation of a sea breeze system. 157 744 *Stapor, F. W. , Jr. 1975. Shoreline changes between Phillips Inlet and Pensacola Inlet, northwest Florida coast. Transactions of the Gulf Coast Association of Geological Societies 25:373-378. Topographic and hydrographic surveys were used to measure erosion and deposition along the northwest Florida Gulf coast between Phillips Inlet and Pensacola Inlet. No significant net shoreline change was measured. Some erosion was noted on Santa Rosa Island. 745 Waddell, E. 1973. Dynamics of swash and implication to beach re- sponse. Louisiana State University, Baton Rouge, Coastal Studies Institute, Technical Report TR-139. 61 pp. Presents results of a field investigation of the swash process on a natural sand beach and the interaction of swash with input waves, beach ground water, and beach sand levels on Santa Rosa Island, Florida. Perdido Key East 158 ALABAMA 746 *Bault, E. I. 1972. Hydrology of Alabama estuarine areas—coopera- tive Gulf of Mexico estuarine inventory. Alabama Marine Resources Bulletin No. 7:1-36. Twenty-one hydrological stations in five Alabama estuarine areas were sampled monthly from January 1968 through March 1969. 747 *Crance, J. H. 1971. Description of Alabama estuarine areas—cooper- ative Gulf of Mexico estuarine inventory. Alabama Marine Resources Bulletin No. 6:1-85. The physical characteristics of Alabama estuarine areas are pre- sented, including the offshore islands. The importance of estu- aries as nursery areas for marine species and for other uses is discussed, and the early history of the exploration and develop- ment of the Gulf of Mexico and the coastal area of Alabama is re- viewed. 748 Plumb, J. A., J. H. Schacte, J. L. Gaines, W. Peltier, and B. Carroll 1974. Streptococcus sp. from marine fishes along the Alabama and northwest Florida coast of the Gulf of Mexico. Transactions of the American Fisheries Society 103(2) : 358-361 . Fish kills in estuarine bays along the Florida and Alabama Gulf coasts during August and September 1972 are discussed, based on examination of eight species of moribund fish. 749 *Shepard, F. P., and H. R. Wanless. 1971. Alternating white beaches and swamps: West Florida to Mississippi Sound. Pages 162-197 in_ F. P. Shepard and H. R. Wanless, Our changing coastlines. McGraw- Hill, New York. Provides a detailed physical description for the following is- lands and beach areas. Florida: Cape Sable area, Ponce de Leon Bay and the Everglades, Ten Thousand Islands area, Cape Romano, Estero Bay, Sanibel Island- Charlotte Harbor, Tampa Bay and Pinellas peninsula, Honeymoon Is- land and Hurricane Pass, Homosassa Bay area, Cedar Keys-Suwanee River area, Fenholloway River, Ochlockonee Bay, Dog Island and Dog Island "Reef," Apalachicola-St. Vincent Island area, Cape San Bias 159 and St. Joseph Spit area, Panama City area, Choctawhatchee Bay and Santa Rosa Island, Pensacola Bay, Perdido Bay. Alabama: Perdido Bay, Mobile Bay. Mississippi : Horn Island* Gulfport-Ship Island, Cat Island. 750 ♦Swingle, H. A. 1971. Biology of Alabama estuarine areas—coopera- tive Gulf of Mexico estuarine inventory. Alabama Marine Resources Bulletin No. 5:1-123. Covers the vertebrates and invertebrates of Alabama's entire estuarine area. Perdido Key West Romar Beach . Mobile Point Sand Island Dauphin Island 751 *Sapp, C. D., J. G. Emplaincourt, and J. D. Hardin. 1975. Remote sensing of shoreline dynamics, Mobile Bay area, 1900-1975. Trans- actions of the Gulf Coast Association of Geological Societies 25: 153-167. This study documents the direction and magnitude of the move- ment of the coastal shoreline of Alabama. Dauphin Island's shore- line is said to be eroding at a rapid rate. 160 MISSISSIPPI 752 ♦Christmas, J. Y., ed. 1973. Cooperative Gulf of Mexico estuarine inventory and study, Mississippi. Gulf Coast Research Laboratory, Ocean Springs, Mississippi. 434 pp. This study represents a portion of the larger Cooperative Gulf of Mexico Estuarine Inventory and Study, which was done in cooper- ation with the National Marine Fisheries Service and was conducted in the Gulf Coast states—Alabama, Florida, Louisiana, Mississippi, and Texas. The publication consists of four phases of study: area description, hydrology, sedimentology, and biology. The off- shore islands are included under each phase of study. 753 *Irby, B. N., and D. McCaughan. 1975. Guide to the marine resources of Mississippi. Mississippi-Alabama Sea Grant Consortium, Ocean Springs, Mississippi; National Oceanographic and Atmospheric Ad- ministration, Rockville, Maryland; and University of Southern Mississippi, Hattiesburg. 35T pp. This report provides a summary of information about Mississippi marine resources, including data on barrier islands and the Missis- sippi Sound. 754 Kwon, H. J. 1969. Barrier islands of the northern Gulf of Mexico coast: sediment source and development. Louisiana State Univer- sity Press, Baton Rouge. 51 pp. Santa Rosa Island, The Mississippi Sound barrier islands, Boli- var Peninsula, the interdeltaic barrier arc of southeast Texas, and the Mississippi Delta barrier islands are all discussed in relation to source of sediments and littoral processes. 755 ♦Shepard, F. P., and H. R. Wanless. 1971. Alternating white beaches and swamps: West Florida to Mississippi Sound. Pages 162-197 j_n F. P. Shepard and H. R. Wanless, Our changing coastlines. McGraw- Hill, New York. Provides a detailed physical description for the following is- lands and beach areas: Florida: Cape Sable area, Ponce de Leon Bay and the Everglades, Ten Thousand Islands area, Cape Romano, Estero Bay, Sanibel Island- Charlotte Harbor, Tampa Bay and Pinellas peninsula, Honeymoon 161 Island and Hurricane Pass, Homosassa Bay area, Cedar Keys-Suwannee River area, Fenholloway River, Ochlockonee Bay, Dog Island and Dog Island "Reef," Apalachicola-St. Vincent Island area, Cape San Bias and St. Joseph Spit area, Panama City area, Choctawhatchee Bay and Santa Rosa Island, Pensacola Bay, Perdido Bay. Alabama: Perdido Bay, Mobile Bay. Mississippi : Horn Island, Gulfport-Ship Island, Cat Island. Petit Bois Island 756 *Eleuterius, L. N. 1972. The marshes of Mississippi. Castanea 37: 153-168. This paper presents the results of a 1968-1969 study to deter- mine the composition, area, zonation, and organic production of marsh vegetation along the Mississippi coast, including specifi- cally Deer, Petit Bois, Horn, Ship, and Cat islands. 757 Waller, T. H., and L. P. Malbrough. 1976. Temporal changes in the offshore islands of Mississippi. Mississippi State University, Mississippi Water Resources Research Institute, Completion Re- port. 109 pp. Deals with historical monitoring of Petit Bois, Horn, Ship, and Cat islands and the recording of shoreline changes as an insight into factors affecting these changes. Horn Island 758 *Eleuterius, L. N. 1972. The marshes of Mississippi. Castanea 37: 153-168. This paper presents the results of a 1968-1969 study to deter- mine the composition, area, zonation, and organic production of marsh vegetation along the Mississippi coast, including specifi- cally Deer, Petit Bois, Horn, Ship, and Cat islands. 759 *Franks, J. S. 1970. An investigation of the fish population within the inland waters of Horn Island, Mississippi, a barrier island in the northern Gulf of Mexico. Gulf Research Reports 3(1) :3-104. Subjects covered include fishes, population composition, species list, salinity data, and barrier islands of the northern Gulf, par- ticularly Horn Island, on the Mississippi Sound. 162 760 Harrison, W. E. 1973. Heavy minerals of Horn Island, northern Gulf of Mexico. Journal of Sedimentary Petrology, 43(2) : 391-395. Discusses heavy mineral assemblage of Horn Island and suggests that these minerals come from the crystalline metamorphic region in east-central Alabama and west-central Georgia. 761 *Hoyt, J. H. 1970. Development and migration of barrier islands, northern Gulf of Mexico: discussion. Geological Society of Ameri- ca Bulletin 81:3779-3782. Discusses formation of barrier islands in the northern Gulf of Mexico. Specific areas mentioned include the Chandeleur Islands, Grand Gosier Island, Galveston Island, Laguna Madre Island, Padre Island, and Horn Island. 762 Pessin, L. J., and T. D. Burleigh. 1941. Notes on the forest biol- ogy of Horn Island, Mississippi. Ecology 22( 1) : 70-78. This article makes observations regarding the vegetation, birds, and rodents of Horn Island, which is 13 miles southeast of Biloxi, Mississippi . 763 *Priddy, R. R., and B. L. Smith. 1960. Recent sedimentation on Horn Island, Mississippi. Gulf Coast Association of Geological Socie- ties, Guidebook for Cenozoic Field Trips, pp. 5-8. A discussion of the sedimentational and erosional aspects of Horn Island, Mississippi, one of the- chain of sandy, barrier islands spearating Mississippi Sound from the Gulf of Mexico. 764 *Richmond, E. A. 1962. The fauna and flora of Horn Island, Missis- sippi. Gulf Research Reports 1(2) :59-106. The article includes lists of animals and plants collected on or in the waters around Horn Island in 1944, 1945, and 1959-1961, in- clusive; as well as species recorded by other investigators. 765 ♦Richmond, E. A. 1968. A supplement to the fauna and flora of Horn Island, Mississippi (checklist). Gulf Research Reports 2(3) :213- 254. This supplement to the 1962 paper includes lists of animal and plant species recorded on Horn Island from 1962 to 1966, inclusive, and contains additional references (since 1962 paper). 163 766 Waller, T. H., and L. P. Malbrough. 1976. Temporal changes in the offshore islands of Mississippi. Mississippi State University, Mississippi Water Resources Research Institute, Completion Report. 109 pp. Deals with historical monitoring of Petit Bois, Horn, Ship, and Cat Islands and the recording of shoreline changes as an insight into factors affecting these changes. 767 *Walton, W. R. 1960. Diagnostic fauna! characteristics on and near a barrier island, Horn Island, Mississippi. Transactions of the Gulf Coast Association of Geological Societies 10:7-24. Approximately 200 sediment samples taken from a modern barrier island are discussed, and the variations in faunal characteristics are described for nine environmental zones on or near Horn Island. Deer Island 768 *Eleuterius, L. N. 1972. The marshes of Mississippi. Castanea 37: 153-168. This paper presents the results of a 1968-1969 study to deter- mine the composition, area, zonation, and organic production of marsh vegetation along the Mississippi coast, including specifi- cally Deer, Petit Bois, Horn, Ship, and Cat islands. Ship Island 769 *Eleuterius, L. N. 1972. The marshes of Mississippi. Castanea 37: 153-168. This paper presents the results of a 1968-1969 study to deter- mine the composition, area, zonation, and organic production of marsh vegetation along the Mississippi coast, including specifi- cally Deer, Petit Bois, Horn, Ship, and Cat islands. 770 Humm, H. J., and R. L. Caylor. 1957. The summer marine flora of Mississippi Sound. University of Texas, Publications of the Insti- tute of Marine Science 4(2) :228-264. This article discusses the 77 species of marine and brackish water algae that comprise the principal summer flora of Mississippi Sound. The principal collecting stations were located on and off 164 Ship Island and at the Gulf Coast Research Laboratory just east of Ocean Springs. 771 Miller, G. J., and S. B. Jones. 1967. The vascular flora of Ship Island, Mississippi. Castanea 32(2):84-99. A checklist of the flora of Ship Island is presented, which in- cludes 319 species in 78 families. 772 Waller, T. H. , and L. P. Malbrough. 1976. Temporal changes in the offshore islands of Mississippi. Mississippi State University, Mississippi Water Resources Research Institute, Completion Report. 109 pp. Deals with historical monitoring of Petit Bois, Horn, Ship, and Cat Islands and the recording of shoreline changes as an insight into factors affecting these changes. Cat Island 773 *Eleuterius, L. N. 1972. The marshes of Mississippi. Castanea 37: 153-168. This paper presents the results of a 1968-1969 study to deter- mine the composition, area, zonation, and organic production of marsh vegetation along the Mississippi coast, including specifi- cally Deer, Petit Bois, Horn, Ship, and Cat islands. 774 Krutak, P. R. 1975. Environmental variation in living and total populations of Holocene Foraminifera and Ostracoda, coastal Mis- sissippi, USA. American Association of Petroleum Geology, Bulle- tin 59(1):140-145. Quantitative bottom samples are described from seven subenviron- ments of the Bay St. Louis and Cat Island barrier-island complex, Mississippi . 775 *Penfound, W. T., and M. E. O'Neill. 1934. The vegetation of Cat Island, Mississippi. Ecology 15:10-16. Describes Cat Island and its vegetation of pine-oak forest, marsh, grassland, and sand dunes. 776 Perry, H. M. 1972. Notes on the life history of the blue crab, Cal- linectes sapidus Rathbun, in Mississippi Sound and adjacent waters. 165 Journal of the Mississippi Academy of Sciences 18:63. Seasonal and areal distribution and relative abundance of larval, postlarval , juvenile and adult blue crabs are reported, along with associated hydrological factors. Specific data are included for Cat Island. 777 Waller, T. H. , and L. P. Malbrough. 1976. Temporal changes in the offshore islands of Mississippi. Mississippi State University, Mississippi Water Resources Research Institute, Completion Report. 109 pp. Deals with historical monitoring of Petit Bois, Horn, Ship, and Cat islands and the recording of shoreline changes as an insight into factors affecting these changes. 166 LOUISIANA 778 *Coastal Studies Institute. 1955. A geographical and geological study of the Louisiana coast with emphasis upon establishment of the his- toric shoreline. Louisiana State University, Baton Rouge. 37 pp. + Appendix. This report presents an evaluation of the shoreline of Louisiana in light of physical processes which have been modifying it for the past 150 years. 779 Gunn, C. R., and J. V. Dennis. 1973. Tropical and temperate strand- ed seeds and fruits from the Gulf of Mexico. University of Texas, Contributions in Marine Science 17:111-121. This article discusses the frequent strandings of buoyant tropi- cal seeds and fruits (disseminules) on northern and western Gulf of Mexico beaches, such as Padre Island, Texas; Santa Rosa Island, Florida; northward along the west Texas coast; and along the west- ern coast of Louisiana. 780 *King, K. A., E. L. Flickinger, and H. H. Hildebrand. 1977. The de- cline of brown pelicans on the Louisiana and Texas Gulf coast. Southwest Naturalist 21:417-431. This article describes the rapid decline in numbers of brown pelicans found along the Louisiana and Texas coasts. 781 Kwon, H. J. 1969. Barrier islands of the northern Gulf of Mexico coast: sediment source and development. Louisiana State Univer- sity Press, Baton Rouge. 51 pp. Santa Rosa Island, the Mississippi Sound barrier islands, Boli- var Peninsula, the interdeltaic barrier arc of southeast Texas, and the Mississippi Delta barrier islands are all discussed in re- lation to source of sediments and littoral processes. 782 *Louisiana Wild Life and Fisheries Commission. 1971. Cooperative Gulf of Mexico estuarine inventory and study, Louisiana, New Orleans. 2 vols. The two volumes cover the entire estuarine area of Louisiana, including the offshore islands. The first volume describes the 167 area and its biology while the second volume ogy and sedimentology. discusses the hydrol- 783 *Russell, R. J. 1967. River plains and California Press, Berkeley. 173 pp. sea coasts. University of A general work on geomorphic aspects of river plain and sea coast development. Chapter on coastal morphology is generally relevant to barrier islands. Louisiana coast and Outer Banks, North Carolina, are mentioned. 784 *Shepard, F. P., and H. R. Wanless. 1971. Pages 198-225 iin F. P. Shepard and H. coastlines. McGraw-Hill, New York. Deltaic coasts: Louisiana, R. Wanless, Our changing Provides a detailed physical description of the following is- lands and estuarine areas in Louisiana: drowned St. Bernard delta, Chandeleur Islands, Barataria Bay, Lafourche-Timbalier-Terrebonne area, Atachafalaya Bay-Marsh Island area, Chenier plain-Vermilion Parish, and Chenier plain-Cameron Parish. 785 U. S. Army Corps of Engineers. 1971. National shoreline study: in- ventory report-lower Mississippi region. New Orleans District, Louisiana. 57 pp. + 37 plates. Report is general summary of information on the shoreline of Louisiana (which contains a number of small barrier islands) in- cluding data on extent and nature of erosion, identification of problem areas, ownership, and present use. Chandeleur Island Group 786 *Hoyt, J. H. 1970. Development and migration of barrier islands, northern Gulf of Mexico: discussion. Geological Society of Amer- ica Bulletin 81:3779-3782. Discusses formation of barrier islands in the northern Gulf of Mexico. Specific areas mentioned include the Chandeleur Islands, Grand Gosier Island, Galveston Island, Laguna Madre Island, Padre Island, and Horn Island. 787 Lemaire, R. J. 1961. A preliminary annotated checklist of the vas- cular plants of the Chandeleur and adjacent islands, St. Bernard and Plaquemines parishes, Louisiana. Proceedings of the Louisiana Academy of Sciences 24:116-122. 168 Discusses flora of Chandeleur Islands, Grand Gossier Island, Breton Island, Freemason Island, and New Harbor Islands. 788 *Morgan, J. P., and R. C. Treadwell . 1954. Cemented sandstone slabs of the Chandeleur Islands, Louisiana. Journal of Sedimentary Pe- trology 24(2) :71-75. This article discusses the results of in-field investigations of the factors causing the formation of cemented slabs of fine-grained sandstone, which litter the beach along the central Chandeleur Is- lands, St. Bernard Parish, Louisiana. 789 Roberts, H. H. , and T. Whelan III. 1975. Methane-derived carbonate cements in barrier mud beach sands of a subtropical delta complex. Geochimica and Cosmochimica Acta 39(8) : 1085-1090. Discusses carbonate cements found in Recent barrier and beach sands of the Mississippi River Delta complex and their relation to cemented sands on beaches of the Chandeleur barrier island chain. 790 *Wright, L. D. , F. J. Swaye, and J. M. Coleman. 1970. Effects of Hurricane Camille on the landscape of the Breton-Chandeleur Island chain and the eastern portion of the lower Mississippi Delta. Louisiana State University, Coastal Studies Institute, Bulletin No. 4:13-34. Significant modifications to the natural landscape of the Breton- Chandeleur Island area were noted after the passage of Hurricane Camille. Hurricane-induced mass transport of water is also dis- cussed. Grand Gosier Island 791 *Hoyt, J. H. 1970. Development and migration of barrier islands, northern Gulf of Mexico: discussion. Geological Society of Amer- ica Bulletin 81:3779-3782. Discusses formation of barrier islands in the northern Gulf of Mexico. Specific areas mentioned include the Chandeleur Islands, Grand Gosier Island, Galveston Island, Laguna Madre Island, Padre Island, and Horn Island. 792 Lemaire, R. J. 1961. A preliminary annotated checklist of the vas- cular plants of the Chandeleur and adjacent islands, St. Bernard and Plaquemines parishes, Louisiana. Proceedings of the Louisiana Academy of Sciences 24:116-122. 169 Discusses flora of Chandeleur Islands, Grand Gossier Island, Breton Island, Freemason Island, and New Harbor Islands. Breton Islands 793 Gould, E. , and J. Ewan. 1975. Phytogeographic and ecologic relation- ships of the flora of Breton Island, Louisiana. Tulane Studies in Zoology and Botany 19(1 & 2):26-36. The flora of Breton Island, Plaquemines Parish, southeastern Louisiana, 3 miles long and 0.5 mile wide, was studied intermit- tently between 1958 and 1962, which includes the year the island was bisected by a hurricane. 794 Lemaire, R. J. 1961. A preliminary annotated checklist of the vas- cular plants of the Chandeleur and adjacent islands, St. Bernard and Plaquemines parishes, Louisiana. Proceedings of the Louisiana Academy of Sciences 24:116-122. Discusses flora of Chandeleur Islands, Grand Gossier Island, Breton Island, Freemason Island, and New Harbor Islands. 795 *Negus, N. C, E. Gould, and R. K. Chapman. 1961. Ecology of the LU i uyjr Ul L.IIC Island, Gulf of ry. Tulane gus, N. C, E. Gould, and R. K. Chapman. 1961. Ei rice rat, Oryzomys palustris (Harlan), on Breton Mexico, with a critique of the social stress theo Studies in Zoology 8:95-123. Provides description of Breton Island and contains photographs and maps. 796 *Wright, L. D. , F. J. Swaye, and J. M. Coleman. 1970. Effects of Hurricane Camille on the landscape of the Breton-Chandeleur Island chain and the eastern portion of the lower Mississippi Delta. Louisiana State University, Coastal Studies Institute, Bulletin No. 4:13-34. Significant modifications to the natural landscape of the Breton- Chandeleur Island area were noted after the passage of Hurricane Camille. Hurricane-induced mass transport of water is also dis- cussed. Sable I; ;land Raccoon Point Coquille Point Bird I: ;land 170 Pelican Island Bastian Island Bay Joe Wise Bay Ronquill LaMer e Island Grand Terre Island Grc up 797 *Bateman, H. A., Jr. 1965. Clapper rail (Rallus longirostrus) studies on Grand Terre Island, Jefferson Parish, Louisiana. Louisiana Wild Life and Fisheries Commission, Baton Rouge. 144 pp. The objectives of the study were to investigate and develop meth- ods of trapping, field marking, and external sexing and aging of clapper rails. Fall food habits, internal parasites, censusing, and nesting of clapper rails on Grand Terre Island were also in- vestigated. Grand Isle 798 *Behre, E. H. 1950. Annotated list of the fauna of the Grand Island region. Louisiana State University, Occasional Papers of Marine Laboratory No. 6:1-66. Provides a comprehensive list of the fauna of the Grand Isle region, along with a list of associated flora. 799 Conatser, W. E. 1969. The Grand Isle barrier island complex. Ph.D. Thesis. Tulane University, New Orleans, Louisiana. 262 pp. (Dissertation Abstracts 30:3759-B.) Examines the composition and geography of the Grand Isle barrier island complex. 800 *Conatser, W. E. 1971. Grand Isle: a barrier island in the Gulf of Mexico. Geological Society of America Bulletin 82(11 ) :3049-3068. Discusses the geomorphology, sediment characteristics, and stra- tigraphy of Grand Isle, Louisiana. 171 801 *Loesch, H. C. 1957. Studies of the ecology of two species of Donax on Mustang Island, Texas. University of Texas, Publications of the Institute of Marine Science 4(2) :201-226. The data presented in this paper are the results of an ecologi- cal study of two species of Donax on Mustang Island, Texas, with supplementary observations at Grand Isle, Louisiana. 802 *Theis, A. R. 1969. Shore and Beach Beach erosion problems at Grand Isle, Louisiana, 37(1) :19-22. This article discusses how Grand Isle, a former outlet of the Mississippi River through its Bayou Lafourche route, is now expe- riencing beach erosion because its supply of material from the river was halted by flood protection devices. Caminada East Timbalier Island Timbalier Island Isles Dernieres 172 TEXAS 803 ♦Bureau of Economic Geology. Various years. Environmental geologic atlas of the Texas coastal zone. University of Texas at Austin. 7 unnumbered volumes. An overview (with maps) of the geology, physical properties, en- vironments, biologic assemblages, land use, mineral resources, energy resources, active processes, man-made features, water sys- tems, rainfall, stream discharge, surface salinity, topography, and bathymetry of the entire coastal area of Texas, including the barrier strandplain system. The report consists of seven unnumbered volumes published in the 1970' s: Beaumont-Port Arthur area; Galves- ton-Houston area; Bay City-Freeport area; Port Lavaca area; Corpus Christi area; Kingsville area; and Brownsville-Harlingen area. 804 Davis, R. A., Jr. 1971. Beach changes on the central Texas coast associated with Hurricane Fern, September, 1971. University of Texas, Contributions in Marine Sciences No. 16:89-98. Deals with erosional effects of Hurricane Fern (1971) on the central Texas barrier island system. Cites rate of storm move- ment as one of most significant factors and concludes that post- storm recovery of the beach is quite slow. 805 *Diener, R. A. 1975. Cooperative Gulf of Mexico estuarine inventory and study—Texas: area description. National Marine Fisheries Service, Circular 393. 129 pp. Describes the geology, flora, fauna, and economic development of the Texas estuarine area, including the barrier islands. 806 Feray, D. E., D. W. Woodard, B. E. Dahl , and R. L. Baker. 1970. The use of grasses for dune stabilization along the Gulf coast with initial emphasis on the Texas coast. Gulf Universities Research Consortium, Final Report, 1969-1970. 73 pp. This article discusses effort to establish vegetative cover along Texas barrier islands for storm surge protection. 807 Forsyth, B. J., and D. James. 1971. Springtime movements of tran- sient nocturnal ly migrating landbirds in the Gulf Coast Bend region of Texas. Condor 73(2) : 192-207. 173 This article discusses the characteristics of nocturnal migra- tion of transient land birds in the Coast Bend region of south Texas. 808 Gaumer, G. C. 1969. Coastal tiger beetle Cicindela (Coleoptera: Ciciendel idae) . of Texas in the genus Cicindela 1(1) :2-16. The article analyzes the distribution, habitat and period of occurrence for the Cicindela species found along the Texas coast. 809 Gould, F. W. , and T. W. Box. 1965. Grasses of the Texas Coastal Bend (Calhoun, Refugio, Aransas, San Patricio, and Northern Kle- berg counties). Texas A & M University Press, College Station, Texas. 186 pp. This taxonomic monograph treats five subfamilies and 18 tribes of grass genera of the Texas Coastal Bend. 810 Gunn, C. R. , and J. V. Dennis. 1973. Tropical and temperate strand- ed seeds and fruits from the Gulf of Mexico. University of Texas, Contributions in Marine Science 17:111-121. This article discusses the frequent strandings of buoyant tropi- cal seeds and fruits (disseminules) on northern and western Gulf of Mexico beaches, such as Padre Island, Texas; Santa Rosa Island, Florida; northward along the west Texas coast; and along the west- ern coast of Louisiana. 811 Hayes, M. 0. 1964. Previous geological studies. Pages 158-170 i_n Depositional environments, south-central Texas coast. Gulf Coast Association of Geological Societies. Annual Meeting, 1964, Field Trip Guidebook. Austin, Texas. Numerous references pertaining to the different nearshore en- vironmental complexes of the south-central Texas coast are tabu- lated. The coastal area is divided into inner neritic zone, bar- rier island complex, wind-tidal flats, lagoon-bay complex, and aeolian sand plain. 812 Herbich, J. B. 1971. Comparison of model and beach scour patterns. Pages 1281-1300 jm Coastal engineering. Vol. 2. Proceedings of 12th Coastal Engineering Conference. ASCE, New York. Discusses how relations between scour depth and sand crest wave length, between trough depth and sand bar depth, and between wave characteristics and beach scour were established for selected lo- cations along the Texas Gulf coast. 174 813 Hill, G. W. , and R. E. Hunter. 1973. Burrows of the ghost crab Ocypode quadrata (Fabricius) on the barrier islands, south-central Texas coast. Journal of Sedimentary Petrology 43(1) :24-30. Data are presented on the shape, diameter, length, orientation, and area! density of the burrows of the grapsoid crab on Texas barrier islands. These data are used to define subenvironments of the beach and foredune ridge. 814 Kier, R. S., W. A. White, and W. L. Fisher. 1974. Establishment of operational guidelines for Texas coastal zone management. Resource capability units II: land resources of the Coastal Bend region, Texas. University of Texas at Austin, Division of Natural Re- sources and Environment. 281 pp. This report contains data on geology, soils, and substrate, biology, hydrology, physical properties, chemistry, and natural processes for the following types of land units: coastal plain, active floodplain, barrier island, biologic system, manmade sys- tem, and bay, lagoon, and estuary system. 815 *LeBlanc, R. J., and W. D. Hodgson. 1959. Origin and development of the Texas shoreline. Pages 57-101 i_n Second Coastal Geography Conference. Louisiana State University, Baton Rouge. Two types of Texas shorelines are discussed: the Gulf shoreline which is the seaward edge of the barrier islands and deltaic plains; and the bay shoreline which lies at the edge of the main- land and behind the barrier islands. 816 Mclntire, W. G. , and C. Ho. 1969. Development of barrier island lagoons: western Gulf of Mexico. Louisiana State University, Coastal Studies Institute, Technical Report No. 92. 14 pp. Deals with the origin, development, and evolution of barrier island lagoons. 817 *Moffett, A. W. 1967. The shrimp fishery in Texas. Texas Parks and Wildlife Department, Bulletin 50. 36 pp. This bulletin indicates that the life histories of all Texas commercial shrimps are similar. In general, the young, hatched in the Gulf of Mexico, are carried by on-shore water movements to the shallow estuaries and coastal lagoons, where they feed, grow rap- idly and ultimately return to the Gulf spawning grounds. 175 818 Paun, G. G, coast. 1970. Pygmy sperm whales, genus Kogia, on the Texas Texas Journal of Science. 21(3) :269-274. A fourth record of a stranded pygmy sperm whale from the Texas Coast is reported and comparison made with other specimens. 819 Potter, J. L., and T. J. Mabry. 1972. Origin of the Texas Gulf coast island populations of Ambrosia psilostachya: a numerical study using terpenoid data. Phytochemistry 11(2) :715-723. Data are analyzed on the volatile terpene and sesquiterpene lac- tone patterns for 20 populations of A. psilostachya from the Texas mainland and Gulf coast islands and seven populations of A. cuma- nensis from near Vera Cruz, Mexico. 820 Seelig, W. N., and R. M. Sorensen. Shore and Beach 41(2) :23-25. 1973. Texas shoreline changes, Discusses loss of 18,000 acres of Texas land in past 100 years due to decreased sediment input and increased deltaic storage in conjunction with associated forces removing sediment from the coastal zone. 821 *Shepard, F. P., and H. R. Wanless. 1971. Barrier island coast: Texas. Pages 226-255 jjn_ F. P. Shepard and H. R. Wanless, Our changing coastlines. McGraw-Hill, New York. Provides a detailed physical description for the following is- lands and beach areas in Texas: High Island, Galveston Island and Bay, San Luis Pass, Freeport-Brazos River delta area, Colorado River delta, Matagorda peninsula, Rockport area, Corpus Christi Bay and Mustang Island, Padre Island and Laguna Madre, Rio Grande delta area. Bolivar Peninsula 822 Kwon, H. J. 1969. Barrier islands of the northern Gulf of Mexico coast: sediment source and development. Louisiana State Univer- sity Press, Baton Rouge. 51 pp. Santa Rosa Island, the Mississippi Sound barrier islands, Bolivar Peninsula, the interdeltaic barrier arc of southeast Texas, and the Mississippi Delta barrier islands are all discussed in relation to source of sediments and littoral processes. 176 823 Morton, R. A. 1974. Shoreline changes between Sabine Pass and Boli- var Roads, an analysis of historical changes of the Texas Gulf shoreline. Texas Bureau of Economic Geolooy, Geoloqical Circular 75-6. 43 pp. Presents results of historical monitoring of the nature and mag- nitude of changes in position of the shoreline and vegetation line and provides insight into factors affecting these changes. Galveston Island 824 *Bernard, H. A., C. F. Major, Jr., and B. S. Parrott. 1959. The Galveston barrier island and environs: a model for predicting reservoir occurrence and trend. Gulf Coast Association of Geo- logical Societies Transactions 9:221-224. This article explains the geological processes, setting, history, lithologic character, genesis and sequence, directional features, shape, and trend of the Galveston barrier island. 825 Bernard, H. A., C. F. Major, Jr., B. S. Parrott, and R. J. LeBlanc, Sr. 1970. Recent sediments of southeast Texas--a field guide to the the Brazos alluvial and deltaic plains and the Galveston barrier island complex. University of Texas at Austin, Bureau of Economic Geology, Guidebook 11. 83 pp. This is a reprint of a field guide, prepared by Shell Develop- ment Company, which includes summaries and well-illustrated docu- mentation of clastic depositional environments and related facies of the southeastern Texas coast, particularly the Galveston bar- rier island complex. 826 Davies, D. K. , F. G. Ethridge, and R. R. Berg. 1971. Recognition of barrier environments. American Association of Petroleum Geoloaists Bulletin 55(4) :550-565. States that vertical succession of sedimentary structures and textures at Galveston Barrier Island, Texas, is identical with those in two ancient barrier complexes (England and Montana). Con- cludes that environments may be distinguished on the basis of thin- section analyses. 827 Gage, B. 0. 1970. Experimental dunes of the Texas coast. U.S. Army, Corps of Engineers, Coastal Engineering Research Center, Miscel- laneous Paper No. 1-70. 34 pp. 177 This publication reports on experimental means of creating and stabilizing sand dunes to protect the Texas coast. Areas of study were Galveston Island, Packery Channel, Newport Pass on North Padre Island, and Corpus Christi Pass. 828 Harry, H. W. , and S. F. Snider. 1969. Cuttlebones on the beach at Galveston. Veliger 12(1) :89-94. Cuttlebones from the beach at Galveston, Texas are described and figured. The occurrence of beach cuttlebones in other parts of the world is discussed. 829 *Hoyt, J. H. 1970. Development and migration of barrier islands, northern Gulf of Mexico: discussion. Geoloqical Society of Amer- ica Bulletin 81:3779-3782. Discusses formation of barrier islands in the northern Gulf of Mexico. Specific areas mentioned include the Chandeleur Islands, Grand Gosier Island, Galveston Island, Laguna Madre Island, Padre Island, and Horn Island. 830 *Phleger, F. B. 1965. Patterns of marsh foraminifera, Galveston Bay, Texas. Limnology and Oceanography 10(Suppl . ) :R169-R184. Populations of living foraminifera were studied from six areas of marine marsh in Galveston Bay, including one on Galveston Is- land. 831 *Rogers, J. J. W. , and H. C. Adams, Jr. 1959. The mineralogy and texture of beach sands of Galveston Island, Texas. Journal of Sedimentary Petrology 29(2) :207-211. Comparisons are made between individual heavy minerals in the front- and back-bar beaches of Galveston Island. 832 Thompson, P. H. 1973. Tabanidae (Diptera) of Texas: I. Coastal marsh species, West Galveston Bay; incidence, frequency, abundance and seasonal distribution. Proceedings of the Entomological So- ciety of Washington 75(3) : 359-364. This article describes a study in which 16,235 specimens of 20 species and subspecies in three genera of Tabanidae were collected and analyzed from estuarine marshes and meadows of West Galveston Bay, Brazoria County, Texas. 833 Williams, G. G. 1959. Probable Eskimo curlew on Galveston Island, 178 Texas. Auk 76(4) :539-541. This article discusses a bird identified as an Eskimo curlew (Numenius boreal is), which was seen by about 20 people between March 22 and April 26, 1959. The species is usually regarded as extinct, and was last reported (also on Galveston Island) April 29, 1945. 179 Rattlesnake Point Foliets Island Brazos Cedar Lakes Brown Cedar 834 Mason, C, and R. M. Sorensen. 1972. Character and stability of a nautical tidal inlet. Pages 781-800 in_ Proceedings of the 13th coastal engineering conference, July 10-14, 1972, Vancouver, British Columbia, Canada, Part 2. American Society of Civil Engineers, New York. Deals with Brown Cedar Cut, a barrier beach in East Matagorda Bay, Texas, and focuses on physical and hydraulic properties of the inlet, its histor- ical stability, and short-term response to physical processes. Matagorda Peninsula East Matagorda Peninsula West Matagorda Island 835 *Gunter, G. 1950. Distributions and abundance of fishes on the Aransas Na- tional Wildlife Refuge, with life history notes. University of Texas, Publications of the Institute of Marine Science 1:89-101. This paper reports findings of a study on the fish fauna of the marginal ponds and salt flats of the Aransas National Wildlife Refuge on the Texas coast. 836 *Hedgpeth, J. W. 1950. Notes on the marine invertebrate fauna of salt flat areas in Aransas National Wildlife Refuge, Texas. University of Texas, Publications of the Institute of Marine Science 1:103-119. This paper discusses an ecological study of the salt marsh areas off Blackjack Peninsula, Texas, which includes Matagorda Island and St. Joseph Island. 180 837 Wilkinson, B. H. 1975. Matagorda Island, Texas: the evolution of a Gulf coast barrier complex. Geoloqical Society of America Bul- letin 86(7) :959-967. Traces changes through geologic history of the Matagorda Island complex. St. Joseph Island 838 Andrews, P. B. 1970. Facies and genesis of a hurricane-washover fan, St. Joseph Island, central Texas coast. University of Texas at Austin, Bureau of Economic Geology Report, Investigation 67. 147 pp. This article describes a 4%- by 4 -mi overwash fan at the north end of St. Joseph Island, which grades northeastward into a sub- aerial tidal delta on Aransas Bay. Mustanq Island i — 839 Behrens, E. W., and R. L. Watson. 1969. Differential sorting of pelecypod valves in the swash zone. Petrology 39(1) : 159-165 . Differential sorting of right and left valves of pelecypods is discussed with relation to Mustang and Padre Island beaches, Texas, 840 Davis, R. A., Jr., and W. T. Fox. 1972. Coastal dynamics along Mustang Island, Texas. Western Michigan University, Kalamazoo, Technical Report 9. 76 pp. Shows interrelationships among environmental variables on Mustang Island, based on two modified time-series studies con- ducted during October-November 1971 and January-February 1972. 841 Davis, R. A., Jr., and W. T. Fox. 1975. Process-response patterns in beach and nearshore sedimentation: I. Mustang Island, Texas. Journal of Sedimentary Petrology 45(4) :852-865. Presents results of two time-series studies conducted during October-November 1971 and January-February 1972, relating to patterns exhibited by winds, waves, and longshore currents. 181 842 Fox, W. T., and R. A. Davis, Jr. 1976. Weather patterns and coastal pro- cesses. Pages 1-23 in_ R. A. Davis, Jr. and R. L. Ethington, eds. Beach and nearshore sedimentation. Society of Economic Paleontologists and Mineralogists, Special Publication 24. Three coastal areas--the eastern shore of Lake Michigan, Mustang Island, Texas; and the central Oregon coast—were studied to develop coastal pro- cess-response models. Time-series analysis of weather, waves, and current data was coupled with frequent beach surveys. 843 Gillespie, T. S. 1976, annotated checklist. The flowering plants of Mustang Island, Texas: An Texas Journal of Science 27(1) : 131-148 . The flowering plants of Mustang Island, Texas, are presented in an annotated checklist. Habitat areas and representative types are also described. 844 Kier, R. S., W. A. White, and W. L. Fisher. 1974. Establishment of opera- tional guidelines for Texas coastal zone management. Resource capability units I: assessment of locational effects of residential, commercial, and industrial expansion fn the Corpus Christi area, Texas—methodology. University of Texas at Austin, Division of Natural Resources and Environ- ment. 164 pp. The report concerns the efforts of a multidisciplinary group to develop a methodology for considering environmental and economic effects of alter- native coastal zone management policies for the Texas coastal zone. 845 McFarland, W. N. 1963. Seasonal change in the number and biomass of fishes from the surf at Mustang Island, Texas. University of Texas, Publications of the Institute of Marine Science 9:91-105. This article concerns the numbers and biomass of fishes in the surf at Mustang Island, Texas, which were measured seasonally by seining procedures during 1960 and 1961. The article identifies 47 species of fish, which were captured and classed as all-year, spring-summer, summer, and winter-spring residents, or, as sporadic occurrences. 182 846 McGowen, J. H., C. G. Groat, L. F. Brown, Jr., W. L. Fisher, and A. J. Scott. 1970. Effects of Hurricane Celia--a focus on environmental geologic problems of the Texas coastal zone. University of Texas at Austin, Bureau of Economic Geology, Geological Circular 70-3. 35 pp. Evaluates effects of Hurricane Celia, with winds of 85-180 mph, on manmade structures and on shoreline itself between Aransas Pass and North Pass and in the back island area of Mustang Island. 847 Milling, M. E., and E. W. Behrens. 1966. Sedimentary structures of beach and dune deposits—Mustang Island, Texas. University of Texas, Publication of the Institute of Marine Science 11:135-148. Sedimentary structures of beach and dune deposits on this barrier island were studied in trenches, which exhibited the following stratification: foreshore, backshore, wind-shadow dunes, and the foredune ridge. 848 Moore, R. H. 1976. Reproductive habits and growth of Bufo speciosus on Mustang Island, Texas, with notes on the ecology and reproduc- tion of other anurans. Texas Journal of Science 27(1) : 173-178 . This article discusses the occurrence, distribution, and timing of breeding choruses of B_. speciosus and B_. val 1 iceps in relation to rainfall and mean temperature during 1971. 849 *Riedl , R., and E. A. McMahan. 1974. High energy beaches. Pages 180-251 in_H. T. Odum, B. J. Cope! and, and E. A. McMahan, eds. Coastal ecological systems of the United States. Vol. 1. The Conservation Foundation, Washington, D.C. Describes an ecological system characterized by high energy beaches such as those south of Cape Cod where surging waters are received, filtered, and returned to sea. Examples presented in- clude: Port Aransas, Texas, and Beaufort, North Carolina. Padre Island 850 Behrens, E. W., and R. L. Watson. 1969. Differential sorting of pelecypod valves in the swash zone. Petrology 39(1 ) : 159-165. Differential sorting of right and left valves of pelecypods is discussed with relation to Mustang and Padre Island beaches, Texas. 183 851 Berryhill, H. L., Jr. 1970. Remote sensing techniques as applied to coastal sedimentation, south Texas. Pages 6-1 to 6-15 jn_ Earth resources aircraft program. Vol. 1. NASA Manned Spacecraft Center, Houston. Discusses sediment movement, current patterns, water penetration and clarity of bottom features, and bay and lagoon flushing as indicated by infrared imagery of the barrier bar coastline of south Texas since 1967. 852 *Clary, J., J. Stinson, and R. J. Tanenbaum. 1974. Coastal aeolian fans- mechanism of landward sand transport. Geological Society of America, Abstracts with Programs 6:689-690. Landward aeolian sand transport is described for the barrier islands of Texas, with emphasis on Padre Island. 853 *Cooke, C. W. 1968. Barrier island formation: of America Bulletin 79(7) :945-946. discussion. Geological Society This article describes the various ways in which a barrier island may be produced. Areas discussed include Cape Hatteras, Sapelo Island, Padre Island, and the Florida Keys. 854 Dahl , B. E., B. A. Fall, A. Lohse, and S. G. Appan . 1975. Construction and stabilization of coastal foredunes with vegetation: Padre Island, Texas. Coastal Engineering Research Center Miscellaneous Paper No. 9-75. 188 pp. Reports on experiments conducted from 1969 to 1974 on Padre Island to establish technical specifications and methodologies for use of beach grasses to construct and stabilize foredunes as storm surge barriers. 855 Dickinson, K. A. 1971. Grain-size distribution and the depositional history of Northern Padre Island, Texas. U.S. Geological Survey, Professional Paper 750-C:Cl-C6. Deals with grain-size distribution and deposition on northern Padre Island and notes that grain size decreasing with depth, as in Galveston Island, is not a relation found on all barrier islands. 856 *Fisk, H. N. 1959. Padre Island and the Laguna Madre flats, coastal south Texas. Pages 102-151 in_ Second coastal geography conference. Louisiana State University, Baton Rouge. This paper relates Padre Island and the Laguna Madre flats to their regional setting. Sedimentary processes active in their formation are briefly discussed, and the later Quaternary stratigraphy and history of sedimentation in the area are summarized. 184 857 *Gage, B. 0. 1970. Experimental dunes of the Texas coast. U.S. Army, Corps of Engineers, Coastal Enqineering Research Center, Miscellaneous Paper No. 1-70. 34 pp. This publication reports on experimental means of creating and stabilizing sand dunes to protect the Texas coast. Areas of study were Galveston Island, Packery Channel, Newport Pass on North Padre Island, and Corpus Christi Pass. 858 Gunn, C. R., and J. V. Dennis. 1973. Tropical and temperate stranded seeds and fruits from the Gulf of Mexico. University of Texas, Contributions in Marine Science 17:111-121. This article discusses the frequent strandings of buoyant tropi- cal seeds and fruits (disseminules) on northern and western Gulf of Mexico beaches, such as Padre Island, Texas; Santa Rosa Island, Florida; northward along the west Texas coast; and along the western coast of Louisiana. 859 Hayes, M. 0. 1964. Grain size modes in Padre Island sands. Pages 121-126 in_ Depositional environments south-central Texas coast. Gulf Coast Association of Geological Societies Annual Meeting, 1964, Field Trip Guidebook. Austin, Texas. In this study of Padre Island, statistical grain-size parameters were analyzed from 57 dune and 16 beach samples. 860 Hayes, M. 0. 1964. Summary of geological effects of hurricanes Carla (1961) and Cindy (1963) on the south Texas coast. Pages 127-136 jn_ Depositional environments, south-central Texas coast. Gulf Coast Association of Geological Societies, Annual Meeting, 1964, Field Trip Guidebook. Austin, Texas. This article discusses the geological effects of Hurricane Carla on the barrier complex and wind-tidal flats of south Texas, and the effects of Hurricane Cindy on the contact area between the old Carla beach and the post-Carla prebeach. 861 Hayes, M. 0. 1966. Some observations on the geological effects of hurricanes, south Texas coast. Bulletin of the Houston Geoloqical Society 9(l):18-26. The effect of tropical storms on near-shore sedimentation is described with special reference to Hurricane Carla (November 1961). 185 862 Hayes, M. 0. 1967. Hurricanes as geological agents, south Texas coast. Bulletin of the American Association of Petroleum Geolog- ists 51(6, part l):937-942. This article describes the effects of Hurricane Carla (1961) in the inner-neritic zone and the barrier beach zone. 863 Hayes, M. 0., and A. J. Scott. 1964. Environmental complexes, south Texas coast (summary). Gulf Coast Association of Geological Sciences Transactions 14:237-240. This article discusses the climatic and hydrologic variables affecting the nearshore environmental complexes on the south Texas coast, including the inner shelf, barrier island complex, lagoon-bay complex, deltaic plain, and aeolian sand plain. 864 *Hedgpeth, J. U. 1967. Ecological aspects of the Laguna Madre, a hyper-saline estuary. Pages 408-419 jn_G. H. Lauff, ed. Estuaries, American Association for the Advancement of Science, Washington, D.C. The Laguna Madre of Texas is a series of coastal lagoons, con- sisting of a long narrow outer lagoon separated from the Gulf of Mexico by Padre Island. There is an abundant and varied fish fauna in the various parts of the Laguna. 865 *Hellier, T. R. 1962. Fish production and biomass studies in rela- tion to photosynthesis in the Laguna Madre of Texas. University of Texas, Publications of the Institute of Marine Science 8:1-22. In the present study, an effort has been made to relate fish production to gross plant production in a shallow, frequently hypersaline coastal bay, the Upper Laguna Madre of Texas. The Upper Laguna Madre is located on the Texas Gulf coast immediately south of Corpus Christi Bay, and is separated from the Gulf of Mexico by a narrow barrier island, Padre Island. 866 Hill, G. W., and R. E. Hunter. 1976. Interaction of biological and geological processes in the beach and nearshore environments, northern Padre Island, Texas. Pages 169-187 in R, A. Davis, Jr. and R. L. Ethington. Beach and nearshore sedimentation. Society of Economic Paleontologists and Mineralogists, Special Publication 24. The seaward part of Padre Island and the adjacent nearshore are differentiated geomorphically into a beach and a bar-trough system, and macrobenthos zonation is related to geomorphic features. 186 867 *Hoyt, J. H. 1970. Development and migration of barrier islands, northern Gulf of Mexico: discussion. Geological Society of America Bulletin 81:3779-3782. Discusses formation of barrier islands in the northern Gulf of Mexico. Specific areas mentioned include the Chandeleur Islands, Grand Gosier Island, Galveston Island, Laguna Madre Island, Padre Island, and Horn Island. 868 Hunter, R. E., and K. A. Dickinson. 1970. Map showing landforms and sedimentary deposits of the Padre Island portion of the South Bird Island, 7.5-minute quadrangle, Texas. U.S. Geological Survey, Miscellaneous Geological Investigations, Map 1-659, scale 1:24,000. The text summarizes geologic history of Padre Island and pre- sents description of landforms, sediments, and sedimentary pro- cesses. 869 *Price, W. A. 1971. Environmental impact of Padre Isles development. Shore and Beach 39(2) :4-10. This article assesses the environmental impact of a residential development on Padre Island, Texas. 870 Schmidly, D. J. 1972. First record of Cuvier's dolphin from the Gulf of Mexico with comments on the taxonomic status of Stenella frontal is. Journal of Mammalogy 53(3) :625-628. Two of twelve dolphins stranded along approximately 60 miles of Gulf beach within the Padre Island, Texas, seashore were identified as S_. frontalis Cuvier, 1829, and represent first records of this species in the Gulf of Mexico. 871 Shirley, T. C. 1974. Planes cyaneus Dana, 1852 (Decapoda Grapsidae), from Padre Island, Texas: A new record for the Gulf of Mexico and the North Atlantic. Crustaceana 26(1) :107-108. This article focuses on the fact that two specimens of F\ cyaneus collected from North Padre Island, Texas, are the first to be re- corded from the Gulf of Mexico and the North Atlantic Ocean. 187 872 Tuyahov, A. J., and R. K. Holz. 1973. Remote-sensing of a barrier island. Photogrammetric Engineering 39(2) : 177-188 . The physical and cultural features of Padre Island, Texas, are examined, based on results of thermal -infrared imagery and color- infrared and conventional color photographs. Data included on physiography, distribution of vegetation, detection of water bodies, and characteristics of wind tidal flats and hurricanes washover channels . 873 Watson, R. L. 1971. Origin of shell beaches, Padre Island, Texas. Journal of Sedimentary Petrology 41(4) : 1105-111 1 . Notes that central Padre Island, Texas, is site of convergence of littoral drift which causes shell and sand from entire coast to accumulate. Beach is similar to ancient shell beaches of the mainland shore of Laguna Madre, suggesting similar coastal con- figuration and wind patterns at the time of their formation. 874 Whelen, T. 1975. Low-altitude aerosol distribution along a barrier island coast. University of Texas, Contributions in Marine Science 19:3-11. Deals with field study conducted on the Padre Island National Seashore in which low-altitude aerosol concentrations were determined by a method designed to sample airborne particles from surf spray. Brazos Island 188 ADDENDUM GENERAL WORKS 875 *King, A. M. C. 1972. Beaches and coasts. Second edition. Edward Arnold, London. 570 pp. An important work on the physical processes of worldwide beaches and coasts. Chapter 20 (pp. 524-545) discusses the distribution, character- istic features, formation, and examples of barrier islands. 876 McHarg, I. L. 1971. Design with nature. Doubleday and Company, Inc., Garden City, New York. 198 pp. Sand dune dynamics and the vegetation of barrier islands are discussed. 877 *Ranwell , D. S. 1972. Ecology of saltmarshes and sand dunes. Chapman and Hall, Ltd., London. 258 pp. This book presents the European approach to the ecology of saltmarshes and sand dunes: animal and plant communities, structure and function, processes, man's impact, and management of wildlife resources. 878 *Siehl , G. H. 1977. A review of the acquisition costs of National seashores, Library of Congress, Congressional Research Service, ii + 17 pp. Major topics discussed include Federal policies for establishing National seashores, problems associated with land acquisitions and re- commendations for reducing purchase costs. Flora and Fauna 879 *Haley, D. 1977. Let's help the Atlantic loggerhead. National Parks and Conservation Magazine 51(2) :12-15 . Loss of habitat, predation by man and animals, and shrimp trawling have all contributed to the decline of the Atlantic loggerhead. 880 Woodhouse, W. W., Jr., E. D. Seneca, and A. W. Cooper. 1968. Use of sea oats for dune stabilization in the southeast. Shore and Beach 36(2): 15-21. 189 Coastal Overviews 881 *Bureau of Outdoor Recreation. 1975. Islands of America. U.S. Department of the Interior, Washington, D.C. 95 pp. A semi-popular description of all interior and coastal islands over 10 acres in size in the United States. Topics on islands features, recreation, Federal and State regulations and guidelines, man's threat, and conservation recommendations are discussed. An island inventory with State locations; development status, acreage and recreation potential appears in the appendices. 882 *Clark, J. R., S. Gilbert, B. Maclain, R. Turner, and L. Warner. 1977. Review of major barrier islands of the United States. Barrier Islands Workshop, c/o The Natural Resources Defense Council, New York, N.Y. 29 pp. An inventory of the 34 larger (more than 500 acres) barrier islands from Massachusetts to Texas. Basic information is discussed on owner- ship, development status, and access. 883 *Department of the Interior. 1955. A report on the seashore recreation survey of the Atlantic and Gulf coasts. National Park Service, Washington, D.C. 221 pp. + Appendix 25 pp. A survey of the recreational values of 126 barrier islands and beaches from the Canadian to the Mexican border. Information is provided on accessibility, area, description, present use, ownership, and environ- mental status. 884 *Gilbert. S. 1976. Reconnaissance survey Atlantic and Gulf coast barrier islands. Revised by R. Turner, fall 1976. Unpublished manuscript. The Conservation Foundation, Washington, D.C. This report extends the coverage of L. Warner's (1976) coastal survey (Virginia to Georgia) entitled "The Status of the barrier islands of the southeast coast." Of the 277 barrier islands and beaches inventoried over one-third were developed, one-third were protected, and the re- maining one-third were in private hands. Barrier fronts along the Atlantic and Gulf cover over 2,250 miles in total length. 885 *Godfrey, P. J. 1976. Barrier beaches of the East Coast. Oceanus 19(5): 27-40. A description of various features of barrier islands: physiographic structure, formation, movement, man's threat, dunes, saltmarshes, Carrier flats, inlets and conservation practices. 190 886 *Hay, J. and P. Forb. 1966. The Atlantic shore: humans and natural history from Long Island to Laborador. Harper and Row Publishers, New York, N.Y. 238 pp. Reviews the natural history of the islands and their marsh and avian resources. 887 *Jagschitz, J. A., and R. C. Wakefield. 1971. How to build and save beaches and dunes: Preserving the shoreline with fencing and beachgrass. University of Rhode Island, Marine Leaflet Series No. 4. 12 pp. These techniques should be used in the area from Maine to North Carolina and along the Great Lakes. Article includes detailed directions for transplanting beachgrass. 888 Leonard, J.N. 1973. Atlantic beaches. Time-Life Books, New York, N.Y. 184 pp. An illustrated popular account of Atlantic beaches from Cape Cod in Massachusetts to Cape Lookout in North Carolina. 889 *National Resources Defense Council, Inc. 1976. Who's minding the shore? A citizen's guide to coastal zone management. NOAA, Department of Commerce, Office of Coastal Zone Management, Washington D.C. 51 pp. This handbook discusses the provisions of the Coastal Zone Management Act, State and citizen participation, land and water use, environmental impacts, planning issues and property rights. 890 *Soucie, G. 1977. The need for a boat. National Parks and Conservation Magazine 51(2) :4-7. Access by boat is the only way to preserve the charm of an island visit, Origin, Geomorphology, Processes 891 Dolan, R., and J. McCoy. 1965. Selected bibliography on beach features and related nearshore processes. Louisiana State University, Coastal Studies Series No. 11. Louisiana State University Press, Baton Rouge. 59 pp. Consists of over 1300 references on beaches and related shore pro- cesses. 191 892 ♦Environmental Information Center. 1974. Beach restoration: an exercise in futility. EMFO Newsletter. Florida Conservation Foundation, Winter Park, Florida. 15 pp. Discusses environmental problems associated with beach erosion and restoration. MASSACHUSETTS 893 Lazell , J. D. Jr. 1976. This broken archipelago: Cape Cod and the islands, amphibians and reptiles. Ouadrangle/The New York Times Book Co., New York, N.Y. The distribution and ecology of salamanders, frogs, turtles and snakes are described for Cape Cod and adjacent islands, including Monomoy, Elizabeth Islands, Martha's Vineyard, Chappaquiddick, Nantucket, Tuckernuck and Muskeget. 894 *Walker, W. B. 1977. The poisoning of Cape Cod. County Journal. July: *2-46. The author projects that continued mismanagement of ground water supplies and inadequate sewage disposal facilities could make Cape Cod and its shoreline uninhabitable by the year 2000. RHODE ISLAND 895 Seavy, G. L. 1975. Rhode Island's coastal natural areas: priorities for protection and management. University of Rhode Island, Coastal Resources Center, Marine Technical Report No. 43. 60 pp. This article discusses coastal natural areas, methods for protection, salt marshes, coastal pond complexes, scenic cliffs, and rock outcrops. NEW YORK 896 Heikoff, J. M. 1976. Politics of shore erosion: Westhamption Beach. Ann Arbor Science Publishers, Inc., Ann Arbor, Mich. This investigation of shore erosion at Westhampton Beach, Long Island had two objectives. One was to find out how scientists and engineers defined the problem. The other was to see how this information was used by the politican decision-makers and governmental administrators. 192 897 Marr, P. D., E. K. Schuler, Jr., J. J. Utano, and M. S. Hall. 1976. Governmental jurisdictions of the New York coastal zone: an analysis of coastal problems. New York Sea Grant Institute, Albany. 100 pp. This report introduces and summarizes the work of every agency with responsibility for coastal activities: international, Federal, inter- state, New York State and regional organizations. 898 Scheinkman, J. J., and P. M. Byrne. 1977. Inventory of the barrier island chain of the states of New York and New Jersey. Prepared under the aus- pices of the Open Space Institute. The Mcintosh Foundation, New York, N.Y. 75 pp. A general inventory of the status of the 12 barrier islands and 2 peninsulas which form the barrier island chain in New York and New Jersey. MEW JERSEY 899 Scheinkman, J. J., and P. M. Byrne. 1977. Inventory of the barrier island chain of the states of New York and New Jersey. Prepared under the aus- pices of the Open Space Institute. The Mcintosh Foundation, New York, N.Y. 75 pp. A general inventory of the status of the 12 barrier islands and 2 peninsulas which from the barrier island chain in New York and New Jersey. MARYLAND Assateague Island North 900 Dolan, R., B. Hayden, and J. Heywood. 1977. Atlas of environmental dynamics, Assateague Island National Seashore. National Park Service, Natural Resource Report No. 11. 39 pp. + 2 maps. An illustrated document to barrier island processes at Assateague Island. 901 *Johnson, J. C. 1975. Assateague: Jewel of the East Coast. National Parks and Conservation Magazine 49(1 ) : 1-9 . Topics on ecology, threat of man's activities, and topography are discussed for the Assateague Island National Seashore. 193 VIRGINIA 902 ♦Goldsmith, V., ed. 1977. Coastal processes and resulting forms of sediment accumulations, Currituck Spit, Virginia - North Carolina: Field trip guidebook. Virginia Institute of Marine Science, Special Report in Applied Marine Science and Ocean Engineering No. 143. (35 chapters.) A compendium of all the known information about Currituck Spit. Major topics include geology, wetland vegetation, wave dynamics, beaches and dunes. 903 Nature Conservancy. 1976. Virginia coast reserve study. 4 volumes. Arlington, Virginia. An outstanding reference document for those interested in the barrier islands of the Virginia coast. The set includes: Volume I, Ecosystems description; Volume II, Legislative compendium, title research and acquisition priorities; Volume III, Social and economic analysis; and Volume IV, Stewardship. 904 *Warner, L. 1976. The status of the barrier islands of southeastern coast: A summary of the barrier islands inventory. Open Space Institute, New York, and Natural Resources Defense Council, New York, N.Y. 43 pp. The pertinent data from Warner and Strauss (1976) were summarized in this abbreviated report. 905 *Warner, L. and D. Strauss. 1976. Inventory of the barrier islands of the southeastern coast. Open Space Institute, New York, and Natural Resources Defense Council, New York, N.Y. 300 pp. This inventory of the barrier islands of Virginia, North Carolina, South Carolina, and Georgia summarizes information on each island's size (all over 200 acres), development status, ownership, property assessments, and local land-use regulations. Of the 81 islands in the study area, 27 were largely owned by the State or Federal government; 9 were owned by private, nonprofit organizations; and the remaining 45 islands were predominatly privately owned. The authors state that nearly half the privately owned islands were threatened by recent and anticipated real estate development. NORTH CAROLINA 906 Berenyi , N. M. 1966. Soil productivity factors on the Outer Banks of North Carolina. Ph. D. Dissertation. North Carolina State University at Raleigh. 214 pp. 194 907 *Boc, S. J., and J. Langfelder. 1977. An analysis of beach overwash along North Carolina's coast. North Carolina State University, Center for Marine and Coastal Studies. Report No. 77-9. 17 pp + 8 figs. Approximately 85% of coastal North Carolina has been subjected to overwash since 1938. Overwash areas, processes, and historical trends between 1938 and 1974 are discussed for each coastal county. 908 *Brower, D., D. Frankenberg. 1976. Ecological determinants of coastal area management: an overview. Vol. 1. University of North Carolina, Sea Grant Publication. UNC-SG-76-05. 140 pp. A synthesis of information on environmental processes of North Carolina's coastal area. Topics on barrier islands include ecology, man's impact and management tools. 909 *Dolan, R. 1972. Man's impact on the Outer Banks of North Carolina. National Park Service, Natural Resource Report No. 3. 16 pp. A popular illustrated account of man's impact on the Outer Banks. 910 Godfrey, P. J., and M. M. Godfrey. 1975. Some estuarine consequences of barrier island stabilization. Pages 485-516 in L. E. Cronin, ed. Estua- rine Research. Vol. II. Academic Press, NewTork, N.Y. A detailed study of salt marsh succession and its relationship to the stability of the islands composing the North Carolina Outer Banks. 911 Seneca, E. D. 1969. Germination response to temperature and salinity of four dune grasses from the Outer Banks of North Carolina. Ecology 50: 45-53. 912 Seneca, E. D. 1972. Seedling response to salinity in four dune grasses from the Outer Banks of North Carolina. Ecology 53:465-571. 913 Seneca, E. D., W. W. Woodhouse, Jr., and S. W. Broome. 1976. Dune stabili- zation with Panicum amarum along the North Carolina coast. U.S. Army, Corps of Engineers, Coastal Engineering Research Center, Ft. Belvior, Virginia. Miscellaneous Report 76-3. 42 pp. 914 Seneca, E. D., W. W. Woodhouse, Jr., and S. W. Broome. 1977. Dune stabili- zation with Panicum amarum along the North Carolina coast. North Carolina State University at Raleigh, Center for Marine and Coastal Studies, Report 77-1. (UNC-SG-77-03). 42 pp. 195 915 Van der Valk, A. G. 1974. Environmental factors controlling the distribution of forbs on coastal foredunes in Cape Hatteras National Seashore. Canadian Journal of Botany 52:1057-1073. 916 *Warner, L. 1976. The status of the barrier islands of southeastern coast: a summary of the barrier islands inventory. Open Space Institute, New York and Natural Resources Defense Council, New York, N.Y. 43 pp. The pertinent data from Warner and Strauss (1976) were summarized in this abbreviated report. 917 *Warner, L., and D. Strauss. 1976. Inventory of the barrier islands of the southeastern coast. Open Space Institute, New York, and Natural Resources Defense Council, New York, N.Y. 300 pp. This inventory of the barrier islands of Virginia, North Carolina, South Carolina, and Georgia summarizes information on each island's size (all over 200 acres), development status, ownership, property assessments, and local land-use regulations. Of the 81 islands in the study area, 27 were largely owned by the State or Federal Government; 9 were owned by private, nonprofit organizations; and the remaining 45 islands were predominantly privately owned. The authors state that nearly half the privately owned islands were threatened by recent and anticipated real estate development. 918 *Woodhouse, W. W., Jr., E. D. Seneca, and S. W. Broome. 1976. Ten years of development of man-initiated coastal barrier dunes in North Carolina. North Carolina State University at Raleigh, Agricultural Experiment Station, Bulletin 453. 53 pp. Discusses sand dune restoration with American beachgrass, sea oats, and sand fences over a 10-year period along North Carolina's coast. Bodie Island 919 Cooper, A. W. , and E. D flooded sa Itmarsh on , Waits. 1973. Vegetation types in an irregularly the North Carolina Outer Banks. Journal of the Elisha Mitchell Scientific Society 89:78-91. Cape Hatteras 920 Dolan, R. 1972. Beach erosion and beach nourishment, Cape Hatteras, North Carolina. National Park Service, Natural Resource Report No. 4. 20 pp. 196 Ocracoke Island 921 Kearny, T. H. 1900. The plant covering of Ocracoke Island; a study in the ecology of North Carolina strand vegetation. U.S. National Herbarium, Contribution 5:26-319. 922 Seneca, E. D. 1974. Seedling response to photoperiod and thermoperiod by saltmeadow cordgrass, Spartina patens, from Ocracoke Island, North Carolina. Chesapeake Science 15:230-232. Oak Island 923 Foster, W. A. 1968. Studies on the growth of Juncus roemerianus in south- eastern Brunswick County, North Carolina. North Carolina State University at Raleigh, M. S. Thesis. 924 Stroud, L. M. and A. W. Cooper. 1968. Color-infrared aerial photographic interpretation and net primary productivity of a regularly-flooded North Carolina saltmarsh. North Carolina State University at Raleigh, Water Resources Institute 14:1-86. SOUTH CAROLINA 925 *Warner, L. 1976. The status of the barrier islands of southeastern coast: a summary of the barrier islands inventory. Open Space Institute, New York, and Natural Resources Defense Council, New York, M.Y. 43 pp. The pertinent data from Warner and Strauss (1976) were summarized in this abbreviated report. 926 *Warner, L., and D. Strauss. 1976. Inventory of the barrier islands of the southeastern coast. Open Space Institute, New York, and Natural Resources Defense Council, New York, fl.Y. 300 pp. This inventory of the barrier islands of Virginia, North Carolina, South Carolina, and Georgia summarizes information on each island's size (all over 200 acres), development status, ownership, property assessments, and local land-use regulations. Of the 81 islands in the study area, 27 were largely owned by the State or Federal government; 9 were owned by private, nonprofit organizations; and the remaining 45 islands were pre- dominantly privately owned. The authors state that nearly half the privately owned islands were threatened by recent and anticipated real estate development. 197 Isle of Palms 927 Coker, W. C. 1905. Observations on the flora of the Isle of Palms, Charleston, South Carolina. Torreya 5(8) :135-145. GEORGIA 928 Clement, C. and J. I. Richardson. 1971. Recreation on the Georgia coast: an ecological approach. Georgia Business 30(11) : 1-24 . 929 Metzen, W. D. 1978. Islands in the sun. National Wildlife 16(1) :54-62. A popular account of the ownership status and ecological value of Georgia's barrier islands. 930 *Neuhauser, H. 1976-77. Our golden legacy: Georgia's barrier islands. Coastal Ouarterly 2(3):6-9. Discusses man's threat and the environmental status of 15 individual islands along Georgia's coast. 931 *Warner, L. 1976. The status of the barrier islands of southeastern coast: a summary of the barrier islands inventory. Open Space Institute, Mew York, and Natural Resources Defense Council, New York, M.Y. 43 pp. The pertinent data from Warner and Strauss (1976) were summarized in this abbreviated report. 932 *Warner, L., and D. Strauss. 1976. Inventory of the barrier islands of the southeastern coast. Open Space Institute, New York, and Natural Resources Defense Council, New York, N.Y. 300 pp. This inventory of the barrier islands of Virginia, North Carolina, South Carolina, and Georgia summarizes information on each island's size (all over 200 acres), development status, ownership, property assessments, and local land-use regulations. Of the 81 islands in the study area, 27 were largely owned by the State or Federal government; 9 were owned by private, nonprofit organizations; and the remaining 45 islands were pre- dominantly privately owned. The authors state that nearly half the privately owned islands were threatened by recent and anticipated real estate development. 198 Wassaw Island 933 Francisco, W., L. T. Jenkins, Jr., M. McWilliams, and J. Rothman. 1970. Wassaw Island Study. University of Georgia, School of Environmental Design, Athens. 129 pp. St. Catherines Island 934 McCormick, J., H. A. Somes, and T. R. Ashbaugh. 1972. Vegetation of St. Catherines Island, Georgia. American Museum of Natural History, New York, N.Y. 46 pp. Jekyll Island 935 Callahan, J. T. 1959. Jekyll Island -- its geology and water resources. Georgia Department of Mines, Minina, and Geology, Mineral Newsletter 12:23-39. Cumberland Island 936 Sprunt, A., Jr. 1936. Some observations on the bird life on Cumberland Island, Georgia. The Oriole 1:1-6. FLORIDA Sanibel Island 937 Clark, J. 1976. The Sanibel report: formulation of a comprehensive plan based on natural systems. The Conservation Foundation, Washington, D.C, 305 pp. 938 LeBuff, C. R. 1969. The marine turtles of Sanibel and Captiva Islands, Florida. Sanibel - Captiva Conservation Foundation, Inc., Special Bulletin No. 1. 13 pp. Cayo Costa 939 Herwitz, S. 1977. The natural history of Cayo Costa Island. New College Environmental Studies Program, Sarasota, Florida. 177 pp. 199 Cayo Costa is adjacent to the inlet leading to Charlotte Harbor. Little Gasparilla 940 Reynolds. W. 1976. Botanical, geological, and sociological factors affecting the management of the barrier islands adjacent to Stump Pass. New College Environmental Studies Program, Sarasota, Florida. 117 pp. The study area focused on the barrier islands adjacent to Stump Pass, which is the inlet to Lemon Bay. St. George Island 941 Livingston, R. J., ed. 1974. St. George Island: biota, ecology, and management program for controlled development. Unpublished report. Franklin County Board of Commissioners. Franklin County, Florida. Flora and fauna of St. George Island are discussed, including blue crab, fishes, amphibians, reptiles, birds and mammals. ALABAMA 942 Schroeder, W. W. 1976. Physical environmental atlas of coastal Alabama. Mississippi/Alabama Sea Grant Consortium, Ocean Springs, MS. 239 pp. The purpose of the atlas is to document the physical environment of the Alabama coast. Environmental conditions are described for the period 1973 to 1976. MISSISSIPPI 943 Madson, J., and D. Bradburn. 1976. Message from a desert island (Horn Island, Mississippi). Audubon (Magazine) 76(1) :56-69. 944 *McIlwain, J. B., S. F. Minor, and C. R. Sollie. 1976. Mississippi coastal resources: a survey to determine attitudes and opinions of local citizens, Prepared for Mississippi Marine Resources Council, Long Beach, Mississippi, Mississippi-Alabama Sea Grant Consortium Report No. MASGP-76-031. 15 pp. 945 Miller, G. 1975. Vegetation dynamics of Ship Island, Mississippi. Ph.D. Thesis. University of Georgia, Athens. 237 pp. 200 946 Otvos, E. G., Jr. 1970. Development and migration of barrier islands Northern Gulf of Mexico. Geological Society of America, Bulletin. 81: 241-246. 947 Otvos, E. G., Jr. 1972. Mississippi Gulf Coast Pleistorcene beach barriers and the age problem of the Atlantic-Gulf coast "Palm! ico"-"Ingleside" beach ridge system. Southeastern Geology 14(4) :241-250. TEXAS 948 ♦Texas Coastal and Marine Council. 1977. Pictorial atlas of Texas coastal hazards. Austin, Texas. 52 pp. This publication discusses the potential threat to residents of the Texas coast from natural processes, such as hurricanes, subsidence, erosion, and poor construction practices. Matagorda Island 949 McGowan, J. H., and J. L. Brewton. 1975. Historical changes and related coastal processes, Gulf and mainland shorelines. University of Texas at Austin, Bureau of Economic Geology, Report of Investigation 84. Galveston Island 950 Morton, R. A. 1974. Shoreline changes on Galveston Island (Bolivar Roads to San Luis Pass). University of Texas at Austin, Bureau of Economic Geology, Circular 72-2. 34 pp. Padre Island 951 Cottam, C. 1970. Cows on Padre Island. National Parks and Conservation Magazine 44:27. 952 *Dahl , B. E., and J. P. Goen. 1977. Monitoring of foredunes on Padre Island, Texas. U.S. Army, Corps of Engineers, Coastal Engineering Re- search Center, Miscellaneous Report Mo. 77-8. 69 pp. This report discusses the results of a 2-year survey to monitor rates of sand deposition, vegetation dynamics, beach erosion and accretion, and maintenance requirements of beach plantings. 201 953 Harris, V. M. 1965. History of cattle raising on Padre Island. South Texas Agriculture 1:1-16. 202 AUTHOR INDEX Abad, G. N. 459 Abele, R. W. , Jr. 120 Adams, S. M. 439 Anderson, W. D., Jr. 461, 485 Andrews, E. 473 Andrews, J. C. 163, 166 Andrews, P. B. 838 Art, H. W. 234, 235 Au, S. 428 Austin, 0. L. 533 Bahr, L. M., Jr. 556 Baker, S. 343 Banks, R. S. 699, 700 Barnes, R. D. 422, 429, 440 Bartberger, C. E. 298 Bateman, H. A., Jr. 797 Bault, E. I. 746 Bayer, F. M. 679 Behre, E. 798 Behrens, E. W. 839, 850 Bel lis, V. 344, 345 Bent, A. C. 13, 14, 15, 16 Berenyi, N. M. 906 Berg, D. W. 58 Bernard, H. A. 824, 825 Berrill , N. J. 17 Berryhill , H. L., Jr. 851 Beshear, R. J. 635, 636 Bird, E. C. F. 59 Blum, J. L. 139 Boc, S. J. 907 Bolster, K. 346 Bourdeau, P. F. 452 Boyce, S. B. 104, 453 Brower, D. 908 Brown, C. A. 393 Bureau of Outdoor Recreation 215, 881 Burke, C. J. 347 Burkholder, P. R. 557 Byrne, R. J. 304 Caine, E. A. 643 Calder, D. R. 460, 468, 469 Caldwell , D. K. 462, 476, 502, 619, 627, 633, 644 Caldwell , J. M. 245 Callahan, J. T. 935 Carlozzi , C. 106 Carraway, C. 348 203 Carter, M, R. 645 Chaki, S. 671 Chamberlain, B. B. 105 Chang, Y. M. 394 Clark, J. 2, 305, 937 Coker, W. C. 927 Conaster, W. E. 799, 800 Cooke, C. W. 395, 396, 560, 853 Cooper, A. W. 561, 919 Craighead, F. C. 646, 680 Clark, J, 2, 305, 937 Clark, J. R. 3, 882 Clary, J. 852 Clement, C. 928 Clovis, J. F. 333 Coastal Studies Institute, LSU 778 Coates, D. R. 60 Coker, W. C. 927 Conaster, W. E, 799, 800 Connor, P, F. 216 Conover, R, J. 196 Cooke, C, W. 395, 396, 560, 853 Cooper, A. W, 561, 919 Copeland, B. J. 4 Cottam, C. 951 Craighead, F, C, 646, 680 Crance, J. H. 747 Croker, R. A, 647 Cunningham, J. T. 251, 261, 271, 274 Cupka, D. M. 470, 471, 472, 478, 481, 490, 492 Curray, J, R. 61 DaBoll, J. M, 121 Dahl, B. E. 854, 952 Dahlberq, M. D. 503, 543, 544, 562, 563, 564 Darby, D. G. 565 Davenport, L. B. 566 Davies, D. K. 826 Davies, D. S. 217 Davies, J. L, 62 Davis, L. V, 423, 430, 441 Davis, R. A, 63 Davis, R. A., Jr. 804, 840, 841 Dean, L. F. 504 deGast, R. 286, 291, 294, 319, 320 322, 324, 329, 331, 334 de la Cruz, A. A. 567, 568 Dennis, J. V, 156 Department of Community Planning and Area Development 193 Department of the Interior 883 Devanney, J, W. 135 Dickinson, K. A. 64, 885 204 Diener, R. A, 805 Dolan, R. 65, 312, 349, 350, 351, 352, 353, 354, 386, 387, 397, 398, 399, 400, 401, 417, 420, 424, 891, 900, 909, 920 Dorjes, J. 569 Duane, D. R, 118, 122, 129, 134, 136, 252, 262 Ducsik, D, W, 5, 33 Dunbar, G. S. 355 Duncan, W. H. 20 Eaton, R. J, 206 El-Ashry, M. T, 66, 356 Eleuterius, L. N. 758, 768, 769, 773 Emerson, A. F. 179 Engels, W. L. 418, 431 Environmental Information Center 892 Environmental Research Center, Inc. 486 Everts, C. H, 218, 272 Feray, D. W. 806 Fernandez, J, H, 263, 266 Field, M. E. 67, 672 Fincher, G. T. 551 Finley, R. J. 474, 475 Fisher, J. J. 68, 306, 307, 338, 402, 403 Fisk, H. N, 856 Fiske, J. D. 148, 185 Fivush, B. 167 Florida State University 734 Florschutz, 0., Jr. 339 Floyd, C. F. 628 Fogg, J. M., Jr. 180, 181, 183 Folger, E. V. 157, 164, 168 Fore, P. L. 688 Foster, H. A. 923 Forsyth, E. J. 807 Fox, R. S. 432, 442 Fox, W. T. 842 Francisco, W, 933 Frank, W. M. 246 Frankenberg, 0. 357 Franks, J. S. 759 Frey, R. W. 505, 552, 570 Gadow, S. 571 Gage, B. 0. 827, 857 Gaither, W. S. 279 Gallagher, J. L. 287, 288 Gaskin, P. 299 Gaumer, G. C. 808 Georgia Department of Natural Resources 506, 524 Gilbert, S. 884 Giles, R. T. 69, 70 205 Gillespie, T. S. 843 Gilliland, M. S. 692 Glooschenko, W. A. 713 Godfrey, P, J. 71, 358, 404, 405, 425, 426, 885, 910 Goldsmith, V. 150, 151, 902 Gordon, D. C, , Jr, 141 Gore, R, H, 676 Gorsline, D, S, 648, 722 Gould, E. 793 Gould, F, W, 809 Greaves, J. A. 572 Gunn, C. R. 463, 741, 779, 810, 858 Gunter, G. 694, 705, 835 Gustavson, T. C, 158, 219, 229 Hails, J. R. 359, 507, 508, 509 Hanes, E, B, 573 Haley, D. 879 Halvorson, W, L. 107, 186, 211 220, 247, 280, 308, 360 Harper, R, M. 23, 221 Harris, V, M. 953 Harris, W, D, 673 Harris, H. H, 406 Harrison, S, C, 313, 318, 321, 323, 325, 330, 332, 335, 337 Harrison, W. 340, 341 Harrison, W, E, 760 Harry, H. W, 828 Hartshorn, J, H. 108 Harvill, A. M., Jr. 314, 326 Hastings, R. W. 649 Havens, J. M. 34 Hay, J. 24, 109 Hayden, B. 6 Hayden, B. P. 407 Hayes, M, 0, 92, 110, 123, 487, 811, 859, 860, 861, 862, 863 Heald, E, J. 21, 22, 681, 682 Hedgpeth, J. H. 836, 864 Heikoff, J. M. 896 Hellier, T. R. 865 Hendrix, G. Y. 678 Heppner, F. H. 35 Herbich, J. B. 812 Hertweck, G. 574 Herwitz, S. 939 Higgins, E. A. 300 Hill, G. W. 813, 866 Hill , N, P, 140, 144, 145, 146, 147, 149, 152 Hillestad, H, 0. 637 Hoese, H, D, 575 Hopkins, E, M, 714 206 Howard, J. D, 576, 577, 578, 579, 580 Howett, CM. 510 Howl and, A. F, 182 Hoyt, J. H. 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 454, 477, 489, 511, 525, 581, 582, 583, 616, 761, 786, 791, 829, 867 Humm, H. J. 770 Hunter, R. E. 868 Igmanson, D. 707 Irby, R. N. 753 Ivey, Rr D. 667 Iwanowicz, H. R, 138 Japschitz, J. A, 867 Jenkins, J. H, 584 Jerome, VI. Cf, Jr. 119, 124 Johnson, A. S. 512, 513, 526, 534, 539, 545, 553, 585, 617, 620, 629, 638 Johnson, D. 93 Johnson, D. W, 137 Johnson, J, A. 264 Johnson, J. C. 901 Jones, J. R. 125, 130 Kale, H. W. 586, 587 Kearhy, T. H, 921 Keefe, C. W. 301 Kier, R. S. 814, 844 Kilby, J. D. 704, 708 Kinch, J. C, 689 King, A. M. C. 875 King, C. A. M. 7 King, K. A. 780 Kjerfve, B. H. 554 Klein, G. D. 78 Klump, V, 361, 362, 363, 364 Knowles, C. E. 408 Knowles, K. 97, 99, 102 Kornicker, L. S, 111, 212, 715 Kraeuter, J. N. 25 Kraft, J. C, 79, 281, 282, 283, 289 Kruczynski, W. L. 650 Krutak, P, R, 774 Kuenzler, E. J, 588, 651 Kumar, N. 80, 236 Kwon, H. J. 81, 742, 754, 781, 882 Laessle, A, M. 668 LaHart, D. E. 695 Land, L. S. 590 Langfelder, L, J, 365 Lazell, J. D., Jr. 893 LeBlanc, R. J. 815 Lebuff, C. R. 652, 938 Lee, T. N. 693 207 Lemaire, R. J. 787, 792, 794 Leonard, J.N. 888 Leontev, 0. 82 Leverett, F. 653 Lindgren, E. W. 443 Livinqston, R. J. 712, 941 Loesch, H. C. 801 Louisiana V'ild Life and Fisheries Commission 782 Luqo, A. E. 654 Lyberqer, R. D. 514 Lynch, M, P. 8 Machek, A. 723 Machemehl , J. L. 409 MacLeod, N. H. 292, 309 Madson, J. 943 Mahood, R. K. 515 Manley, S. 237 Marples, T. G. 591 Marr, P. D. 897 Marshall, H. L. 388, 709 Marshall , H. G. 315 Martens, J. H. C. 655 Martin, W. E. 257 Martof, B. S. 592 Mason, C, 834 Matera, N, J. 231 Matta, J. F. 389 May, J. P. 735 McAleer, J. B. 36 McCollum, J. L. 516 McCormick, C. L. 222 McCormick, J. 934 McFarland, W. N. 845 McGowan, J. H. 846. 949 McHarg, I. L. 876 Mc II wain, J. B. 944 Mclntire, W. G. 126, 816 McMaster, R. L. 199, 202, 207 McNulty, J. K. 656 Meade, R. H. 94 Mehta, A. J. 670, 674 Mendelssohn, I. A. 327 Menzel, R. W. 716, 718, 724, 730 Metzen, W. D. 929 Miller, C. N., Jr. 171 Miller, G. 945 Miller, G. J. 771 Miller, G. L. 621, 630 Milliman, J. D. 37 Milling, M. E. 847 Milne, R. C. 410 Milstein, C. B. 248 208 Missimer, T. M. 696, 697 Moffett, A. W. 817 Moore, R. H. 848 Morgan, J. P. 788 Morton, R. A. 823 Moul, E. T. 153 Muchmore, W. B. 366 National Ocean Survey, NOAA 38, 39, 40, 41, 42 National Resources Defense Council 889 Nature Conservancy 903 Mayak, R. K. 194 Negus, N, C, 795 Nelson, K. 488 Neuhauser, H, 930 New Enaland River Basins Commission 112, 112, 159, 160, 187 Newman, W. S. 328 Nichol, W. L. 230 Niedoroda, A. W. 657 Nixon, S, W, 208 Odale, R. M, 154 Odum, E. P. 593 Odum, H, T, 9, 10, 517 Odum, VI, E. 683, 684, 685 Oertel, G, F. 464, 518, 519 520, 527, 528, 529, 530, 535, 536, 537, 540, 546, 547, 548, 594, 634 Ogden, J. G, 172 Olsen, S. P, 188, 189, 190, 197, 200, 201, 203 Oosting, H. J. 26 Osmond, J. K. 675 Otto, J. S. 622 Otvos, E. G., Jr. 83, 223, 946, 947 Paola, C, R. 277 Panuzio, F. L, 224 Paradiso, J. L. 302, 316 Paul , J, R. 367 Paun, G. G. 818 Peake, R. H., Jr. 618 Pearse, A. S. 444 Penfound, W. T. 775 Perry, H. M. 776 Pessin, L. J. 762 Phelps, D. S. 368 Phillips, L. C. 658 Phleger, F. B. F. B. 830 Pierce, J. W. 369, 370, 371, 372, 433 Pi 1 key, D. H, 595 Pilkey, 0, H,, Jr, 445 Pi 1 son, M. E. 43 Planners, Inc. 44 Plumb, J. A. 659, 748 209 Pomeroy, L. R. 596, 597 Potter, J. L. 819 Pournelle, G. H. 669 Price, D. J. 660 Price, W. A. 869 Priddy, R. R. 763 Putnam, W. C. 11 Quay, T. L. 390 Ragotzkie, R. A. 598, 599 Ranwell , D. S. 877 Redfield, A. C. 142, 143 Reid, G. K. 710 Reimold, R. J. 27 Renshaw. C. 232, 233, 238, 243, 244 Resio, D, 84 Reynolds, W. 940 Rhode Island University 191, 195 Rhodes, E. G. 131 Rich, L. D. 96, 98.J00, 101, 103 Richardson, J. I. 521 Richmond, E. A. 764, 765 Rickards, W. L. 600 Riedl , R. 446, 849 Riggs, S. R. 85, 702 Ritchie, W. A. 173 Roberts, H. H. 789 Rogers, J. J. W. 831 Routa, R. A. 677 Russell, R. J. 373, 686, 783 Ruzyla, K, 239 Saila, S. B. 45, 46, 198 Sakalowsky, P. P., Jr. 204, 205 Saloman, C. H. 701, 703 Sanders, J. E. 240 Sapp, C. D. 751 Savage, R. P. 374 Scheinkmah, J. J. 898, 899 Schleske, C. L. 601 Schmidly, D. J. 870 Schnable, J. 725 Scholl, D. W. 687, 690 Schroeder, W. W. 942 Schwartz, F. J. 434 Schwartz, M. L. 12, 86 Sciple, G. W. 522 Seapker, J. K, 375 Seavy. R. L. 895 Seelig, W. N. 820 Seneca, E. D. 376, 911, 912, 913, 91^, 922 Shanholtzer, G. F. 28 Shanholtzer, S. F. 602 210 Sharp, H, F. 603 Shealy, M. H. 493, 497 Shepard, F. P. 47, 95, 114, 192, 213, 225, 249, 284, 293, 310, 377, 465, 466, 523, 661, 662, 749, 755, 784, 821 Shideler, G. L. 342, 378, 379 Shier, D. E. 691 Shirley, T. C. 871 Shure, D, J. 258, 259 Siehl, G. H. 878 Simon, A. W. 174 Sirkin, L, 209 Slaughter, T. H. 295, 296 Smalley, A. E. 604, 605, 606 Snetsinaer, R. 260 Snow, B. C, 380 Sonu, C. J. 381, 382, 383, 391, 743 Soucie, G. 392, 411, 419, 421, 890 Sprunt, A. , Jr. 936 Stalter, R. 479, 480, 482, 483, 491, 494, 495, 500, 501 Stancyk, S. E, 447, 706 Stansfield, C. A. 297 Stapor, F. W. , Jr. 719, 726, 727, 731, 736, 739, 740, 744 Stark, L. 165 Stephen, M. F. 467 Sterling, D. 115, 161, 175, 210, 226 Stirewalt, G. L. 412 Stiven, A. E. 448 Strahler, A. N. 253 Stroud, L. M, 458, 924 Swingle, H. A. 750 Swift, D. J. P. 87, 88 Tagatz, M. E. 435 Tanner, W. F. 663, 720, 721, 728, 732, 733, 737, 738 Teal , J. 610 Teal , J. M. 607, 608, 609, 623 Tebeau, C. W. 664 Teller, W. 116, 176, 184 Texas Coastal and Marine Council 948 Thayer, G. W. 449 Theis, A, R. 802 Thompson, P. H. 832 Tippins, H. H. 639 Travis, R. W, 413 Tuyahov, A. J, 872 University of North Carolina, Institute of Marine Sciences 95, 162, 177 University of Texas at Austin, Bureau of Economic Geology 803 Ursin, M. J. 29 U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, 48, 49, 50, 51, 214, 267, 269, 531, 785 211 U.S. Department of the Interior 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 241 U.S. House of Representatives 640 Vallianos, L. 451 Van der Valk, A. G, 414, 915 Vanstory, B. 541, 549, 611, 624, 631, 641 Vincent, L. 89, 415 Waddell, E. 745 Wagner, R. H. 384 Waisel, Y. 30 Waits, E. D. 385 Wake! in, J. H., Jr. 285 Walker, W. B. 894 Waller, T. H. 766, 772, 777 Walsh, G. E. 31 Walton, T. L. 665 Walton, W. R. 767 Ward, F, P. 303, 317 Warner, L. 904, 905, 916, 917, 925, 926, 931, 932 Warnke, D. A. 90, 717 Warren, H. A, 242 Wass, M. L. 311 Wasserman, S. E. 227, 250 Watson, R. L. 873 Wells, B. W. 455, 456 Wentworth, C. E. 127, 178 Wetherbee, D. K. 169 Wharton, C. H. 711 Whelen, T. 874 Wightman, 0. S. 625 Wilkinson, B, H, 837 Williams, G. G, 833 Williams, L. E. , Jr. 666 Williams, R. B. 416, 427, 436, 437, 438, 457 Willis, W. M. 336 Wilson, H. F. 254, 265, 268, 270, 273, 275, 276, 278 Wilson, K, A, 450 Wolf, P. L. 612 Wood, D. 117 Woodhouse, W. W. , Jr. 880, 918 Woolsey, J. R. 613 Wright, L. D. 790, 796 Wunderlich, F. 614 Yasso, W. E. 228, 255, 256 Yonge, C. M. 32 Ziegler, J. M. 484, 496, 498, 499, 532, 538, 542, 550, 555, 615, 626, 632, 642 212 SUBJECT INDEX Alaae 287, 288, 308, 344, 449, 558, 596, 597 Archeology 173, 355, 368, 393, 622, 872 Beach stabilization/restoration 118, 122, 127, 129, 134, 136 178, 214, 224, 245, 252, 262 263, 264, 266, 272, 353, 354 374, 392, 404, 405, 409, 411 419, 421, 459, 524, 531, 537 665, 701, 703, 806, 827, 854 857, 887, 892, 896, 913, 914 918, 920, 952 Beaches 2, 7, 69, 70, 75, 190, 232, 233, 237, 238, 243, 244, 340, 341, 391, 446, 581, 582, 590, 6*8, 653, 655, 831, 847, 849, 873, 875, 885, 888, 891, 902, 907, 947, 949, 950 Birds 13, 14, 15, 16, 35; 140, 144, 145, 146, 147, 1^9, 152, 156, 157, 164, 168, 260, 303, 317, 339, 390, 522, 533, 566, 584, 586, 587, 618, 666, 695, 762, 780, 797, 807, 833, 886, °36, 941 Coastal ecosystems 2, 3, 4, 9, 10, 26, 44, 95, 169, 170, 177, 190, 194, 196, 230,- 242, 247, 257, 280, 287, 300, 305, 308, 309, 326, 327, 333, 344, 358, 361, 384, 393, 426, 428, 444, 453, 460, 468, 480, 483, 4^5, 513, 517, 521, 526, 534, 439, 545, 553, 585, 617, 620, 629, 637, 638, 640, 645, 679, 705, 709, 793, 864, 891, 903, 908, 937, Coastal environments 6, 11, 34, 65, 71, 84, 94, 104, 106, 186, 445, 915 Coastal 63, 75, 88, 130 195 214 228 279 318 335 378 387 412 464 528 546 657 720 742 834 852 896 950 processes 7, 47, 58 64, 66, 67 , 68, 72, 76, 77, 7? ), 80. 81, 91, 110, 120, 121, 1 , 137, 150, 151, 154, , 199, 202, 204 205, , 217, 218, 221 222, , 236, 245, 246 255, , 296. 298, 304 306, , 321, 323, 325 330, , 338 351, 352 362, , 379 381 382 383, , 391 392 397 400, , 413 , 415 425 , 433, , 467 487 518 • 519, , 529 , 530 , 535 , 536, , 548 , 594 , 614 , 615, , 660 , 670 , 673 , 674, , 728 , 733 734 , 735, , 743 , 745 , 781 , 812, , 838 , 840 , 842 , 849, , 863 , 874 , 877 , 891, , 900 , 902 , 907 , 948, , 60, 61, 73, 74, 83, 86, 23, 125, , 188, , 207, , 223, , 256, , 313, , 332, , 369, , 386, , 401, , 451, , 527, , 540, , 634, , 693, , 737, , 815, , 851, , 894, , 949, Dunes 69, 70, 343, 350, 354, 363, 376, 405, 520, 726, 806, 827, 847, 852, 854, 857, 859, 876, 877, 880, 885, 887, 902, 913, 914, 915, 918, 952 Environmental inventory/basel ine 44, 45, 46, 186, 249, 284, 286, 291, 292, 293, 294, 304, 309 310, 319, 320, 322, 324, 329, 331, 334, 360, 377, 465, 466, 469, 486, 523, 541, 549, 611, 624, 631, 641, 661, 662, 749, 755, 784, 799, 821, 869, 881, 882, 883, 884, 888, 895, 898, 899, 908, 921, 925, 926, 930, 931, 932, 941 Estuaries 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 77, 78, 85, 119, 124, 128, 213 132, 133, 138, 1°8, 315, 344, 408, 416, 427, 432, 442, 449, 457, 464, 526, 534, 539, 543, 544, 5^5, 553, 554, 567, 585, 588, 593, 598, 601, 607, 617, 620, 629, 638, 645, 656, 659, 681, 683, 694, 698, 705, 713, 7^6, 747, 748, 750, 752, 782, 805, 864, 910 Fauna 17, 24 , 25, 32, 10°, 115, 155, 161, 230, 389, 418, 422, 423, 429, 430, 431, 440, 441, 444, 476, 485, 493, 497, 516, 526, 534, 539, 545, 551, 553, 585, 591, 592, 602, 606, 617, 619, 620, 623, 627, 629, 633, 636, 638, 639, 644, 652, 677, 711, 716, 718, 724, 730, 764, 765, 767, 776, 798, 805, 808, 813, 879, 893, 933 Fishes 21, 22, 132, 133, 138, 198, 248, 434, 435, 43°, 461, 470, 471, 472, 478, 481, 490, 4Q? , 503, 515, 543, 544, 562, 563, 564, 568, 575, 600, 612, 630, 647, 650, 684, 688, 68°, 704, 708, 710, 712, 748, 75°, 835, 845, 865, 941 Flora 17, 18 20 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, W, 32, 104, 107, 10 °, 11s, 139, 153, 1^5, 161, 171, 180, 181, 183, 208, 211, 220, 221, 247, 257, 280, 292, 300, 309, 314, 326, 333, 336, 33°, 347, 384, 413, 414, 439, 444, 455, 458, 463, 479, 482, 491, 494, 500, 501, 514, 526, 534, 539, 545, 553, 557, 585, 604, 617, 620, 629, 635, 638, 646, 658, 680, 716, 718, 724, 730, 741, 762, 764, 765, 770, 771, 775, 779, 787, 792, 793, 794, 805, 809, 810, 843, 858, 876', 880, 911, 912, 915, 918, 919, 921, 922. 923, 924, 927, 933, 934, 939, 940, 945, 952 328, 394, 396, 406, 474, 508, 509, 511, 547, 559, 571, 572, 573, 576, 577, 582, 583, 613, 691, 725, 769, 788, 78°, 800, 803, 805, 811, 814, 825, 831, 847, 856, 860, 861, 862, 868, 896, 901, 902, 906, 935, 940, 942, 946, 947 Geomorphology 12, 59, 60, 62, 64, 65, 72, 86, 89 . 92, 94, 114, 123, 126, 131, 154, 158, 192, 209, 225, 239, 240, 249, 253, 281, 282, 283, 313, 318, 321, 323, 325, 330, 332, 335, 337, 341, 349, 352, 356, 364, 365, 369, 370, 371, 372, 373, 393, 398, 402, 433, 473, 475, 507, 552, 595, 653, 663, 671, 672, 675, 696, 697, 699, 700, 702, 714, 717, 719, 721, 727, 729, 731, 732, 738, 739, 744, 751, 754, 757, 761, 763, 766, 772, 777, 778, 783, 785, 791, 800, 802, 820, 822, 823, 824, 826, 829, 837, 838, 841, 855, 867, 868, 942 Geology 37, 79, 105, 108, 158, 171, 209, 213, 219, 22Q, 277, 281, History 117, 174, 176, 179, 254, 265, 273, 275, 276, 278, 355, 368, 375, 541, 549, 611, 625, 664, 805, 823, 824 Hurricanes and storms 34, 90, 189, 197, 200, 201, 203, 227, 250, 305, 353, 380, 399, 407, 424, 680, 790, 796, 804, 842, 846, 860, 861, 862, 872, 907, 948 Land use 33, 36, 159, 160, 187, 189, 197, 200, 201, 203, 297, 312, 628, 785, 803, 869, 872, 878, 881, 882, 889, 894, 903, 904, 905, 916, 917, 929, 951, 953 Mammals 43, 163, 166, 167, 216 258, 259, 302, 316, 367, 410, 450, 462, 502, 603, 667, 669, 762, 795, 818, 870, 941, 951, 953 214 Management 3, 48, 113, 135, 159, 191, 197, 200, 267, 285, 295, 343, 348, 361, 417, 420, 424, 844, 877, 885, 894, 895, 897, 909, 920, 937, 49, 50, 51, 112, 160, 187, 188, 201, 203, 263, 299, 305, 312, 362, 3n9, 404, 504, 510, 81*, 889, 890, 892, 899, 903, 908, 944 Manqroves 19, 30, 31, 651, 654, 682, 684, 685, 687, 690, 693 Marine resources 11°, 124, 128, 132, 133, 138, 148, 162, 185, 460, 468, 469, 515, 682, 689, 753, 762, 817, 879 Marine invertebrates 25, 366, 427, 432, 442, 443, 448, 457, 460, 505, 556, 565, 575, 588, 589, 605, 643, 676, 678, 684, 691, 750, 774, 776, 836 Marine vertebrates 28, 750, 879, 893, 938, 941 Navigation 38, 39, 40, 41, 42 Origin 37, 59, 60, 61, 66, 68, 72, 74, 77, 83, 86, 87, 115, 125, 126, 130, 191, 246, 292, 307, 359, 371, 395, 396, 402, 403, 454, 477, 484, 496, 498, 499, 507, 525, 532, 538, 5*2, 550, 555, 560, 615, 616, 626, 632, 642, 736, 740, 786, 791, 815, 853, 867, 873, 875, 885, 946 Ownership 193, 785, 878, 881, 882, 884, 898, 903, °04 , 905, 916, 917, °29, 931, 932 Recreation 5, 117, 135, 159, 160, 215, 241, 254, 265, 273, 275, 276, 278, 297, 29°, 405, 417, 420, 488, 628, 664, 883, 890, 928 Refuges 3, 314, 835, 836 Maritime forests 107, 172, 186, 220, 234, 235, 247, 308, 452, 456, 480, 483, 668, 775 139, 259, 327, 388, 438, 473, 543, 561, 593, 604, 610, 667, 768, 877, 919, 345! 360] 495, 651, Marshes 1, 2 142, 143, 287, 288, 339, 343, 423, 425, 441, 448, 512, 513, 545, 552, 567, 570, 596, 597, 605, 606, 617, 620, 704, 708, 769, 773, 835, 836, 922, 923, 5, 28 , 29 71, 208, 231 254, 301, 304 311, 346, 357. 385, 430, 436 437, 458, 460 468, 526, 534 539, 553, 557 559, 585, 589 591, 600, 602 603, 607, 608 609, 623, 629 638, 709, 756 , 758, 830, 832 , 836, 895, 902 910, 924 Natural history auide 175, 210, 226, 289, 886, 939 U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE: 1978 — 746-381/4540 Region No. 4 215 Of Gulf io- 0 m 5fl (1) CO 1 J*4 0 00 oq ml